THE

u 00 FLETE PHONOGRAPHER

aspm ait-ion

P HO N O GWITH ITS AP P LIC ATION TO A L

'

L B R AN CHES O F R E P O R TIN G ,

A F F OR DIN G THE F ULLE ST IN STR UCTION TO THOSE WHO HAVE

N O T THE ASSISTAN CE O E “7 O R AL ‘

l‘v A OHER ; AL SO

IN TEN DED HOOL BOOK.

J A ME S E . MUN S O N

STE N O G R A PHER TO m m BUR R O G A TE’S CO UR T or Y ORK.

N EW YO R K

O A K L E Y M A S O N ,

2 1 M U R R AY S T R E E T .

1868.

R A P H

P R EF A CE .

THE use of P honogra phy by shortha nd writers ha s becom e so gen

( m l , a nd the superiority of the sys tem over a ll other kinds of ste

nogra p hy so univers a lly a cknowledged , tha t it is now unnecess a ry tos a y a nything of its com pa ra tive m erits

,or to pres s its cla im s upon the

public, forno one a bout to com m ence the study of shortha nd wouldthink fora m om ent of ta king up a ny other . The principles , too, ofthe Science of P honetics , upon which P honogra phy is ba sed, a re , in a .

sort of genera l wa y , so‘ com m only unders tood, tha t a n extended ex

plan a tion of them seem s to be no longer necessa ry . It is , however,highly proper , on presenting this new phonogra phic instruction -bookto the public , tha t I should sta te m y rea sons forso doing , a nd m ore esp ecia l ly a s it introduces severa l im porta n t m odifica tions of the sys tem .

The lea ding fea tures of P honogra phy a re the result of the la bors ofMr. Is a a c P itm a n of Engla nd, who fornea rly thirty yea rs ha s devotedm uch of his tim e to its developm ent a nd propa g a tion ; but the highdegre

‘

of perfection to which it h a s been brought , is owing in grea tm ea sure to the suggestions of thous a nds of pra ctica l phonogra phers ,both in Engla nd a nd the United Sta tes . This m ode of developm enth a s its m erits a nd dem erits . Com ing a s it ha s from the bra ins of sucha va st num ber a nd va riety of people, P honogra phy poss esses a ri chnesso f m a teria l which could ha rdly ha ve been obta ined in a ny other wa ybut , on the other ha nd , this kind of growth ha s ha d a tendency torender the sys tem less uniform a nd cons istent in m a tters of deta iltha n it would ha ve been ba d it em a n a ted from a s ingle m ind.

N ew,m y first a im h a s been to restore , a s fa ra s poss ible, s im plicity

a n d ha rm ony , by a dhering to genera l principles a nd disca rding a ll

ur»necess a ry expedients ; a nd m y second, to m ore com pletely a da pt thesys tem to the requirem ents of the reporter . Mr. P itm a n

,in his very

la uda ble des ire a nd efforts to bring the benefi ts of P honogra phywithin rea ch of the m a sses of Engla nd, ha s s erious ly, a nd a s I thinkunnecess a rily, im pa ired it a s a m ere sys tem of s tenogr a phy. Thiswork

,however

,ha s been prepa red express ly in the interes t of report

ing, a nd hence everything tha t would tend to hinder the lea rner ina cquiring a knowledge of the a rt fortha t purpose , h a s been om itted.

IV P R EF A CE .

With this end in view,wha t is term ed the “Corresponding Style"

(of P honogra phy ha s been en tirely disca rded, beca us e its tendency wa sto fos ter a disconnected a nd lengthy s tyle of writing wholly incompa tible with reporting ha bits ; for, a s it is a principle of the hum a n

m ind tha t firs t im press ions a re the m os t la s ting , it often ta kes yea rsof pra ctice to fully a cquire the “R eporting Style" when the writer ha sonce indulged him self for a ny cons idera ble tim e in the u se of the“Corresponding .

"In fa ct, I ha ve often hea rd m a ny of the oldes t

reporters s a y (a nd I will a dd tha t it a lso a ccords with m y own exp e

ricuce) tha t in very ra pid reporting they were s till troubled with a .

tendency to use long a nd d isconnected form s ; or, in other words , toreturn to the form s a nd s tyle of writing tha t they used while lea rning .

Therefore , in stea d of dividing P honogra phy into two dis tinct styles ,one to be used a s a stepping- s tone to the other , I ha ve trea ted it a sone unbroken system ,

a nd ha ve endea vored to furnish a seri es of less ons tha t will conduct the lea rner a s ra pidly a s poss ible , a nd withouta ny interm edia te ha lting . directly to a knowledge of the principlesa nd pra ctice of the a rt in its highes t developm ent .

The other m os t im porta nt cha nges tha t I ha ve m a de a re thos e ofs im plifica tion ; a nd in this respect Iha ve m erely a dhered or returned toesta blished rules a nd principles where other a uthors ha ve depa rtedfrom them . A nd this h a s been done a t a n occa s iona l sa crifice of

am urent brevity, though not of rea l or p ra ctica l brevity for it m us t beborne in m ind tha t swift writing is quite a s m uch a m enta l a s a m a n

ua l proces s , a nd consequently a ny a ttem pt to shorten the outlinesof words by exceptiona l expedients , or by devia tions from genera lrules , is only tra nsferring the la bor from the fingers to the bra in , a ndshould never be done unless the ga in in brevity is very m a rked

, a s

the hesita tion ca used by the a nom a lous form is a p t to m ore tha n con

sum e the tim e s a ved by the relief to the ha nd. These s eem inglyobvious princip les ha ve heretofore been but little unders tood by writers on the subject of P honogra phy, a nd the sys tem ha s in consequencebecom e so com plica ted by exceptiona l form s a nd expedients tha t it ha sa s yet fa iled to exhibit its full powers . In one of the ea rlies t A m erica n phonogra phic books“this tendency to com plica tion is noticed a nd

depreca ted. The writer s a ys , “Who does not know tha t a few hundred words subject to exceptiona l or pa rticula r rules throw doubt a nduncerta inty over every word in the la ngua ge .

"This rem a rk m us t

not,however , be cons trued a s condem ning the use of contr a ctions

,

for, to use the words of the s a m e writer, im perfect skeletons crea te

no confus ion , ina sm uch a s if the contra ction ha ppens to be unknown

0 The P honogra phtcWord-Book N o. 1, by A ndrews, 85 Boyle. 1849.

P R EF A CE . v

to the writer, he m erely writes the word in full , a nd no brea ch of a nyrule is com m itted while , when known ,

they con tribute to brevity.

a nd seldom , in a ny ca s e , ca use a ny difficulty in rea ding . They ought ,therefore, to be provided for, a nd a re not to be considered a s fa llingunder the condem na tion of exceptiona l a nd pa rticula r rules .

The chief m a teria l phonogra phic ch a nge in troduced in this work ,beca use it is the one upon which m os t of the otherm odifica tions depend, is the a doption of the vowel- s ca le of Isa a c P itm a n

’s Tenth

,

Edi

tion . This sca le differs from the old one in the invers ion of the orderof the dot-vowels (the da s h-vowels rem a ining the sa m e a s before), a sshown in the following a rra ngem ents

O LD SCA L E .

a w o

So ra dica l a cha nge a s this would not be a dopted by m e except forwha t I cons ider to be good, a nd , indeed, im pera tive rea sons in fa ct

,

nothing would jus tify it un less it ca n be shown tha t the new sca leoffers som e very cons idera ble a dva nta ges over the old . This , however

, I think I sha ll ha ve no difiiculty in fully dem ons tra ting. But ,

a s no ga ins ca n ever be secured in P honogra phy by introducingcha nges , without som e corresponding losses , a nd a s such losses a re

a lwa ys sure to present them selves to the ca sua l observer a grea t de a lsooner , a nd wi th m uch m ore force

,tha n the ga ins , it wi ll be necess a ry

form e to s ta te this m a tter som ewha t in deta il .The m os t im portant funda m enta l principle of P honetics is wha t is

term ed the “Second L aw”

of Dr. L a tha m ,which requires “tha t

sounds within a determ ined degree of likenes s be repres ented by s ignswithin a determ ined degree of likeness while sounds beyond a certa indegree of likeness be represented by distinct a nd different s igns , a ndtha t uniform ly .

”The observa nce of this l a w in the a rra ngem ent of

the va rious deta ils of the phonogra phic sys tem ha s m a de it the m os tperfect a nd scientific m ethod of shortha nd writing ever devised. In

the represen ta tion of the consona nt- sounds the rule ha s been strictlyca rried out, a nd , a lthough a few exceptions occur, they a re only sucha s could not poss ibly be a voided . Thus , we see

"

the four G uttura lsMy , ga y, ing, a nd ha y represented by four of the horizonta l signs thesix P a la ta ls cha y , ja y, fish, zhce, rec, a nd ya y by s igns inclined to theright ; the s ix Denta ls tee, dee, ees , zee, 75th, a nd dhee by perpendicula rs igns ; a nd the five L a bia ls p ee, bee, cf , vee, a nd wa y by s igns inclined tothe left. A ga in ,

the di stinction between the brea th-conson a nts a nd

the subvoca ls is very a ppropria tely m a rked by a m ere difference in0

V1 P R EF A CE .

the sha ding . B ut when we com e to the vowels , a ver7m a teria l devi a tion is seen

,for in the old vowel-sca le this im porta nt la w seem s

to ha ve been in a m ea sure ignored or viola ted, a nd tha t wi thout theexcus e of a rea l or even a ppa rent necessity. By exa m ining into thna ture of the vowel-sounds it will be found tha t they a re sus ceptibleof three different a nd distinct cla ss ifica tions ; na m ely, into long a nd

short vowels , pa la ta ls a nd la bia ls , a nd into open a nd close vowels .

N ow,in the old vowel-sca le the firs t fi ve of these cla s s ifica tions a re

very a ppropria tely a nd fully shown ; the firs t by em ploying hea vys igns for long, a nd light s igns forshort vowels ; a nd the second , bywriting the pa la ta ls with dot-s igns , a nd the la bia ls with da shes . But

the third, a nd the m os t im porta nt cla s sifica tion pra ctica lly , a nd the

one tha t should ha ve been indica ted by the m a rked dis tinction of dif

ference of pos ition ,is entirely overlooked . In the new vowel-s ca le

this gla ring defect is rem oved, a nd the cons is tency a nd ha rm ony of thesystem com pletely res tored . Still, if the innova tion ha d not ca rrieda long with it grea t pra ctica l benefit , a s well a s the m ere m enta l sa tisfa c tion of being right in principle , I should proba bly never ha ve feltjustified in m a king it . Indeed ; it wa s the pra ctica l ga in to be derivedfrom the cha nge which first a ttra cted m y a ttention . But I ha ve foundin this insta nce

,a s on m a ny other occa s ions while prepa ring this work ,

tha t it wa s im poss ible to sepa ra te principle from pra ctice, a nd tha t the

m ore im plicitly I obeyed genera l a nd funda m enta l rules , a nd the m oreclosely I a dhered to correct principles , rejecting a s m uch a s poss iblea ll expedients a nd com prom ises , the less difficulty I h a d with m y

pra ctice.

In the ea rly pa rt of m y experience a s a shortha nd reporter , som eeight or nin e yea rs a go, I found , a nd I ha d a lso hea rd it rem a rkedby others , tha t in s

'

wift writing a grea t dea l of uncerta inty wa softentim es ca used by the indistinctness of the tick or da sh word-s igns ,a rising from the lia bility , on the one ha nd, of m istak ing them forha lflength signs , a nd on the other

,of confounding them with the dotword

s igns . This difficulty I conceived the idea of rem edying, by subs ti

tuting forthese ticks , full-length s tem s igns , which would not onlyoffer the grea t a dva nta ge of being a lwa ys dis tinct, but, a s a com p en

s a tion forloss of brevity owing to the increa sed length , a nd s om etim esthe curva ture of the new signs , would furnish m uch grea ter fa cil ity inphra se writing, from the a pplica tion to them of the va rious p rinciplesof a bbrevia tion a nd consona nt m odifica tion , which wa s not poss iblewith the tick-signs . But a t the very outset of m y a ttem pt I encountored a serious obs ta cle , a nd one which fora tim e seem ed insurm ount

a ble . I found tha t a s the vowels were then a rra nged it would beim p ossible to effect a nything but a partia l reform in this respect

,ex

0

P R EF A CE . vii

eep t by throwing a grea t m a ny words out of their proper pos itions ,a nd thus , while rem oving one defect, introduce or a ugm ent a notherperha ps equa lly undes ira ble . However , a fter a long s eries of exp erim ents , in which Mr. Cha rles E . Wilbour ga ve m e very va lua ble a s

s is tence , I discovered tha t by reversing the order of the dot-vowelsof the old sca le , the difii culty of pos ition would a lso disa ppea r ; a nd Iim m edia tely a dopted the new sca le , introduced the proposed cha nge inrega rd to the word signs , a nd ha ve continued to use these im provem ents ever s ince .

There a re a lso other a dva nta ges tha t ha ve a risen from the use of thenew sca le , one of the m os t im porta nt a nd pra ctica l of whi ch is the increa sed legibility it gives to P honogra phy . F orm erly, when broa d ,open vowels were pa ired with close ones , if by a ccident

,in writing

voca lized P honogra phy , a first-pla ce vowel wa s a sort of neutra l,

"

tha t is , neither a proper dot nor a proper da sh , we ha d to choose between the diss im ila r sounds e a nd a w

,— the one not being a t a l l sug

gestive of the other . In the new sca le we ha ve to choos e between a b

a nd a w,two sounds so s im ila r tha t the one would

,in a ll proba bility ,

im m edia tely sugges t the other. Thus , a n occa s iona l s tum bling in therea ding of phonogra phic writing, owing to uncerta inty a s to the intended cha ra cter or length of a vowel- s ign , is rendered m uch lesslikely to occur in the new sca le tha n in the old . It is a lso properlycla im ed by the a dvoca tes of the new sca le tha t it is a n im provem entupon the old one, beca use in pra ctice it renders the proces s of writingthe vowel- s igns m uch briefer a nd m ore s im ple tha n it wa s before.F or insta nce , a s the short vowel a’ (the sound of a in m ad) is m uchoftener us ed tha n the vowel ‘

i (the sound of z‘

in p in) a s the initia lsound of words , a nd a s it is the com m on pra ctice of phonogra phers ,a lthough in devia tion from the genera l rule , to write the s igns of

initia l vowels before com m encing to write the consona n t outline , itfollows tha t [i is m ore conveniently, a s well a s m ost a ppropria tely ,w n

'

tten in the first pos ition . A ga in ,the sound “

11 is bes t written inthe third pos ition ,

beca use tha t vowel (which is often represented inthe com m on spelling by the letter y) o ccurs m uch m ore frequentlytha n a ny other a t the end of words , a nd im m edia tely preceding thela st consona nt or sylla ble of a word . By writing firs t a ccording to theold sca le , a nd then a ccording to the new , such words a s p ity ,

city, A t

la ntwb,a bility, ap tly , fossil, m a ny, etc ,

the ga in will be very a ppa rent.Then , too , the third pos ition for fina l “

72 com es m ore ea s ily to thewriter's ha nd tha n does the first, beca use there is a n a na logy betweenthe pos ition which it now occupies in a phonogra phic outline , a nd itspos ition in the com m on spelling of the word,—being in both ca ses a tthe end.

Vl l l P R EF A CE .

The grea test pra ctica l benefit , however, tha t com es from the use

of the new a rra ngem ent of the vowels , is the increa s ed legibility it

gives to unvoca lized P honogra phy, by m ore genera lly throwing wordstha t conta in the s a m e or s im ila r consona nts in to different pos itions .

The rea son of this is , tha t a s in the ca s e of such words the consona ntscea se to be a m ea ns of distinction ,

there is a na tura l tendency to m a keit by a m a rked difference between the sounds of the vowels , a nd especia lly those upon which the a ccent fa lls ; a nd , hence , a s in the new

sca le those vowels tha t differ m os t in sound a re represented by s ignstha t difi'

erm ost in pos ition , a nd a s words a re written in the pos itionof their a ccented vowels , it follows tha t words of s im ila r outlineswi ll be m ore likely to ta ke pos itions dis tinct from ea ch other, tha nif the old sca le were us ed. It wa s this very peculia rity of the newsca le tha t so rea dily a nd com pletely solved the problem —of whichm ention ha s a lrea dy been m a de—of repla cing the tick- s igns by s im ples tem s , without detrim ent to the sys tem .

I ha ve a lso rejected from genera l use the dot- s ign forh a nd thebrief signs forw a nd y a nd a following vowel . In the ea rly edi tionsof P honogra phy ,

before w a nd y were cons idered a s consona nts ,no

s tem s were a ppropria ted to repres ent them , a nd hence from necess itythey were written with s igns deta ched from the skeleton of the word .

A nd even a fter thes e sounds were pla ced on a footing with the otherconsona nts in respect to ha ving s tem - s igns , it s till rem a ined neca ss a ry to reta in the old signs in certa in cla ss es of words , beca us e them odifica tions of the new s tem s were a rbitra rily used for other purposes ; a s , for ins ta nce , the ha lf- lengths of the s igns forw a nd y to

represent respectively rd a nd ld, ins tea d of wt a nd gt. N ow,however ,

a s the stem s which a re provided forthes e s ounds , m a y be m odified inthe sa m e m a nner a nd to the sa m e extent a s a ny other cons ona nts ign ,

the old bri ef s igns a re not only useles s , but , if em ployed, s erveto perpetua te irregula r a nd incons istent outlines , a nd thus to unnecess a rily com plica te the sys tem . The rejection of the deta ched s igns forw a nd y ha s ena bled m e

,too, to cons truct a new a nd m uch m ore scientific

schem e forrepresenting the diphthongs a nd double vowels than ha s

heretofore been poss ible . I ha ve a lso , for the s a ke of convenience,

a dopted the pla n which preva ils with the English phoneticia ns , of

never using the diphthong cw a t the com m encem ent of words , buttrea ting the initia l elem ent a s a consona nt

, a nd representing it bythe sign ya y ; a nd , on the other ha nd, of seldom or never us ingthe sign ya y

l

in the m iddle of words , a vowel-sign being subs ti

tuted. This som ewha t a rbitra ry rule ha s been a dopted beca use it isoften difficult to decide whether a 3/ or 8 sound is the one used a nd

beca use uniform ity of writing a m ong phonogra phers is even m ore

P R EF A CE . ix

des ira ble tha n'

a bsolute a ccura cy of repres enta tion in ea ch pa rticula rca se tha t m ay a rise . I h a ve ta ken grea t pa ins to fully cla ss ify thewords given in the Writing Exercises , so tha t the lea rner, from thehea ding of ea ch section , will be a ble to determ ine rea dily the outlineof every word in it . These exercis es will a lso be found to be very full ,conta ining in fa ct nea rly a ll the words of the la ngua ge so tha t whilethe ha s ty lea rner is a t liberty to m a ke om is sions a t his plea sure , thewa nts of those who wish to be m ore thorough a re a m ply provided for.

I ought , too , in j us tice to s a y ,tha t ha d I not ha d the old Word Books

of A ndrews Boyle to a ss ist m e, I never would ha ve ha d the tim e or

inclina tion to do this pa rt of the work .

It ha s been a com m on fa ult with writers of stenogra phic books , fromthe beginning of shortha nd down to the presen t da y , to pla gia rize toa n unlim ited extent from other a uthors , ‘ trus ting no doubt to thea lm ost univers a l ignora nce of the public in rega rd to the a rt

, or toits m ys tery, to screen their wholes a le pira cies from detection . To thehonor of a uthors of phonogra phic works , however , it should be sa id,tha t they ha ve very genera lly been exceptions to this rule . In em ulation of the m ore honora ble of these writers , a nd a lso by wa y of a persona l a cknowledgm ent on m y pa rt to those who ha ve so kindly a nd

freely a s sis ted m e in prepa ring this work, I propose , a s briefly a s p os

s ible , to give the credit of the m ore im porta nt cha nges new introduced

,to whom i t rightfully belongs .

There is proba bly no one phonogra pher who h a s contributed m oreto the la ter im provem ents of P honogra phy tha n Mr. Wilbour. It wa s

he,I believe , who firs t suggested the pla n of distinguishing on a ll curves

the l-hook from the r-hook by m a king the form er large a nd the la tters m a ll thus rem oving the necess ity forthe incons istency of cha ngingthe form s of f , v, ”I, dh. m ,

a nd n,when the r—hook wa s a tta ched , a nd of

m a king exceptions to the r a nd Lhook principle . of the letters 3 , z, I, mg,n , m , h, w, y , a nd downwa rd a nd upwa rd r. We a re a lso indebted tohim for the tor-hook a nd to his experim en ts a nd pra ctice is due ingrea t m ea sure the

'

high degree of perfection to which the a rt of phra sewriting ha s now been brought. To Mr. J . A . Ma cL a uchla n ,

whose investiga tions respecting the vowels , a nd the bes t m odes of representingthem , ha ve been very extens ive , belongs the credit of ha ving first suggested the idea of a rra nging a nd representing the group-vowels sub

s ta ntia lly a s I ha ve done in m y double-vowel s chem es . The nom encla ture tha t Iha ve a dopted is the s a m e a s tha t given by Mr. P itm a n

in the Seven th Edition of his Ma nua l , with a few slight cha nges a da pting it to the recent a ltera tions of the sys tem . The ya y a nd way hookswere firs t sugges ted by m yself. I ta ke this opportunity, too, of express ing m y obliga tions to the reporters of N ewYork genera lly forthe

L“

I P R EF A CE .

interest they ha ve m a nifes ted in this work, a nd forthe encou: a gem enithey ha ve so consta ntly extended to m e during its prepara tion ; a ndespecia lly should I tha nk Mr. A ndrew Devine , whom I ha ve oftenconsulted en doubtful points , a nd whose relia ble judgm ent ha s beenof very grea t service to m e. The engra ving of the illustra tions in thetext a nd of the R ea ding Exercis es wa s done by the skillful ha nd ofMr.Cha uncey B . Them e, of Ska nea teles , N . Y . a nd fornea tness , clea rness , a nd bea uty, I confidently a s sert tha t this work ha s never beenequa led by a ny other phonogra phic engra ver . A nd when we cons idertha t the whole of it wa s done over three hundred m iles a wa y from the

a uthor, its en tire freedom from errors a nd m is ta kes is a lm os t m a rvelous . To the ca refulness a nd a ttention of the rea der of the proofs ofthis work, Mr. Stephen Jenkins , is due in grea t m ea sure the h igh degree of a ccura cy of t he letter-press m a tter.While prepa ring this work, I ha ve consulted a l l the phonogra phic

instruction books , a nd m os t of the phonogra phic periodica ls , tha t ha vebeen published from tim e to tim e in this coun try a nd in Engla nd, a swell a s quite a num ber of works on other system s of s tenogra phy a lsom a ny phonetic works , including those of Mr. A . J . Ellis , a nd Dr. L atha m '

s Ha nd-B ook of the English L a ngua ge .

"I ha ve , however,

derived by farthe m ost a s sist a nce from the old, but very phiIO SO phic,works of A ndrews a nd Boyle . A new

, uncom pleted work, by Mr. A .

J . Ma rsh of Sa n F ra ncisco , shows , in m any respects , a keen perception of wha t is required by lea rners of P honogra phy, a lthough it doesnot introduce a ny extensive reform s of the system . F rom it I borrowed the rule a t section 120 . B ut I ha d written section 10 3 a lm os tin its exa ct words , m onths before I ever sa wMr. Ma rsh's work, whi chconta ins the s a m e new a nd us eful rul e.

A t the tim e sections 5 1, 5 2 , sa m e 91 were written and stereotyped ,I ha d not exa m ined the new (1864) edition of Webs te r‘

s Una bridgedDictiona ry. Ha d I done so I should ha ve found tha t m y own conclusions a s to the na ture of the elem ents of the diphthong cw ha d beena nticipa ted in the introduction to tha t work, a nd I a lso should not

ha vewritten section 91 a s it now s ta nds . Indeed .when I consider howdeficient m os t lexicogra phers ha ve been in knowledge of the science ofP honetics , a nd tha t not one s ingle dictiona ry (previous editions ofWeb

ster’s included) ha d been up wi th the tim es in this respect, I a m dc

lighted to find tha t this new edition is a n exception, a nd tha t it iseverything the m ost exa ct a nd thorough phoneticia n could des ire.

J . E. M.

N o. 41 P A R K R ow, a Yonx,Sep tem ber, 1868.

TA B L E O F CO N TEN TS.

IN TR O DUCTIO N

EXP L A N A TIO N or TER MS

TA B L E or CO N SO N A N TS

SIMP L E CO N SO N A N T SIG N S.

Consona nt Defined— N um ber of Cons ona nts—R em a rks on the Ta ble of Conson a nts—Cla s s ifica tion of the Cons ona nts—Qua lity of Cons ona nts—F orm a tionof Consona n t-Sounds—O rigin of the Consona nt-Signs

— A na logy in the A p

p rop ria tion of the Signs—Mnem onic A s s is ta nce in L ea rning the P hono

gra p hs P a ge 19—23O F THE MA N N E R O F WR ITIN G THE CO N SO N A N T SIG N S.

Excep tions—Cha y a nd R ee distinguished—Hints to the B eginner—Size of theP honogra phs—Sha ding of theHea vy Signs , etc.

—P honogra p hic Sp eed—Exercises to be R ea d a s well a s Written

SIMP L E VOWEL S.

Definition—N um ber of Vowel-Sounds—METHO D or VO CA L IZATIO N—VOWELSCA L E—N a m es of the Vowels— R eckoning of Vowel-P os itions—VO CA L IZATIO N or SIN G L E CO N SO N A N T-STEMS—Consona nt A lwa ys Written F irs tMethod of R ea ding Single Voca lized Cons ona nt-Ste m s—Ma nner of Writingthe V0wel~Signs—The Vowel-Sca le not P erfectly P honetic—Two SoundsSom etim es R epresented by O ne Sign 26—28

DIPHTHO N G S.

Definition- N um ber of Diphthongs—A na lys is of the Diphthongs—R em a rks on

the Diphthong EW—TA B L E or DIP HTHO N G s—Direction of the Dip hthongSigns N ever Cha nged—Two Vowels Concurrinn ip hthongs Joined to Con

sona nts . 3 0-3 2

CO N SO N A N T P O SITIO N S.

P osr'rron orHO R IZO N TA L STEMS—P O SITIO N on P E R P EN DICUL A R A m ) IN CL IN ED

S'rnm s . 3 2

JO IN IN G THE CO N SO N A N T STEMS.

Consona nt tem s R ep ea ted—Mode of Joining Certa in Stem s—O rder of R ea dingConsona nt—Stem s 33

METHOD O F WR ITIN G VOWE L S BETWEEN CO N SO N A N T SIG N S.

R ule—Excep tions . 34

P O SITIO N O F WO R DS .

When a Word is Written in P os ition—Exa m p les—Menta l a nd Ma nua l P roces s inWriting P honogra phy. 34 . 35

xii TA B L E O F CO N TEN TS.

PHO N O G R A P HIC AN A L YSIS.

G enera l R ule—The E a rMisled by the Eye—Words Sp elled A Lke but P ro

nounced Differently—Words P ronounced A like but Sp elled Diff erentlyCa ution resp ecting OH,

SH,TH, a nd N G

—W a nd Y a t the End of Sylla bles

Double Consona nt-Sounds R a re—Dis p arity in N um ber B etween L etters a ndSounds—C, Q, a nd X—N B efore the'

Sounds of Key a nd G a y—Silent L etters

O m itted—F ina l E genera lly Silent—EW N ot Used a fter R —Una ccented Vowels : G enera l R ule—Excep tions—P IIO N O G R A P E IO SP EL L IN G P a ge 35 -39

ESS A N D ZEE CIR CL E .

N a m e of the E s s -Circle—Method of Joining the Circle to Cons ona nt-Stem s

N a m es of the E s s-Circle Com p ounds—Sa m e Sign Us ed forE s s a nd Zee—E s sa nd Zee Distingui shed—METHO D O F W R ITIN G THE CIR CL E B ETWE EN TW O

CO N SO N A N T-STEMS—Short R ule—VO CA L IZA TIO N orSTEMS wr'rn CIR CL E S A 'r

TA a D —O rder of Writing—O rder of R ea ding—Ca ution : The Circle Joinedto Up -Stroke Stem s—VO CA L IZA TIO N WHE N THE CIR CL E O ccurs IN THE MID

DL E O E A W O R D—Us es of the Circl xcep tions—When the Stem -Sign

should be Us ed Instea d of the Circle

THE L A R G E CIR CL E .

N a m e a nd Use of the L a rge Circle—The L a rge Circle Joined to Consona nt—Stem s

—V0 0 A L IZA 'rIO N O F STEMS W ITHTHE L A R G E CIR CL E A TTA CHED—Voca liza tionof the L a rge Circle—E s s a nd Zee Sounds Dis tinguished— L O O P S F O B ST 0 8

ZD, A N D STE—Sm a ll L oop , ST or ZD—L a rge L oop , STE—N a m es of the

L oop s—Voca liza tion of Stem s with L 0 0 p s A tta ched—Sm a ll L oop Sha ded

forZD—The Sm a ll Circle A dded to SIS, ST,a nd STR

R UL ES F O R THE USE O F ISH, SHEE , EL , L EE , ER ,A N D R EE .

Uses of Ish—Us es of Shes—Either Ish orShee—Uses of E l—Uses of L ee—E itherE l orL ech—Us es of Er—Uses of R ee—E ither ErorR ee

G R OUP CO N SO N A N TS AN D THE IR SIG N S— IN ITIAL HO O KS.

The L iquids L a nd R —TI‘EE E L -Hooxs—THE ER —Hoox s—N a m es of the E l and Er

Hook Com binations—Ca ution—Mnem onic A s s ista nce in L ea rning the El a ndErHook Signs—VO CA L IZA TIO N O F DO UB L E CO N SO N A N 'r-SIG N s—O rder of

R ea ding Voca lized Double Cons ona nt-Signs—Uses of the El a nd ErHookSigns—El orErHook Signs Joined to P receding Stem s— Excep tion, R elSP E CIA L VO CA L IZA 'rIO N—Two F orm s for SL , SR , ZL , ZR

— Their Us es a t

the Com m encem ent of Words—The E s s -Circle P refixed to the El a nd Er

Hook Signs—The Circles a nd ST L oop P refixed to the Stra ight Er-HookSigns—O rder of R ea ding Voc alized She] a nd Sker Signs - TE E W A Y Hock—TIIE YA Y HO OK—HO O K F O B EN , IN , O R UN—N a m e a nd Us e of the Initia lEu-Hook 47—63

F IN A L HO OK A N D O THE R MODIF ICA TIO N S.

EE A N D VEE B oom —N a m es of the Ef-Hook Com pounds—Voca liza tion—R nle forWriting—R ule forR ea ding—R f a nd Vee Distinguished—Ef a nd VeeHook on

Curves—EN -Hoox—N a m es of theEu-Hook Com p ounds—Voca l iza tion—Whena n Ef orEn Hook should N ot be Used—SE UN B oone—N a m es of the ShunHookCom pounds—Voca liza tlon—ShenUsed Instea dofShun—S m a ll B ook for

Shun—Its N a m e—HO OK F O B TR ,DR , onDER—N a m es of theTr-Hook a nd its

0 0 .

TA B L E O F CO N TE N TS. Xl l l

Com p ounds—Tet a ndDerDis tinguished p ecia lVoca liza tion oftheTet -Hook—CIR cL E s A N D L O O P S A DDED To THE F IN A L HO O K SIG N S—E s s—Circle A ddedto the Ef, Shun , T

’

er, a nd Curved Eu-Hook Signs—Circles a nd L oop s A dded

to the Stra ight Eu-Hook Signs— N a m es of the Com bina tions of Stem s , F ina l

Hooks , a nd Circles orL oop s—Ca ution : The Err-Hook Circles Seldom Used

in the Middle of Words—E s s -Circle Us ed forEns—The E SS-Circle a nd IshunA dded to the E l i-Hook Circles a nd L oop s—The E SS—Circle A dded to IshunF ina l Hooks Used in the Middle ofWords—Circle Ins ide ofHooks—L EN G THE N IN O—Double-L ength Curved SignS—N a m es O f Double-L ength CurvesP os itions Of L engthened Stem s—P os itions of Horizonta l Stem s—P os itionsof Downwa rd L engthened Curves—P os itions of Upwa rd L engthened Curves-Voca liza tion of L engthened Curves—F ina l Hooks R ea d B efore the A ddedCons ona nts—F ina l Circle or L oop to be R ea d A fter the A dded Cons ona nts—Sp ecia l Voca liza tion—P O SITIO N S O E DO UB L E -L EN G TH STR A IGHT STEM

HA L VIN C‘r—Ha lf-L ength Stem s N a m es of the Ha lf-L ength Sign s—Ca ution

Ha lving of Stem s with F ina l Circles orL oop s A tta ched— P O SITIO N S O E HA L EL E N G TH Su m s—Horizonta l Stem s— P erp endicula r a nd Inclined Stem s—VOca lized Ha lf-L ength Signs—O rder of R ea ding—Dee a nd Tee Dis tinguishedSP ECIA L R EMA R K S UP O N THE HA L E -LEN eTn s—Im pw p erJoinings—Sht A fterEf orVee—Stra ightHa lf-“L engths in Sa m e Direction N ot A llowed—Sylla blesTed and Ded—Ha lf-L engths Disjoined—E s t Struck Upwa rd—Media l VowelA fterHa lf-L ength—Stem -Signs forTee orDee B efore a F ina l Vowel—Exception : Sp ecia l L icens e—A m biguous O utlines , How A voided—Ha lf-L ength R ee—Two Vowels before F ina l Tee orDee—F ina l Dee P receded by E l, R ee, orEn, etc

—Upwa rd a nd Downwa rd Stem s Ha lved P a ge 5 3—63

G R O UP VOWEL S A N D THEIR SIG N S—IMP R O P ER DIPHTHO N G S.

G enera l R em a rks— Coa les cence O f the Double-Vowels— Com p os ition of the

Double-Vowels—R em a rks on the Double-Vowel Signs—TA B L E O E DO UB L E

VOWE L SIG N S—Sim p le Signs Instea d of Double A llowa ble—TR EB L E VOWELSIG N s—Sa m e Sign Used forO ther Double orTreble Vowels—L icense a s toDirection of the G roup -Vowel Signs

THE A SP IR A TE HA Y, A N D N OMIN A L CO N SO N A N T.

Dot-Signs—Tick-Signs .

STEN O TYP Y .

CoN SO N A N Ts‘L ee,

’ ‘ R e.

’a nd ‘E s s ’—Stenotyp es of Stem s a nd of Cir

cles , Hooks , etc. , Distinguished— Stenotyp es O f Sha ded Circles , etc—Stenotyp es of O utlines Conta ining More tha n O ne Stem —E s s -Circle B etweenStem s—VOWE L S 67—70

G EN E R AL R EMA R KS O N OUTL IN ES O F WO R DS.

Sp EcIA L DIR ECTIO N S A s To CER TA IN O UTL IN E S—Initia l L etters—F ina l Sylla bles-L y

‘-R y

‘-Ty

' In’a nd O u

’-Ture’—The P a s tTens e . 70—73

A BB R EVIATIO N .

O MISSIO N O F VowE L s—Vowels to be O m itted—Vowels to be Ins erted~ W O R Ds

DISTIN G UISHED BY DIF F E R EN CE O E O UTL IN E , P O SITIO N , etc—Words Comm encing with ‘Il ,

’ ‘IID,’ ‘In ,

’ ‘Ir,’ ‘Un ,

’ ‘Eu’—L is t of Words Distingui shedby Difference of O utline, P os ition , or Voca liza tion—O MISSIO N or CO N SO

N A N Ts —WO R D-SIc —Lrs t of WOrd-Signs N ow’a nd N ew

’ —CO N TR A O

TA B L E O F CO N TEN I‘

S.

TrO N s—P refixes a nd Suflixes—PreflxeS—SufflxeS—O m is s ion O i SlightlyEnnscia ted Cons ona nts—A rbitra ry Contra ctions—O m is s ion of F ina l Sylla bles~O m is s ion of Hooks—Excep tions—L is t of Word-Signs a nd Contra ctionsR EMA R KS O N THE WO R D-SIG N S A N D CO N TR A CTIO N S—Sa m e Sign forP res enta nd P a st Tens es—The P lura l of N ouns- The P os ses s ive Ca se O f ' N ouns

—Third P erson Singul a r of Verbs—Sa m e Sign for A djective a nd A d

verb P a ge 74-97

PHR A SEO G R AP HY .

Two Kinds O f P hra ses—CIR CL E S A N D L O O P S A s ,’ ‘Ha s ,

’ ‘Is ,’ ‘His ,

’or

‘Us ’

A dded by the E s s -Circle TO ,’ ‘It,

’or The

’A dded by Cha nging the Circle

to a Sm a ll L oop There ,’or

‘Their’ A dded by Cha nging the Circle to a

L a rge L oop—THE HO O Ks A ll,’ or ‘Will’ A dded by the EI-HO Ok Are,

’

‘O ur,’or

‘O r

’A dded by the Er-HO Ok We,

’ ‘Were, ’ ‘Would, ’ or ‘Wh a t’

A dded by the Wa y-Hook You,

’ Your, ’ or“Yea r’ A dded by the Ya y—HookIn’ A dded by the In-Hook Ha ve, ’ O f,

’or If

’A dded by the E f

—Hook‘A nd,

’ ‘A n,

’ O wn,

’ O ne,’ B een,

’or Tha n’ A dded by theEu-HO Ok There, ’

Their or O ther’ A dded by the Tet -Hook, a nd by L engthening The,’ It ,

’

or To A dded by Ha lving N ot’ A dded by the Eu-Hook a nd Ha lving P rin

cip le—Com bina tion O f F oregoing P rincip les—P O SITIO N O F P HR A SE-SIG N S

,

ETc.—Excep tions—P os ition of the Signs for ML ,

’a nd Mis s ’—Words

Written by a n Initia l a nd F ina l Modifica tion of the P receding Stem —Certa inWords Distinguished Ever’ a nd ‘Ha ve’ Distinguished—Ticks for ‘ I’ ‘

A ,

’

‘A n,

’a nd A nd

’-Hooks on theTicks I,

’ A ,’ etc. , When Sta nding A lone or

F ollowed by Com , Con, etc.—'

Tick for‘The’—Joining O f Ticks with Circles ,etc.—Stenotyp es of the Ticks -Ing The

’a nd -Ing A

’—R UL ES F O R P HR A SE

W R ITIN G -G enera l R ule—Sp ecia l R ules—~Ca ution —O MISSIO N O F CO N SO N A N TS

IN P HR A SE -WR ITIN G—O MISSIO N O E WoR Ds Ha ve‘ O m itted—‘O i" O m itted

TO ’O m itted F rom —To’ O m itted And

’ O m itted—R ep ea ted orSim ila rWords in P hra ses—P HR A SE CoN TR A CTIO N s—SP E O IA L P HR A SE A N D W O R D

CO N TR A CTIO N S

PUN CTUA TIO N AN D O THE R MA R KS .

G EN E R A L R EMA R KS O N P UN O TUA TIO N—The P eriod— Excla m a tion and Interroga tion P oints—P a renthes is a nd Bra ckets—Da sh— A CCE N T—EMP IIA SISCA P ITA L s—IN ITIA L S O E P R O P E R N AME S

,Era —Consona nt Initia ls—Ca u

tion—Vowel Initia ls—Initia ls of Titles—N UMB ER S, ETc .—P honogra p hic

F igiires 110- 113F O R MS MODIEI-E D BY 114

O N P R EP A R IN G CO P Y A N D R EADIN G P R O O F .

P R E P A R A TIO N O E CO P Y—P R O O F -R EA DIN G—SP ECIME N O E A CO R R E CTED P R O O FSSHEET—SP ECIMEN O N O P P O SITE P A G E CO R R ECTED—The Crowning of P etrarch.

R E P O R TIN G .

G EN E R A L R EMA R KS—Method of Pra cticch now to L earn the Word-Signs a ndContra ctions—Ma teria ls Us ed in Writing P honogra phy—L AW R EP O R TIN GF orm of L aw R eports— F O R MS—The Title P a ge, F orm 1—The Title P a ge,F orm 2—The Title P age, F orm 8—The Title P a ge, F orm 4—The Tria l—O NTA KIN G N O TES IN L AW R EP O R TIN G—N a m e of Witnes s , etc—Question a ndA nswerDistinguished—P a s s a ges Ma rked forCorrection—Ca ses Cited—Hintson Tra nscribing—N EWSP A P ER R E P O R TIN G—A P P EN DIII 120-137

INTR ODUCTION .

IN order to write shortha nd expertly, one m ust posses s a thorougha nd fa m ilia r knowledge of the principles a nd rules of the a rt , whichis to be a tta ined by s tudy , a nd a ha nd tra ined to a ccura cy a nd broughtto a high s ta te of discipline by a long a nd thorough course of pra cticein writ ing. E a ch of these requirem ents is of the highes t im p orta nce ,a s no a m ount of excellence in one will m a ke up for defects in theother .

There a re two ra dica lly difl'

erent m odes O f pursuing the s tudy O f

P honogra phy , either of which m a y be a dopted a t the O ption of thelea rner . O ne pla n is to com m ence by lea rning to rea d it only , so a s tobe a ble to decipher the outlines with considera ble fa cility before a ny

a ttem pt is m a de to write it a t a l l a nd the other,to lea rn to both rea d

a nd write it a t the s a m e tim e . With the firs t pla n the lea rner shouldconfine him self

,the firs t tim e he goes through the book ,

to rea dingthe engra ved exercises (com m encing on pa ge in connection withthe s tudy of the rules given in the text ; a nd then the writing exer

cises (com m encing on pa ge 13 9 ) m a y be a fterwa rd ta ken up in the sa m em a nner , If the lea rner chooses the second pla n, he should com m enceboth kinds of exercises a t once , a nd a lterna te the rea ding lessons wi ththe

’

p en exercises a s he goes a long. This la tter m ethod is the one

usua lly a dopted by lea rners , a nd is proba bly to be preferred where theyca n com m a nd their tim e so a s to be tolera bly regula r in their pra cticebut where business or other enga gem ents interfere to prevent such a

protecution of the s tudy, the form er m ethod is better , beca us e, a lthoughit m a y not perha ps be quite so short a course a s the other , yet it ism ore a p t to be a ttended with fina l success , a s it dives ts the s tudy ofm uch of its drudgery, m a king it indeed a very a greea ble recrea tion fora leisure hour . This m ode a ls o ha s peculia r a dva nta ges forla wyers , a sa fter they ha ve lea rned to rea d P honogra phy they m a y em ploy phonogra phers to ta ke notes which they ca n use im m edia tely , it not beingnecessa ry , of course , fortheir own use to wa it for, or to be a t the expense of, tra nscribing. Thus , in the tria l of a long ca use , a coun selwho could rea d P honogra phy , even though he were not a ble to writeit , m ight ta ke the phonogra phic m inutes a t the a djournm ent, a nd so

ha ve a n O pportunity to exa m ine ea ch da y'

s proceedings before going

XVI IN TR ODI CTIO N .

oil with the next, a nd thereby secure benefits tha t a re una tta ina blewhen the reporter is required to m a ke a longha nd tra nscript before hisnote s ca n be O f a ny use. This pla n is not O pen to the objection tha tone shortha nd writer ha s difficulty in rea ding the notes of a nother,beca use a s the la wyer who is to rea d the report is thoroughly fa m ilia rwith the subject

,a nd h a s listened to every word conta ined in it, he

will be even less likely tha n the writer to ha ve trouble in deciphering .

The reporter, however , should a lwa ys write a legible P honogra phy ,a nd should a dhere s trictly to the sys tem a s given in this book , a ndnot ha ve glea ned a nything from other a uthors .

It is a com m on ha bit with phonogra phers to be cons ta ntly suggesting cha nges a nd a lleged im provem ents to lea rners fortheir a dop tion ;a nd it is the m isfortune of lea rners tha t they a re a p t to lis ten to them ,

a s they would be m uch m ore likely to excel in speed if, a fter ha vings elected som e a p proved instruction-book , they a dhered s trictly to thesystem a s ta ught in it. This work is intended forbeginners a nd thos ephonogra phers tha t ha ve a lrea dy a tta ined cons idera ble proficiency inwriting a ccording to som e other a uthor

,a re not recom m ended to

cha nge , lest their loss in speed should m ore tha n counterba la nce a ny

ga in from the intrins ic im provem ent of the system .

In the a rra ngem ent of this work , it h a s been the a im of the a uthorto present the lessons subs ta ntia lly in the order tha t would be a doptedby a good tea cher, so tha t those lea rners who ha ve not the a dva n ta geof a ny guide except the book , will find no diffi culty in this respect. A

few a dditiona l hints, distinguishing the m ost from the lea s t essentia l

pa rts , however, m a y be of use to som e in the first pa rt of their course .

HIN TS TO THE L EA R N ER .

R ea d over ca refully sections 1 to 18 . Com m it to m em ory s ections20 to 23 . R ea d over sections 25 to 3 0 . L ea rn the Ta ble of Consona nts , on pa ge 18 . R ea d ‘ over s ections 3 1 to 44 ; lea rn the VowelSca le, a nd com m it to m em ory sections 4 1 to 43 . R ea d

, on pa ge 20 5 ,the fifth , s ixth , a nd seventh lines . Com m it to m em ory sections 61a nd 62. R ea d the la st s ix lines O f pa ge 206 . R ea d over sections 48to 5 8, a nd lea rn the Ta ble of Diphthongs . R ea d, on pa g e 207, thethirteenth a nd fourteenth lines . Write a portion or a ll of the wordsn section 428, on pa ge 13 9 . R ea d sections 63 to 69 , a nd com m it tom em ory sections 64 a nd 65 . Spell a ll the com pounds in Exercis e IL ,

com m encing on pa ge 20 6 . Write the outlines indica ted in section43 0 . R ea d over sections 70 to 73 . Com m it to m em ory the rules insections 70 a nd 72 R ea d pa ge 207. Write section 481, or a portionof it . These suggestions a re sufficient to show the lea rner how toproceed with the rem a ining less ons .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

TA BLE O F CON SON A NTS.

Sound rep res ented by the P horwm p h.

persua de ,

THE

COMP LETE PHON OG R APHER .

G EN ER A L R EMA R KS.—PHO N O G R A PHY DEFIN ED.

g l . P R O N O G R A P R Y ,in the wides t sense O f the word, is the a rt O f ex

press ing the sou/a ds of a la ngua ge by cha ra cters or sym bols , one cha ra c terbeing a ppropria ted exclus ively to ea ch sound. A s usua lly understood,however, the term is a pplied to the sys tem of P honetic Short-ha nd,invented by Is a a c P itm a n, O f B a th , Engla nd.

CO N SO N A N TS P R ESEN TED FIR ST.

2 . In wri ting a ccording to the com m on long-ha nd m ethod , a ll theletters of a word , both consona nts a nd vowels , a re written one a ftera nother, in the order in which they a re pronounced. In writing phonogra phica lly this is not the ca s e , but , a s wil l be m ore fully expla inedherea fter , the consona nt-s igns a nd vowel-s igns are wri tten sepa ra tely,the consona nt-s igns being first written , a nd the vowel-s igns a fterwa rdpla ced to them . Hence the m ore na tura l order of presenta tion ,

a nd

the one a dopted in this book, is to trea t of the consona nts first, a nda fterwa rd of the vowels .

SIMP L E CO N SO N A N T SIG N S.

CO N SO N A N T DEF IN ED.

Q 8 . A consona nt is a sound m a de by either a com plete or a pa rtia lconta ct of the orga ns of speech obs tructing the sounding brea th, insom e degree va rying from a n entire brea k or stoppage of it , a s p inrap , 6 in rob, etc.

, to a s im ple roughness or a spira tion im pressed upona vowel' sound, a s h in hea t , ka le.

N UMBER O F CO N SO N A N’I’S .

4 . In the English la ngua ge there a re twenty-two sim ple consona ntsounds . This num ber does not include ch a nd j, which a re cons ideredcom pounds , a s they a re susceptible O f being a na lyzed into sim pler elem ents ; ck seem ing to be com posed of t a nd sh, a ndj of d a nd zk.

20 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

R EMA R KS O N THE TA BL E O F CO N SO N A N TS.

5 . The ta ble on pa ge 18 exhibits a ll the cha ra cters used in Phonogra phy to represent ea ch a nd every s im ple consona nt sound in our la n~

gua ge,'

a s well a s the double sounds O f ch a ndj. The firs t colum n con

ta ins the phonogra phic s igns or letters , ca lled p lwnograp hs the sec

ond,their na m es ; a nd the third colum n furnishes exa m ples of the

p owerof ea ch phonogra ph in the com m on spelling. In every ca s e butone, two words a re given the first in a n unjohond z

’

c or forced orthography, tending m ore to concea l tha n to indica te the true consona ntsound, which m us t a lwa ys be determ ined before it ca n be express edby its proper phonogra phic s ign ; while in the second the orthogra

phy is m ore na tura l , a nd the consona nt sound less diffi cult to be"

a scerta ined .

6 . The object in thus presenting the irregula r exa m ple firs t is toim press on the lea rner's m ind a t the very outs et , the fa ct tha t thecom m on spelling O f words is no relia ble guide to the phonograp h}: for

the sooner he lea rns not to a ssocia te the phonogra phic s igns with theletters of the com m on a lpha bet

,the m ore ra pid wi ll be his progress .

§ 7. If the a ttention he a ga in directed to the colum n of phonogra phs in the ta ble , it will be observed tha t the firs t s ixteen a re a r

ra nged in pa irs , one of ea ch pa ir being a thin or light line, a nd the othera corresponding thick or hea vy line . The rea son of thi s a rra ngem ent isim porta nt, a nd should be thoroughly understood. By com pa ring thesounds of a ny two s igns thus cla ss ed together , it will be found tha tone is but a s light m odifica tion of the other tha t they a re produceda t the s a m e point a nd by the s a m e conta c t O f the orga ns of speech ina lm ost precisely the sa m e m a nner , the only difference being tha t, inone ca s e , the a ction of the

’

orga ns is a ccom pa nied by a s light sounda sound of the brea th sim ply, a nd in the other , the s a m e a ction is a ocom pa nied by a pa rtia lly suppressed voca l sound . This undertone orsub-voca l constitutes the only difi

'

erence between the words kill a ndgill , tom e a nd da m e, ches t a ndjest, p a y a nd ba y , shun a nd -sion in vis ion, sea l

a nd zea l,thigh a nd thy, a ndjon a nd va n, given in the la s t colum n of ex

a m ples .

8. To follow na ture , therefore , a nd pres erve a correspondence between s igns a nd sounds , a nd to show their resem bla nce a s well a sdifi

'

erence, the light or brea th consona nts a re represented by light or thinlines , a nd their corresponding hea vy sounds by the sa m e lines sha ded ,

Thus , written in P honogra phy, gill would differ from kill, or da m efrom ta m e, etc.

, only in the hea vier sha ding of their initia l s igns ga g,doe, etc.

9 . N one of the rem a ining consona nts in the ta ble ha ve a ny proper

SIMP LE CO N SO N A N T-SIG N S. 21

m a tes in the English la ngua ge, therefore they a re not a rra nged inpa irs a nd a lthough the hea vy s igns ing, ha g, ga y, a nd wa y correspondwith the light s igns en

,em

, el, a nd er the likeness is a c cidenta l a nddoes not, a s in the ca se of the others , indica te s im ila rity of sound.

CLASSIF ICATION O F THE CO N SO N A N TS .

10 . The following a rra ngem ent of the consona nts cla s s ifies thema c cording to their n a ture or qua lity , a nd their m ode of form a tion . To

m a ke the view com plete , the two com pound consona nts a re inserted.

QUA L ITY O F CO N SO N A N TS.

11 . The consona nts a re-

a rra nged,

in six divisions , ca lled A brup ts ,Continuum , N a s a ls , L iquids , The A sp ira te, a nd Coa lescents .

I. The A brup ts a re so ca lled beca use of their a brupt or explosive nature , being m a de by a com plete conta ct of the orga ns of speech , interra pting or entirely stopping the brea th or voice . They a re the m os tperfect of the consona n ts . Som etim es they a re term ed Exp lodents .

II. The Continua nts perm it a freer es ca pe of the brea th or voice , a ndbegin to a pproxim a te towa rd the cha ra cter of vowels . They a dm itof indefinite prolonga tion ,

a nd hence their na m e .

III. The N a s a ls com bine in their form a tion the cha ra cter of the a hrup ts a nd liquids . They a re m a de by com plete conta ct of the pa rtsof the m outh

,while a t the s a m e tim e the sounding brea th or voice is

perm itted freely to esca pe through the nos e .

IV. The L iquids perm it a s till freer esca pe of the brea th or voice tha nthe continua nts , a pproa ching m ore nea rly tha n they to the na tureof vowels . They ha ve in fa ct so m uch of the vowel cha ra cter tha t

The word brea thed ha s been used here in p reference to whi sp ered , which isthe one genera lly, but im p rop erly, em p loyed to des igna te the na ture of the light

cons ona nt-sound s . Tha t the term whi sp ered does not indica te the true cha ra cterof the sounds , is cle a rly dem onstra ted bv the fa ct tha t the ! ch a nts a re a s ea sily

uttered inwit/lep er a s the brea th consona nts .

22 THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G a A rHER .

they rea dily unite with the other consona nts , form ing double consona nts , a nd som etim es sylla bles , without the a id of a ny vowels .V. The A sp ira te a nd Cba lescents a re the feebles t of a ll the conso

na nts , seem ing to be m ere m odifica tions of vowels , by wh ich the

brea th or voice is very sl ightly obs tructed.

N R MA TIO N O F CO N SO N A N T-SO UN'

DS.

12. In the a rra ngem ent of the consona nt-sounds a ccording to theirm ode of form a tion

,we begin with thos e form ed a t the root of the

tongue, nearthe throa t, a s ha g, ga y, etc . a nd then go forward to theh a rd pa la te , or roof of the m outh , a s ish, zhee, etc . then to the regionof the tip of the tongue a nd the teeth , a s tee, doe, etc. ; then to the

teeth a nd lips , a s cf, we; a nd fina lly to the lips a lone , a s p ee, bee, etc .

Hence thes e severa l cla s s es are ca lled; I. Gua m -a le II. P a la ta lr III.

Hague-denia ls IV. L abia -denia ls a nd V. L a bia ls .

13 . In sounding these consona nts , the differen t pa rts of the m ontha re brought into a ction a s follows : With the G uttura ls , the root orbody of the tongue is pressed a ga ins t the roof of the m outh with theP a la ta ls , the tongue jus t ba ck of the tip is pressed ag a ins t the roof ofthe m onth a t a little dista nce from the teeth ; with the L inguodenta ls , the end of the tongue is pla ced a ga inst, or nea rly a ga ins t theba se of the upper teeth ; with the L a bio-denta ls , the upper teeth a repla ced upon the lower lip ; a nd with the L a bia ls , the lips a re quite orpa rtia lly closed.

OR IGIN O F THE CO N SON A N’

I‘ SIG N S.

14. The rem a rka ble brevity tha t dis tinguishes Phonogra phy froma l l other sys tem s of Short-ha nd, is chiefly owing to the extrem e simp licity of the consona nt—s igns it em ploys ; each being a s im ple s tra ightor curved line, which requires but a single m otion of the pen in itsform a tion. The source from which these s igns a re derived is shownin the following geom etric dia gra m s

Experience ha s shown tha t the stra ight line ca n not be pla ced inm ore than four positions , with a sufiieient difference to be rea dily distinguished, a nd to prevent m ista king one s ign for another. Thesepositions a re illus tra ted bv the tourdia m eters n ”we

a be t"

This gives us four distinc .

SIMP L E CO N SO N AN T-SIG N S. 23

a nd hea vy lines the num ber is doubled . A ga in ,if the circle be

divided into qua rters in the two wa ys shown in the dia gra m s , eightdis tinct curved s igns a re obta ined. Then by m a king them light a ndhea vy, we ha ve eight m ore , m a king s ixteen in a ll , which , a dded to theeight stra ight s igns , m a ke twenty-four—the grea test num ber of lines ,s tra ight a nd curved, th a t ca n be used without confus ion ,

a nd corresp onding exa ctly with the num ber of consona nt-sounds (including ch

a nd j) tha t there a re in our la ngua ge .

A N A L O G Y IN THE A P P R O P R IA TIO N O F THE SIG N S.

15 . In the a ppropria tion of these s igns to the consona nts , the requirem ents of a na logy a re s trictly observed, the eight inflexible a nd

explos ive sounds ca lled a brup ts being represented by unyielding stra ightlines , while the m ore flowing a nd plia ble sounds , a s the continua nte,

m ea ls, etc. , a re represen ted by curved a nd flowing lines .

16 . The s igns of the com pound consona nts , cha y a nd ja g, ta ke theform of their firs t elem ents tee a nd dee, a nd the direction of the second ,ish a nd zhee.

MN EMO N IC A SSISTA N CE IN L EA R N IN G TE E PHO N O G R A PHS .

The m em ory is often grea tly a ided by loca l a ssocia tion ,a nd

the lea rner will deri ve a ss is ta nce in m em ori zing the phonogra phs a ndtheir na m es by s tudying the ta ble in connection with the followingdia gra m s , in the firs t of which is shown the pos ition a nd directionof ea ch stra ight consona nt- s ign , a nd in the s econd , the loca tion , in thecircum ference of the circle , of ea ch curved consona nt-s ign. The na m esof the hea vy or sha ded s igns a re in full fa ce type .

V ee

18. Single consona nt-signs a re som etim es ca l led stem s, a s well a s

24 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

O F THE MA N N ER O F WR ITIN G THE CO N SO

N A N T SIG N S.

19 . With one exception (Tee), every consona nt-s ign em ployed inPhonogra phy is written in the direction of one of the l ines of the

following dia gra m

20 . E yrizonta l letters a re written from left to right.21. P erpendicula r a nd inclined letters a re written downwa rd .

EXCEP TIO N S.

22. (a ) When not joined to a nother stem , J felt) is wri tten downwa rd

,a nd f

"

(l) upwa rd but when either is so j oined it is som etim eswritten upwa rd a nd som etim es downwa rd . (b) The s tra ight s ign forr, m e

,is a lwa ys written upwa rd .

23 . When written downwa rd, J a nd f'

a re ca lled respectivelyfish a nd el when upwa rd, skee a nd lee. R ules by whi ch the lea rner m a y

determ ine whether to use ish or shee, at or lee,

eror roe, will be givenherea fter .

CIIA Y A N D R EE DISTIN GUISHED.

24 . A s the stem s oka y a nd rec a re inclined in the sa m e direction,

they a re distinguished, when not j oined to other s tem s , by differencein inclina tion cha y being written a t a n a ngle of sixty degrees from the

line , a nd f ee a t a n a ngle of thirty degrees : thus , oka y, ree. Whenjoined to other stem s , they a re dis tinguished by the direction of the

stroke, which is a ppa rent thus , p ee-rec, p ee

-clea y,V oka y-rec

,

Tee-oka y.

HINTS TO THE BEG IN N a n.

25 . P honogra phy is best written on ruled pa per a nd som e recomm end double lines , but the ordina ry s ingle-line ruling is genera lly pre~ferred by pra ctica l phonogra phers . The lea rner should a ccustomhim self to write with either p en or pencil , holding it the s a m e a s inwriting long-ha nd. The pen should ha ve a sm ooth a nd tolera bly finepoint

,a nd m a y be either gold, steel , or quill . Very fine ha i r lines

a re found in pra ctice not to be the m ost legible , especia lly when rea d

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

26 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

a bout equa l to the length of a stra ight sign written in the s a m e direction.

PHO N O G R A I’HIC SP EED.

29 . The ra pidity of phonogra phic writing ,like tha t of the com m on

script, m ust va ry with the orga nism of the writer. Expert p honographers genera lly write a bout s ix tim es a s fa st in P honogra phy a s in

long-ha nd.

EXER CISES TO BE R EAD A S WEL L a s WR ITTEN .

3 0 . It will grea tly fa cilita te the a cquirem ent of P honogra phy if theexercises written by the lea rn er a re ca refully rea d a nd re-rea d by himuntil they ca n be deciphered without hes ita tion . The consequencesof om is s ion in this respect a re a dm ira bly s ta ted by Mr. Dickens in the88th cha pter of “Da vid Copperfield,

"which m a y be rea d with both

ins truction a nd a m us em ent.

SIMP L E VOWEL S.

DEF IN ITION .

3 1. A vowel m a y be defined to be the sm ooth or ha rm oniousem ission of sounding brea th , m odula ted but not obs tructed by the orga ns of speech a s the sounds of a in a rm , a in a le

,ea in ca t.

N UMB ER O F VOWEL -SOUN DS.

Q3 2 . In the English la ngua ge there a re twelve dis tinct vowelsounds , six of which a re long a nd six short. They a re denoted by thest atic letters in the following words

L O N G vowa — a rm, a le, ea t , a ll , note , food.

SHO R T VowEL s—a t , ell , it , on ,up , foot.

3 3 . In producing e a ch of these short vowel-sounds , the pos itionof the voca l orga ns is nea rly the s a m e a s in uttering the long vowelsound of the corresponding word in the line a bove .

84 . F or these twelve sounds the com m on a lpha bet furnishes butthe five letters a , e, t, o a nd u (w a nd y ha ving no vowel-sounds of theirown) , while P honogra phy gives a dis tinct representa tion to ea ch .

METHOD O F VOCA L IZATIO N .

85 . In writing phonogra phica lly, the consona nt-sign is m a de first ,a nd the vowel-s ign a fterwa rd pla ced to it. O f the s ix long vowels ,three a re indica ted by a heavy dot, written to the consona nt in threep os itions , viz. ,

a t the beginning, m iddle, a nd end ; a nd the other three ,by a hea vy da sh, written to the consona nt in the sa m e pos itions . orthe

SIMP L E VOWE L S. 27

six corresponding short vowels , three a re indica ted by a . light dot, a ndthree by a light da sh, written to the consona nt in the sa m e m a nner.

3 6. A vowel is s a id to be first; second , or third p la ce, a ccording a s it

is written a t the beginning, m iddle, or end of a consona nt-stem .

37. The six vowel-sounds indica ted by the dot a re lingua l in the?!

na ture , a nd the six da sh-vowels , la bia l.

L O N G . nor-VOWELS. snoxr

A ;F irs t pla ce a in arm .

a Secondais Third 6 p in.

DA SH-VOWELS.

3F irs t pla ce a in fa ll . a in on (la s t).

Second o note (whole). u up (cur) .

3 Third 0 0“food. a o foot.

N AMES O F THE VOWELS.

38. The long vowels m a y be na m ed by their resp ective soundsa h, a , c, a we, o, 0 0 (not double a ) a nd the short vowels by pronouncingthem with the consona nt tee subjoined to ea ch ; thus , a t

, at, it , a t, a t,

( fit. The short vowels m a y a lso be na m ed by their sounds , without theconsona nt tea , a s soon a s the lea rner is sufficiently a dva nced to be a bleto pronounce them correctly without the a id of a consona n t. Theircom m on letter representa tives woul d then be d, E,

"

i,6, 12 , 65 .

B ECKO N IN G O F VOWEL -P O SITIO N S.

3 9 . It ha s been a lrea dy rem a rked tha t the first vowel-pla ce is a tthe beginning of the consona nt : the second a t the m iddle

, a nd the

third ~

a t the end. F rom this it follows tha t with horizonta l consona n ts igns the vowel-pos itions num ber from left to right ; with downs trokes , from top to bottom ; with up

-s trokes , from bottom to ta pand w ith signs tha t are som etim es written upward a nd som etim esdownwa rd

,the num bering of the vowel-pos itions is from the botto'm

or top, a ccording a s the consona nt is struck upwa rd or downward ;

thus , with shes , lee, or ree, the firs t pos ition is a t the bottom , whilewith risk, cl, or er, it is a t the top.

§ 40 . In the a bove sea le , the dots a nd da shes a re written nea r adotted tee, to show the three vowel-positions in connection wi th a

28 THE COMP LETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

down-s troke stem ; a nd nea r a dotted lee,to show the pos itions in

connection with a n up-s troke stem . The dotted lines of cours e form

no pa rt of the vowel-sign.

VO CA L IZATION O F SIN G L E CO N SO N A N T-STEMS.

§ 4l . When a vowel occurs before a consona nt, the vowel ' sign is

Written to the left of the consona nt-sign, if it be perpendicula r or inclined ; a nd a bove, if it be horizonta l ; thus , Ia id, ebb, a che , oa k.

When a vowel com es a fter a consona nt, the vowel-sign is written tothe right of the consona nt-sign ,

if it be perpendicula r or inclin ed ; a ndbelow,

if it be horizonta l ; thus , bay ga y, ha y.

CO N SO N A NT ALWAYS WR ITTEN F IR ST.

42 . In either ca se, whether the vowel precedes or follows the consona nt, the consona nt-s ign is a lwa ys written firs t.

METHOD O F R EADIN G SIN GLE VO CA L IZED CO N SO N A N T-STEMS .

43 . When a vowel-s ign is pla ced to the left of a perpendicula r orinclined consona nt-stem ,

or a bove a horizonta l,the vowel is rea d firs t

thus , ode, T"

a le a im . When a vowel- s ign is pla ced to the rightof a n upright or sloping consona nt- stem , or below a horizonta l , theconsona nt is rea d firs t ; thus , p a y, da y, T

0 0 .

MANNER O F WR ITIN G THE VOWEL -SIG N S.

5 44 . The da sh vowel-signs should be written a t right-angl es to thoconsona nt , or , when m ore convenient, they m a y be a li ttle inclined ;thus ,Co. m a y be written or a s well a s in the m a nner shown inthe la s t section . Both def a nd dash vowels should be written a t a littledis ta nce from the consona nt

,forif a llowed to touch , m is ta kes would

be occa s ioned.

THE VOWEL-SCA L E N OT P ER F ECTLY P HO N ETIO . TWO SOUN DS SOMETHIFB

R EP R ESEN TED BY O N E SIG N .

45 . Ifwem a ke a close a na lysis ,wewill find tha t the num berof vowelsounds in the English la ngua ge is som ewha t grea ter tha n is indica tedby the a bove vowel-sca le. Wha t the exa c t num ber is it is difiicult todeterm ine , phoneticia ns not being a ble to a gree in rega rd to it a m ongthem selves . This is owing pa rtly to difference of pronuncia tion a m ongspea kers , a nd pa rtly to the fa ct tha t the sha des of dis tinction betweensevera l of the vowel-sounds a re so very sl ight , tha t , to som e ca rs , theya re quite im perceptible. A s P honogra phy is not intended to repre

SIMP LE VOWEL S. 29

sent a ll the n ice sha des of sound , but to be a p ractica l ra ther'

tha n a crit

ica lly exa ct m ea ns of writing the la ngua ge , the twelve-vowel sca le isfound to be entirely suffi cient . F rom this it follows tha t in som e insta nces severa l vowel- soun ds

,which a re recognized a s being distinct

elem ents by a ll a ccura te orthoepists , a re confounded with ea ch other,a nd represented by a s ingle s ign .

46. The a ttention of the lea rner is ca lled to the following exa mples of inexac t phonetic representa tion ,

which a re the only ones of importa nce

,or tha t will be likely to ca us e him a ny em ba rra s sm ent .

I. The second hea vy dot-vowel s ign ,representing prim a rily the

sound of a in a le, fa te, is a lso used to represent the m ore O pen vowels0und hea rd in a ir

,there, their,fa re, etc . B eginners s om etim es fa ll into the

error of em ploying the light“dot-s ign of the firs t pos ition for this

sound.

II. The third hea vy dot-vowel sign , representing prim a rily the soundof ea in ea t, is a lso used to represent the m ore open sound of ea in ea r.

B eginners a lso err in som etim es us ing forthis sound the light-dot s ignof the sa m e pos ition .

III. The firs t light dot-vowel s ign ,representing prim a rily the sound

of a in a t, is a lso used to represent the sound of a in a sk. To m a ny

ea rs these sounds a re identica l a nd , a s frequently Spoken ,there is

rea lly no difference , but when correctly uttered, the sound of a in

a sk a pproa ches m ore nea rly the s ound of a in a rm .

IV. The second light dot-vowel s ign ,representing prim a rily the

sound of e in m et,ell

,is a lso used to represent the s ounds

'

of e in her,

a nd i in bird, fir. A s com m only pronounced, the sounds of e a nd i, be

fore r,very closely , resem ble the sound of u in fur but

,a s pronounced

by our m os t ca reful publ ic spea kers , they a pproa ch nea rer the shortsound of e, a s hea rd in m et .

e

V. The second hea vy da sh-vowel s ign , representing prim a rily the

sound of o in note, is a lso used to represent the shorter sound of o in

wholly. This sound of o is s a id to be peculia r to A m eric a n pronunciation . It is frequently hea rd here in thewords stone, hom e, coa t, whole, etc.

VI. The firs t light da sh-vowel s ign ,representing prim a rily the s ound

of o in on, is a lso used to represent the sound of o in lost , m oth, cloth, nor,etc. This la tter sound is les s broa d tha n the sound of a w in la w

,a nd

yet broa der tha n the sound of o in on ,not

, etc.VII. The second light da sh-vowel s ign , representing prim a ri ly the

sound of u in up , is a lso used to represent the longer sound of u in our.

47. F orthe use of the critica l s tudent , a com plete vowel-sca le , inwhich a distinct representa tion is provided forea ch a nd every vowelsound of the la ngua ge, is given in the A ppendix .

3 0 THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A P HE R .

DIPHTHO N G S.

DEF IN ITIO N

§ 48. A diphthong is a coa lition or union of two s im ple vowelsounds , pronounced in one sylla ble ; a s 012in oil .

N UMBER . O F DIPHTHO N G S.

49 . There a re but four proper or perfect diphthongs in the Englishla ngua ge . They a re illus tra ted by the ita lics in the words

by, boy, bough, few.

A N A L YSIS O F THE DIP IITHO N G S.

a

5 0 . A proper diphthong is a com pound or tra ns ition vowel- sound,the orga ns of speech being in the pos ition to utter one s im ple vowelsound a t the beginning of it, a nd in a pos ition to utter a different sim plevowel-sound a t the conclus ion of it

, so tha t the two s im ple sounds a reboth hea rd in full or in pa rt

,but often so blended together a s to s eem

to the e'a rbut one sound .

1 . I—In uttering the sound of i in ice, or y in by, or a t in a is le,

the orga ns a t the com m encem ent of the sound a re in pos ition to pronounce the vowel a in a sh

,a nd

,a t the end

,they a re in pos ition to pro

duce the sound of i in it.

2 . O I—The sound of a t in oil,or in boy, is com posed of the s ounds

of o in lost,a nd z

'

in it.

3 . OW—The sound of ow in now, or ough in bough, or on in our, is com

posed of the sounds of o in on, a nd 0 0 in foot.

4 . EW— To produce the sound of ew in few, or a t in feud ,or u in na

ture,the orga ns a t the com m encem ent a re in pos ition to pronounce the

sound of e in'be, a nd a t the end to pronounce a o infood orfoot.

R EMA R KS O N THE DIPHTHO N G EW.

5 1. This la s t sound h a s proba bly perplexed lexicogra phers a nd phoneticia ns m ore tha n a ny other in the la ngua ge. This ha s been owingpa rtly to difference of pronuncia tion a m ong spea kers ,

a nd pa rtly to theobscure a nd cha ngea ble cha ra cter of the two close vowels ofwhich thediphthong is com posed. When properly pronounced , its firs t elem entis very short, the orga ns m ere ly ta king the pos ition to sound the clos evowel e, a nd then , the ins ta nt the sound com m ences , pa s sing to theposition of the fina l elem ent 0 0

,upon which the voice rests a m uch

longer spa ce of tim e . In Engla nd, this is its uniform pronuncia tionbut in this country, it is som etim es spoken a s if its firs t elem ent werethe m ore open sound of i in it, This cha nge occa s ions the difl

’

erence in

the sound of the sylla ble tune hea rd in the word opp ortune, a s usua lly

DIPHTHO N G S. 3 ]

p ronounced in this country, a nd in the word m isfortune, of which our

pronuncia tion does not va ry from the English . TheA

close qua lity a nd

a lm os t im perceptible qua ntity of the e sound of the diphthong, a s hea rdin the la s t exa m ple

,a nd in the fina l sylla bles of the words na ture,fernure,

virtue, etc .

,ha s led m a y to suppos e tha t the rea l s ound wa s tha t of the

consona nt y, which is a s ound so nea rly a llied to it tha t it ha s som e

tim es been ca lled the “squeezed s ound of e.

"A nd even now this

is the pronuncia tion given in m os t dictiona ries , a nd a lso the one

a dopted by the A m erica n phoneticia ns . But the phoneticia ns of

Engla nd, in their la ter publica tions , inva ria bly trea t this doublesound a s a diphthong , — tha t is , a s com posed of two vowels , ins tea dof a consona nt a nd a vowel. O n the other h a nd, however, theyerr in giving the sound of i in ‘it a s its firs t elem ent

,tha t vowel sel

dom , if ever , entering into the com pos ition of this diphthong , especia lly a s hea rd in their own pronuncia tion .

5 2 . The fina l elem ent of this diphthong is a lso subject, under certa in circum s ta nces , to a s light cha nge. In a ccented sylla bles , it isclea rly the long sound of 0 0 a s in the words duty, bea uty, remem ,

etc .

but in una ccented sylla bles , it s eem s to be the short sound of 0 0,a s in

the words va lue, virtue, etc.

5 3 . F rom the a bove observa tions it a ppea rs tha t,a ccording to the

A m erica n pronuncia tion ,a s a genera l rule , when the diphthong u cc

curs in a n a ccented sylla ble , its com ponents a re the s ounds of i in ita nd 0 0 in food, a nd tha t in una ccented sylla bles , it is com posed of thevowel-sounds of ea in ea t a nd 0 0 in boot.

5 4 . The four proper diphthongs a re represented by four a ngula rcha ra cters , written ,

like the s im p le vowel-s igns , to the consona nt ,three occupying the first, a nd one the third pos ition, a s shown in thefollowing ta ble .

TA BL E O F DIPHTHO N G S.

I V Sound of a t in a is le a nd i infine.

O I oy boy boil .

OW ough“?lmtgh ow cow.

EW iew

5 5 . If the writer shouldwish to dis tinguish between wha t we'm a yca ll the A m erica n a nd English pronuncia tions Of this diphthong , it m a y

be done by m a king both strokes of the s ign light forthe form er , a ndby sha ding the firs t s troke of the s ign forthe la tter , to indica te tha t thefirst elem ent is of the long e qua lity . B ut in pra ctice , no confus ionwill result from us ing uniform ly the light s ign , a s , in the com m onprint

,we a re a ccustom ed to

/see

/ing one letter used forboth sounds .

3 2 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

DIR ECTIO N O F THE DIP I-ITIIO N G -SIG N S N EVER CHA NG ED .

56. Unlike the ‘da sh vowel-signs , the signs for the diphthongs a renever inclined to L ori-espond with the direction of the consona nt-s ign .

The s igns forora nd EW m a y ,however, when m ore convenient, be ih

clined a little from the horizonta l. [See

TWO y ow a CO N CUR R IN G .

57. When two vowels occur together, either before or a fter a con

sona nt , the vowel tha t is sounded nea rest to the consona nt should bewritten a little nea rer it tha n the others thus , -I

'

iota .

DIPHTHO N G S JO IN ED TO CO N SON A N’IS .

5 8. It is a llowa ble , when convenient, to j oin a diphthong to theconsona nt s ign ; thus , fl." idea ; 1 eyed. v,

CO N SO N A N T P O SITIO N S.

Q5 9 . E a ch of the consona nt-s igns m a y be written ,with respect to

the line of writing, in three different pos itions , corresponding with thethree vowel-positions , a nd like them

,respectively ca lled first , second ,

a nd third.

60 . In the following illus tra tions , the dot-line running under , over,or through the consona nt-stem , serves to indica te the line of writing .

P O SITIO N S O F HO R IZO N TA L STEMS.

61 . The positions of the horizonta l s tem s a re a s followsF m srP osrrrou .

—A bove the line,the highest pa rt of the stem dis ta nt

from it a bout the length of a tee ; thus ,2

em,

V ing, ka y.

SECO N D P osrrrou.—The lower pa rt of the stem res ting on

.

the l ine ;thus , 0 My. " u “

en , ga y

Trrm n P osrrrorv.— B elow the line , a bout one third of the length

O f a tee ; thus ,A

em ,-

vm y.

P O SITIO N S O F P ER P EN DICUL A R A N D IN CL IN ED STEMS.

§ 62 . The positions of perpendicula r a nd inclined stem s a re a s followsF iner P osrriO N .

— A bove the line , a bout one third the length of a

tee ; thus , p ee, N wa y, tee, f ya y.

SECO N D Fosrrronlc sting'

on the line thus , K“ ef, " l" dee, [M cha y

Tnm n P owwow—Written through the line , so a s to extend a boutone third below ; thus , p ee, dee.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

3 4 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

METHOD O F W R ITIN G VOWEL S BETWEENCO N SO N A N T SIG N S.

70 . Vowels a nd diphthongs occurring between two consona nts,a re written a ccording to the following

R UL E .

1. A ll first-pla ce, a nd a ll long s econd-pla ce vowels a re written to thestem whi ch precedes them ; thus , ba lm

, L back, “y filc,

2. Al l short second-pla c e, a nd a l l third-pla ce vowels a re written tothe

“

s

tem which follows them ; thus , L beck, Lg dumb, tomb,

(a ) The rule a s to firs t a nd third pla ce vowel-signs m a y be viola tedwhere its observa nce would throw a vowel into a n a ngle, a nd thus occa s ion a m bigui ty. The voca li za tion m

N, i s better tha n in

lb)When two sim ple vowel-sounds , or a s im ple vowel a nd a diphthong,occur between two con sona n t-s tem s , a nd both ,

a ccording to the rule,would be written to the s a m e consona n t

, write one to ea ch s temif convenient ; thus , cooing, duel . Som etim es it is prefera ble to write both to the s a m e s tem ; thus , p uerile.

P O SITIO N O F W O R DS.

71. There a re three pos itions , with respect to the line of writing,in which the consona nt outlines of words m a y be written. Thes e p os itions correspond with the three vowel-pos itions , a nd , like them , a re

ca lled first, second, a nd third respectively . A word is a ss igned to one

of these pos itions a ccording a s it ha s in its a ccented sylla ble a vowelwhich would be repres ented by a first, second, or third p lace vowel-s ign.

If a word be a m bnosylla ble, the pos ition to which it should be a ssigned, is determ ined by the pla ce of its only vowel.

WHEN A WO R D IS WR ITTEN IN P OSITIO N .

72. A word is sa id to occupy a pa rticula r pos ition when its firs tp erp endicularor inclined consona nt-stem is written in it

, in a ccorda ncewith 5 9, 61, a nd 62. If, however , the consona nt outline cons is tsentirely of horizonta l stem s , the pos ition of the first determ ines the

P HO N O G R A P HIC A N A L YSIS. 3 5

posi tion of the word, a s a ll of the s tem s m ust necess a ri ly fa l l in thes a m e line. Throughout this work ,

the line of writing is indica ted , itconnection with words of the first a nd third pos itions , by the dot-lineA ll words th a t occur without the line of writing being so representeda re to be rega rded a s belonging to the second pos ition .

EXA MP L ES

F m s'r P osrrIO N : cap , fowl fm l,

C a like.

F

SECO N D P O SITIO N p a il , p a le, rqve, 7 ga le Kelly,A m a ke.

Tnm n P O SITIO N feel “w oo”, —

v-\J W ?!

MEN TA L A N D MA N UA L P R OCESS IN WR ITIN G PHO N O G R A P HY .

§ 73 . Before com m encing to write a word phonogra phica lly ,the

wri ter m ust determ ine wha t a re its consona nt-sounds,a nd a lso its a o

cented vowel . Then its conson a nt outline is written in the properword-pos ition ,

a s directed a t 71 a nd 72 ; a nd la s tly ,the vowel-signs

a re W1 itten to the consona n t s tem s in a ccorda nce with 41 a nd

70 . Bu t, a s the beginner will find it difficult to ca rry the consona ntoutline of a long word in his m em ory while his a ttention is directedto a scerta ining the a ccented vowel a nd its pos ition ,

it will be well forhim ,

in his ea rly pra ctice , firs t to write the outl ine without rega rd topos ition , a nd then , when he ha s determ ined wha t is its a ccentedvowel , to rewrite it in its proper pos ition .

P I-IO N O G R A PHIC A N A L YSIS.

G EN ER A L R UL E .

74 . It m a y be sta ted a s a genera l rule, tha t before the lea rner is prep a red to write a word_wi th its prO p erphonogra phic s igns , if

m us t firs ta na lyze it into its elem enta ry sounds

,observingjo ca refully

Adis tinguish

the consona nts from the vowels .

75 . If the com m on orthogra phy of our l a ngua ge were phonetic ,tha t is , if ea ch sound ha d a letter of its own , which a lwa ys representedit wherever it occurred, the studen t of P honogra phy would need no

other instruction in a na lys is tha n the genera l rule given in the la s tsection . B ut unfortuna tely this i s not the ca se . A n a lpha bet of

twenty-s ix letters,three of which 0

, q, a nd z) ha ve no s ounds of their

3 6 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

own , thus pra ctica lly reducing the num ber to twenty -three , is com ~

p elled to a ttem pt the service of representing som e forty different a nddistinct sounds . This dispa rity between the num ber of sounds a nd thenum ber of s igns to represent them ,

is the source of so m a ny defects inour written la ngua ge , a nd ha s ca used the a doption of such a n irregula ra nd whim sica l orthogra phy , tha t the a na lysis of words into their trueelem ents , to one who is una ccus tom ed to it , is rendered exceedinglydiffi cult. It therefore becom es necess a ry to furnish a s sis ta nce to thelea rner in overcom ing these difficulties which beset him a t the verycom m encem ent O f his course .

THE EA R MISLED BY THE EYE .

76 . The principa l ca use of em ba rra ssm ent is the lia bility of the

ea r,in the com pa rison O f sounds

,to be m is led by the eye, which is

itself deceived from seeing frequently the s a m e sound, in difi'

erent

words , represented by different letters , or different sounds representedby the s a m e letter . Thus

, the sounds of p h a nd of f in P hilip a nd

fillz'

p ,differ in their representa tion to the eye , but to the ea rthey a re

identica l . The sounds of th in thigh, a nd of th in thy, differ to the ea r,but to the eye seem the s a m e . In P honogra phy, the sign of would beused to represent the sound of both p h a nd f , while the two soundsof th would be represented by the two s igns ith a nd thee.

WO R DS SP ELLED A L IKE BUT P R O N OUN CED DIF F ER E NTL Y .

77. Som etim es words tha t a re written a like in the com m on spelling , a re pronounced differently ; a s bow,

a n ins trum en t for shootinga rrows

,a nd bow, a n a ct O f respect ; job, a p iece of work , a nd Job, a

m a n'

s na m e row,a num ber ra nged in line , a nd row,

a tum ult. In a ll

such ca ses the phonogra phic spelling cha nges to correspond with thecha nge O f sound or pronuncia tion .

WO R DS P R O N OUN CED A L IKE BUT SP EL L ED DIF FE R ENTLY.

78 . In som e ca ses where a sound is used forthe express ion of sev

era l idea s , a difference is m a de in the com m on spelling correspondingto a difference in s ignifica tion thus , a le, a il a rk, a rc a ught, ought, etc .

A s such words a re a like in sound, they a rewritten a like in P honogra phy.

CAUTION R ESP ECTIN G CK, SH, TI-I,A ND N O .

79 . The sounds of ch in chest, sh in she,th in thigh or thy , a nd fly in

sing, a re not the na tura l sounds of the com bina tions c a nd h, s a nd h,t a nd h, a nd n a nd g. but they a re s im ple s ingle sounds , forwhich thecom bina tions ch, 811, th, a nd fig a re

'

convcn liona l m odes of express ion .

The lea rner m ust be ca reful to represent them respectively with the

P HO N O G R A PHIC A N A L YSIS. 37

signs cha y, ish, ith or thee. a nd ing, a nd not to write ess-ha y forch or sh,tee-ha y forih, or en ga y forng. It should a lso be noted

,tha t the com

bina tion ng ha s two sounds , tha t of ing, a s hea rd in sing, singer,

ha nger, a nd tha t of ingga y, in the words linger, hunger, etc.

W A ND Y A T THE EN D O F SYL L A B LES.

80 . W a nd g, a t the end of sylla bles , a re never sounded a s consona nts . O neof the m os t com m on errors O f beginners is towrite the s trokesga y a nd wa y a t the end of such words a s ga y, da y, p a y, they, m a y, wa y, boy,coy ,

buy , cow, (kw, caw, etc . In ea ch of these words there is but oneconsona nt-sound , a nd tha t is initia l . In ga y, da y, they, etc .

,the com

pounds a y a nd ey, wh ich a re pronounced a like , ha ve a pure s im plevowel- sound, represented by the s econd-pla ce hea vy dot vowel-s ign . In

boy ,the sound of my is tha t of the diphthong or. In buy, the sound

of uy is tha t of the diphthong I. In cow,ow ha s the sound of the dip h

thong OW . In dew,the sound of ew is tha t O f the diphthong Ew. In

sa w,a w ha s a pure s im ple vowel-sound which is represented by the

first-pla ce hea vy da sh vowel- s ign .

DOUBL E CO N SO N A N T-SOU'

N DS R A R E .

81. It ca n not be too clea rly understood tha t in words like p itted,stabbing, m a s sy, etc .

,there is no rea l reduplica tion of the sounds t, b, a nd

s,resp ectivelv. The reduplica tion of the consona nt is a conventiona l

m ode of expres sing in the com m on orthogra phy the shortnes s of thevowel preceding , a n expedient which would be entirely unnecess a ryif e a ch sound h a d a letter of its own , a s is the ca se in

'

P honogra phy.

82 . R ea l reduplica tions of consona nt—s ounds a re extrem ely ra re.In English they occur only in com pound a nd derived words , wherethe origina l root either begins with the s a m e cons on a n t-sound a s the

fina l one of the prefix , or ends wi th the sa m e tha t com m ences thesuffix .

83 . In the following words we ha ve true specim ens of doubledconsona nt-sounds . Ka y is doubled in book-ca se en in unna tura l , unneces

s a ry, etc . em in im m orta l, im m a teri a l , etc.

§ 84 . A consona nt-s ound ca n never be reduplica ted in the s a m esylla ble hence

,in P honogra phy , a s ingle Sign should be used to rep

resent a ll such double letters a s a re found in the words f agged, whipp ed,ebb, fuss , whizz, of , p la nned , progra m m e, ca ll , burr, etc.

DISP A R ITY IN N UMBER BETWEEN L ETTER S A N D SOUNDS.

85 . A nother source of confus ionj s the frequent use of a l a rgernumber of letters tha n there a re sounds in a word. Thus , the word though ha sSAX letters a nd but two sounds ; through, seven letters a nd but three

3 8 THE CO MP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

sounds scene, five letters a nd three sounds ; da y, dey, a nd a la rge number of sim ila r words , three letters a nd two s ounds.

c, Q, A N D x .

86. The letters c, g, a nd x of the old a lpha bet, ha ve no soundsof their own. 0 soun ds like k in can, like a in cell , like 3 in sufi ee, a nd

like ch in oom m cia l. Q a lwa ys ha s the s ound of k a nd a: sounds likehe in m a ss , like gz in exert, a nd like 2 in Xenop hon . Thes e letters , ofcours e, ha ve nothing corresponding to them in P honogra phy, excepttha t ea ch of their different s ounds ha s its a ppropria te sign , c, in its dif

feront us es , being repres ented by either ha y, ass , we, or ish; g by hay,a nd 9; by ha y

-ess , gay-

see, or see.

N BEFO R E THE SOUN DS O F KA Y A N D G A Y.

87. Before the sounds of ha y a nd ga y, n ha s genera lly the soundof ing instea d of en ; a s in ink, zinc, distinct, distinguish, a nguish, etc. Its

proper sign in such ca ses is ing.

SILEN T L ETTER S OMITTED.

i 88. A ll silent letters , such a s b m debt, c in scene, ch 111 dra chm ,h

'

in

hawr, k'

m know, etc.,a re, of course , om itted in P honogra phy, a s s igns

a re provided only forthe sounds a ctua lly hea rd .

89 . .It is not unfrequently the ca se tha t a letter is sounded in cer

ta in words , while in others O f s im ila r orthogra phy it is s ilent thus , Iis sounded in bulk, bilk, elk, etc.

,but s il en t in ba lk

,ta lk

, cha lk, etc .

F IN A L E G EN ER ALL Y SHrEN T.

90 . A t the end of a la rge cla s s of words the letter e is s ilent beingpla ced there sim ply a s a conventiona l m ode of indica ting tha t the p receding vowel ha s its long sound a s in the words f a te, m ete, rip e, tone, tune.The fina l e in these words repres ents no vowel-sound, its only officebeing to inform the rea der tha t the preceding vowel is long, forbydropping this fina l letter, we ha ve the words fa t , m et, rip , ton, tun.

EW N OT USED AF I‘ER R .

91. In rega rd to the sound of a , when it occurs im m edia tely a fterthe consona nt r, the a uthorities differ . Mr. Webster m a rks it in suchwords a s rude, rule, a s if it were pronounced like u in tube. O n the

other ha nd, Mr. Worcester, in his dictiona ry , s a ys , “When u is pre

ceded by rin the sa m e sylla ble, i t ha s the sound of cc in foot." Dr.

R ussell , the elocutionist , s a ys , “.The vowel i t , im m edia tely preceded

by the letter r, ta kes properly the sound of a o in rood, or of a o in root,giving a s exa m ples the words rule, rude,fruit, true, etc. Wa lker a lso gives

P HO N O G R A PHIC AN AL YSIS. 3 9

the sa m e pronuncia tion . The weight of a uthority, therefore . seem s ta.

be in fa vor of pronouncing u in this connection like 0 0,a nd hence

,the

proper phonogra phic s ign to represen t it, is the third-pla ce hea vyda sh-s ign thus , write ra ther tha n forthe word rude.

UN A CCEN TED VOWEIS . G EN ER A L R ULE .

92. It is often diffi cult to determ ine s a tisfa ctorily the qua lity a nd

qua ntity of vowel- sounds in una ccented sylla bles . Tha t the lea rnerm a y not be without som e guide in this respect , it m a y be s ta ted tha tin a m a j ority of ca s es , when the precise qua lity ca n not be rea dily determ ined , the vowel should be rega rded a s the short sound of the letterus ed to represen t it in the com m on spelling thus , tiga in , tena ble, m entJl ,

m eldl, tra vé'

l, ré

'

fer, p re'

fer, p e’

ruse, ré'

cez'

p t, réfm'

m, p eri l , ld6l . A nd

, gen

era l ly , when the qua lity is clea r , but the qua ntity is in doubt , theshort vowel is preferred to the long thus

,5 represents better tha n a ,

the sound of a t in certa in, cap ta in.

EXCEP TIO N S .

93 . Som etim es , however , un a ccented vowels reta in their properlong sound, a nd should be so written ; a s d in the fina l sylla ble -a te

,

in ca rbona te, sulp ha te, va ca te; m a nda te, etc . 6 in obey ; E in ré-sea t, ré-ftm n

(to form a ga in) , etc . A nd som e writers a lwa ys rega rd these obscuresounds a s long in qua ntity a nd qua lity , except in ca s es where theyclea rly a ppea r to be short thus , they would write aga in, tena ble, réfer,et c ; _but m entl l , m eldl, etc.

PHO N O G R A PHIC SP EL L IN G .

94. A lthough in P honogra phy there is , s trictly spea king ,no such

thing a s sp elling, in the usua l sens e of the term , yet there is a proces sof a na lyzing words into their elem ents , a nd pronouncing the na m esof those elem ents , very a na logous to spelling , a nd which the lea rnerwill find to be a n excellent pra ctice for the purpose of tra ining his ea ra nd j udgm ent to ha bits of a ccura cy a nd quickness in the discernm entof sounds . In this phonogra phic spelling, the consona nts should firs tbe a na lyzed a nd n a m ed, a fterwa rd the vowels , then the consona ntsa nd vowels in the order tha t they a re spoken

,a nd la s tly , the com plete

word should be pronounced . A n illustra tion of this process m a y be

ha d by pronouncing the following words a nd sylla bles ought, tee, a w,

a w-tee,ought ; own ,

en,6 , 6

-en, own m e, em , é , em

—é. m e ta ke,tee, ha y, (i ,

tee-d-ka y, ta ke ; orb, er, bee, aw,a w- er-bee, orb elbow, lee, bee, e, 5 , F

—lea bee-é ,elbow The words a nd sylla bles separa ted by com m a s should be spokendelibera tely , with cons idera ble pa use between while thos e connected byhyphens a re to be pronounced in ra pid succes si on ,

with little or no pa us e.

40 THE COMP LETE I’HO N O G R A PHER .

ESS A N D ZEE CIR CL E .

95 . The s a nd z a re consona nt elem ents of such frequent recurrence, tha t it ha s been found convenient to furnish them with a n a d

ditiona l a nd briefer m ea ns of representa tion . Thefull or stem form s a re

given in the Ta ble of Consona nts ; the other form is a sm a ll circle ;thus , 0 ess , zee.

96. The circle is extrem ely useful beca use it a fi'

ords grea t fa cili tyfor j oining the consona nt-stem s , a nd a lso beca use it com pres ses thewriting into sm a ller spa ce

,thus tending to pres erve its l inea l ity .

N A ME O F THE ESS-CIR CL E .

97. The ass-circle , when not na m ed in conj unction with a strokeconsona nt , m a y be ca lled see. This na m e should not be confoundedwith tha t of the com m on letter 0 , whi ch , bes ides ha ving the sound ofa ss , often ha s the sound of ha y.

METHOD O F JO IN IN G THE CIR CLE TO

98. The circle is joined to consona nt-stem s a s followsI. To single s tra ight s tem s

,by a m otion from the right over to the

left ; thus , cL o s -ka y-s , Es -tee-s , KO s—p ee

-s .L “o

II. To s im ple curved stem s , by writing it on the ins ide of the curve ;thus , Q) s -z

'

sh—s , Cs -z'

lb- s, Z) s-es s-s , n s-em - s , U s -en- s

, s - lee-s .

N A MES O F THE ESS-CIR CLE COMP O UN DS.

99 . These com pounds m a y be na m ed by inserting the short vowelsound 6 between the sounds represented by the circle a nd the stem towhi ch the circle is a tta ched ; thus , s—ka y is ca lled sek ; ka y

-s , kess

s-ka y-s , selcs or skes s s -ga y ,

seg ; ga y-s

, gess ; s -tee , set ; tee -s , tess ;

s-tee-s , sets or stess s -dee , sed ; dee-s , dess ; s—dee-s , scds s -cha y, sech

cha y-s , chess ; s -cha y-s , sobase or seches s -ja y , sej ; ja y-s , jes s ; s ja y—s ,scjes s s -ish ,

sesh ish- s,shes s ; s

-ish -s , seshess ; s -ith , seth ith-s , t hese

s -ith-s , eethes s s cm , sem em -s , m ess ; s-em -s , sems or sm es s s—eu

,scn

en-s , nes s s -en-s , sens or sa ass sr-s , erss .

100 . When the circle is joined to stem s tha t a re written upwa rd,

the na m es of the com pounds should be form ed by us ing the longsound 5 or cc ins tea d of é thus , s -shee , secsh ; shes -s , shees ; s

—shee-s ,

see/aces ; s -lce, slce; s -ree , sree or scree ; but ree-s is ca lled ress s -ree -s ,sercss lee-s , less s-lee-s , s less . The com pound s-wa y should be represented by swa y but wa y-s by wcss . When it is difficult or im poss ible to form sylla bic na m es in the m a nner jus t described

,the full

na m es of the circle a nd stem should be given ; thus , s -ha y, see-ha y

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

42 THE COMP L E'rE P HO N O G R A P HER .

occurring between s tem s , except a few under hea ds III. a nd IV. ,a re

covered by the following rule When the circle occurs between twos tem s of a ny kind, if there be no a ngle a t their j unction ,

it is writtento the first s tem a s if it s tood a lone —if there be a n a ngle betweenthe s tem s

,the circle is written on the outer s ide of the a ngle .

VOCA L IZATIO N ,O F STEMS WITH CIR CL ES ATTACHED.

O R DER O F wm 'rm c .

105 . When a vowel im m edia tely precedes a consona nt-s tem tha tha s a n ini tia l circle , or im m edia tely follows a consona nt-s tem tha t h a sa fina l circle , the vowel- s ign is Written to the s tem a s if it had no circlea tta ched ; thus , -r. sea t a nd L. tea s a re voca lized the s a m e a s ea t

a nd “ I.. tea .

O R DER O F R EA DIN G .

106. In rea ding words in which circles a re used, a n initia l circleis rea d firs t ; then the vowel- s ign , if one precede the stem ; thirdly,the s tem t hen its following vowel- s ign, if there be one a nd la s tly, afina l circle ; thus , sa t -p p

-o- se.

CA UTIO N .— TIIE CIR CLE JO IN ED TO UP -STR OKE STEMS .

107. With up-s troke s tem s , a n initia l circle will , of course , be a t

the bottom,a nd a fin a l circle a t the top ; thus , sa le, s a il ; fi

" la ce,

la ys X ra ce, ra ys .

VO CA L IZATIO N WHEN THE CIR CL E OCCUR S IN THE MIDDLEO F A WO R D.

108 . When a circle occurs between two consona nt-s tem s,if a vowel

im m edia tely precede the circle , _ write its sign to the firs t s tem ; thus ,desk; but if the vowel im m edia tely follow the circle, - write its

s ign to the second stem ; thus , uns afe.

10 9 . The rule. a t 70 a s to vowels -signs between s tem s , does nota pply to these outlines .

USES O F THE CIR CLE .

l l O . The circle is genera lly used a t the com m encem ent of wordstha t begin with the ess sound ; a t the end of words tha t term ina tewith a n ass or zce sound, a nd forthe sounds a ss a nd zce when they occurin the m iddle of words ; thus , L sa ke, soap , fsa id, T o ea se, L da ys ,q

m ouse, Q9ea se, a nd the words desk a nd unsafe in 108.

nxcsrrros s .

Q111. When a n es s nrzce sound is im m edia tely preceded, or im m e

THE L A R G E CIR CL E . 43

dia tely followed, by two concurrent vowels , the s tem - s ign should beused , a s it furnishes m ore convenient fa cilities forvoca liza tion thus

,

21, science, fl cha os .

112. When two es s-sounds are the only consona nts in a word,one

should be written with the circle , a nd the other with the s tem -s ign .

But , a s the circle m a y be joined to either end of the s tem ,we ha ve two

form s , 3 a nd 7,which a re equiva lent to ea ch other. The firs t of theseform s should be us ed inwords where the soun d of ess is fina l ,_ tha t is ,where no vowel is sounded a fter both the consona nts thus , cea se

a nd the second form ,in words tha t end with a vowel thus ,

4

) sa ucy ,

sissy. There is a third form, 7, tha t is genera lly used inwords

where the second of the two consona nts 1s a zee-sound ; thus ,V

7

WHEN THE STEM-SIG N SHOULD BE USED IN STEA D O F THE CIR CLE.

113 . The stem -sign should be used when the ess- sound is the firstconsona nt in a word tha t com m ences with a vowel ; thus , a sk.

114 . The s tem -s ign forthe sound of zee is a lwa ys used when tha ts ound is the first consona nt in a word, whether there be a n initia l vowelor not ' thus . oozing, zero.

110 . The stem -sign is a lso used when the sound of ess or zee is thela s t consona nt in a word tha t ends wi th a vowel , thus , R aeey,

ra cy ; rosy ;— a lso when either of those sounds is the only conso

na nt '

In a . word ; thus , a ce, s a y, essa y, a yes .

THE L A R G E CIR CL E .

9 116. When the sound of es s or zee occurs twice in a word, with no

other consona nt between ,or when the sounds of ess a nd zoo occur in

like proxim ity, the two sounds a re genera lly represented by m a kingthe circle twice the s ize of the s ingle es s -circle thus , 0

‘

es s or zee, O ess

es s,or see-see, or a ss -zee, or zee-es s .

N A ME A N D USE O F THE L A R G E CIR CLE .

117. The la rge circle m a vbe ca lled s is or siz. It is com m only usedto represent a ny of the com bina tions ses , sis , ces

,cis

,s a s

,sos , sus , etc . ,

of the com m on spelling.

THE L A R G E CIR CL E JO L‘JED TO CO N SO N A N T-STEMS.

118. The la rge circle is j oined to consona nt- s tem s precisely in thesa m e m a nner a s the sm a ll circle. a nd such com bina tions a re na m ed in

44 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

a m a nner sim ila r to tha t described in 99 ; thus , o_ sis-key, _o kessis ,

kc fessis , _g kessis—ree — a nd a lso,like the sm a ll circle , m a y be used

either a t the beginning, in the m iddle,or a t the end of a word ;

thus , "v. system ,-P necessity, ca ses .

VOCA L IZATION O F STEMS WITH THE L AR G E CHwLEA TTACHED.

119. The rule a t 10 5,10 8, in reference to the voca liza tion

of stem s tha t ha ve the sm a l l circle a tta ched,a lso a pplies m voca l izing

s tem s with the la rge circle a tta ched.

VO CA L IZATIO N O F THE L A R G E CIR CLE.

120 . When neces sa ry, a vowel tha t occurs between the two soundsrepresented by the la rge circle, m a y be expres sed by writing its s igninside the circle, a nd, if convenient, in the 11m m

,m iddle, or lower pa rt

of the circle, a ccording a s the vowel is first, second, or third pla ce thus ,

©3sea s on, <5\

schism ,-P. secede

, a “, Sussex, . lb. decea se, . z recess .

ESS A N D ZEE SOUNDS DISTIN GUISHED.

121. When grea t exa ctness is required , the la rge circle m a y be

sh a ded a littl e on one s ide to indica te tha t both of its sounds are tha tof zee; thus , A 0 ra ises , instea d of / 0 ra ces .

L O O P S F O R ST O R ZD, A N D STR .

SMA L L L O 0 P ,—8T on zD.

122 . When the consona nt-sound we im m edia tely follows as s (a s inthe wm ds m ost, cost, etc. or, when doe follows zee (a s in the wordsa m a zed, ra ised, etc. the two s ounds a re repres ented by lengtheningthe circle into a sm a ll loop, extending a bout one ha lf the lengthof the s tem ; thus , h

st-ka y, _cha y

-st, usl im y

-s i.

L A R G E L O O P , STR

128. A la rge loop , extending a bout two thirds the length of the

stem , m a y be used to repres ent the sound of sir, with a ny vowel-soundtha t occurs between the t a nd the r (a s in the words m a ster, costar,

etc.) thus ,_9 key-s ir.

N AMES O F THE L O O PS.—VO CA L IZATIO N O F STEMS WITH L OO P S A TTA CHED.

124 . When not sounded in conjunction with a s troke-consonan t ,the sm a ll loop m ay be ca lled stee ; a nd the la rge loop m a y inva ria blybe ca lled star. When the loops a re j oined to consona nt-stem s , the com

R UL ES F O R THE USE O F ISII, SHEE , E L

, L EE , ETC. 4 5

bina tions m a y be na m ed in a m a nner sim ila r to tha t given forthe es scircle com pounds a t 99 ; thus , s t—ka y , stelc ka y

-st , kes t st-ka ys st,

stekes t ka y- str

, kes ter em -s tr, m es ter, etc.125 . The rule a t 10 5 , 108 a lso a pplies to the voca liza tion of

stem s with loops a tta ched. The sm a ll loop , like the circle , m a y be usedboth a t the beginning , in the m iddle

, a nd a t the end of words thus,

ofsta te, p destiny, Lta ste, ca st, L

o

lost. The la rge loop is not useda t the com m encem ent of words

,but m a y be in the m iddle a nd a t the

end ; thus , b\ disturb,Tf

’ca ster

,

{Qm a ster.

SMA L L L O O P SHADED F O R Z'

D.

126. If grea t a ccura cy be requi red, the sm a ll loop m a y be sha dedwhen it represents the sounds zee-dee thus , ra ised

,ins tea d of

ra ced .

THE SMA L L CIR CLE A DDED TO SIs, s'r, A ND STR .

127. The sm a ll circle is a dded to the la rge circle a nd to the loopsby turning it on the O pposite s ide of the s tem ; thus , _p excesses

, 1 ‘s

coa s ts , coa sters .

R UL ES F O R THE USE O F ISH,SHEE, EL ,

L EE,

ER,A N D R EE .

128. In order to secure a m ong phonogra phers a uniform m a nner O fwriting, a nd to give increa sed legibility to certa in words , the followingrules a re prescribed regula ting the use of those s igns tha t m a y bewritten either upwa rd or downwa rd . These rules a re genera l in theira ppl ica tion, covering nea rly a ll the words in wh ich thos e s tem s

occur . They m a y , however , be viola ted in a few ca ses , where theirobserva nce would occa s ion diffi cul t or a wkwa rd form s .

USES O F 1811 .

129 . The consona nt-s tem _J is written downwa rd (being then ca lledish) in the following ca sesI. When it is the only consona nt-stem in a word ; thus , size, j

sa sh.

II. When it is the first consona n t- stem of a word tha t com m enceswith a vowel thus , A shby.

III. When it is the fina l elem ent of a word thus

uss s or SHEE .

13 0 . The consona nt-stem _J is written. upwa rd (being then ca lled

46 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

shes) when it is the la st stem of a word the fina l elem ent of whichis a vowel ; thus , V 5 bushy.

EITHER 15 3 O R SEER .

181. A t the com m encem ent a nd in the m iddle of words , either is]; or“we m a y be us ed ; thus’ or Shop , A OrJ aw“, -“

z: O s

W " bishop ish,however

,is genera lly m ore convenient in such ca s es.

USE O F EL .

13 2. The consona nt-s tem f‘

is written downward (being thenca lled cl ) in the following ca s esI. When it is the firs t consona n t-s tem in a word tha t comm ences

with a vowel, a nd is next followed by a horizonta l s tem ; thus ,C. a like,

A a lum , (j, O lney. Ci,E lihu.

II. Wheni t is the fina l elem ent of a word ; thus ,T yale, L> p ull,

USES O F LEE.

Q188. The consona nt-stem f“

iswritten upwa rd (being then ca lledlee) in the following ca sesI. When it is the only consona nt-s tem in a word thus , T

'

a le, a il,

fi la y, F a lla y, sa il,sa le, fl

” la ce.

II. When it com m ences a word ; thus , fl"

Za ke, fi" \

la me.

When ,however , 2 (whether preceded by a vowel or not) is the firs t

consona nt-sound in a word , a nd em,followed by p ee or be , is the sec

ond, the down -stroke cl m a y be used invaria bly, a s better outlines arethereby secured ; thus , lump .

III. When it is the la s t consona nt-s tem in a word the fina l elem entof which is a vowel ; thus , w jelly , _F Kelley.

IV. G enera lly, when it i s the fi rs t consona nt -s tem in a . word(whether it com m ences with a vowel or not) , a nd is next followed bya down-stroke s tem ; thus , elbow

, A lobe, (Zelegy.

EITHER . EL O R L EE .

9 184. In the m iddle of words , either cl or lee m a y be used ; but leeis genera lly preferred, beca use m ore convenient.

USES ER .

185 . The down-s troke s tem N eris used in the following ca ses1 When ris the firs t or only consona nt-s ound in a word tha t com

m ences with a vowel ; thus , m a rk, a re, a ir, arra y, 3 a ir-ids,

1 orb. F orexcep tions , see 186, hea ding III.

G R O UP CO N SO N A N TS A N D THEIR SIG N S. 47

II. When ris the fina l elem ent of a word ; thus , R bore,“

R“

fe ar,”

3 soa r, sore, 5 store.

HI. A lwa ys forr, before the s t em s em . a nd ha y, whether a n initia lvowel precede it or not thus , M a rm

, R ome, roa m re

ha sh.

usrs or R EE .

13 6. The up- s troke s tem m e is used in the following ca ses

1. When 7 com m ences a word ; thus , K] roa d, A rop e, 4 rush.

F orexception s , see 13 5,hea ding III.

II. When ris the la s t cons ona nt-sound of a word the fina l elem entof which is a vowel ; thus , berry ,

‘04 sorrow, 9/ story.

III. A lwa ys forr, before the s tem s ilk,dhee, oka y, a nd ja y , whether it is

p receded by a n initia l vowel or not ; thus , ea rth, A wra th,.j a rch.

EITHER ER on R EE .

137. In the m iddle of words , either a or Tee m a y be used ; butree is genera lly preferred, being m ore convenient.

G R OUP CO N SO N A N TS A N D THEIR SIG N S.

13 8 . If the lea rner ha s ca refully s tudied a nd m a s tered the principles thus fa rexpla ined, he ha s a cquired the m ea ns of writing phonogra phica lly, a nd with tolera ble brevity , a ny word in the la ngua ge .

But there yet rem a ins unem ployed m uch stenogra phic m a teria l,with

out which no system of short-ha nd ca n justly cla im to be com plete .

If we were obliged to write a ll the consona nts with their full stemsigns , there a re m a ny words in which they a re so grouped together a ndpronounced with such ra pidity tha t the p en would find it diffi cult, if notim poss ible , to keep pa ce with the tongue . To obvia te this diffi culty ,P honogra phy a dopts the very n a tura l pla n of m odifying the s im ples tem of som e one of the consona nts to provide a s ign forthe entiregroup . There a re four different wa ys of m odifying or a ltering s im ples tem s into group-signs , na m ely : 1. By a n initia l book ; 2 . By a fina l

hook 3 . By lengthening a nd 4 . By ha lving .

IN ITIA L HO OKS.

THE L IQUIDS L A N D R .

139 . The liquids l a nd r, in a la rge num ber of words . a re foundim m edia tely following other consona nts , a nd blending with them so

a s to form double consona nt-sounds som ewha t a na logous to the double

48 THE COMP L ETE PHON OG R APHER .

vowel-sounds or diphthongs . Thus , in the words cla y,fla y , gra y, fra y,the first consona nt of ea ch of the com bina tions cl ,fl, gr, fr, glides soquickly a nd im perceptibly into the second, or liquid, tha t the two seemto becom e a c tua lly one sound . In P honogra phy, such com pounds a rerepresented by the stem of the consona nt tha t precedes the liquid,m odified by a n initia l hook .

THE EL -HOOKS .

5 140 . A sm a ll hook a t the beginning a nd on the circle s ide of a nystra ight stem , a nd a la rge hook a t the beginning a nd on the conca veside of a ny curved stem , indica tes tha t such consona nt is im m edi a telyfollowed by the liqui d l thus ,STR AIGHT sm ms : key

-l , c_ ga y- l, rtee-l, rdee- l, oka y

-cl,

ja y-cl , p ee-l,

bee-l, fee-l

,

CURVED STEMS : _Q ish-l, c) shee—l , _9 zhee—l , r) ass -l ,f) zee-al,

n ilk-l,

Odime-l , Q_ef-l, Q vee-l, C/ ing- l, C / en- l

, o em -l, C lee- l, {3 d—l,

C\er-l , o ha y- l, [ 7ga y- l, C\wa y

-Z.

THE ER -HOOKS .141. A sm a ll hook a t the beginning , a nd on the s ide oppos ite the

Z-hook , of a ny stra ight s tem ,a nd a sm a ll hook a t the beginning a nd on

the conca ve s ide of a ny curved s tem , indica tes tha t such cons ona nt isim m edia tely followed by the liquid r thus ,STR AIGHT su ms : lazy

-r, P ga y

-r,

tee-r, dee-r, oka y-r,

ja y-r, p ee

-r,

bee-r,free-fr.

CUR VED STEMS : {sh-r, J shes -r

, J zhee-r, a ss -r, zee-r, Cilk-r,

Cdime-r, L qf-r, L nee-r, v 57194 , Q J

en h em -r, f lee-r, f

’cl-r,

ar-r, A ha y-r, (

7

ga y-r,

‘

N wa y-r.

142. These hooks for l a nd 7 being initia l , will of cours e , whenj oined to or _j ,

be a t the top or bottom , a ccording a s the stem is

written downwa rd or upwa rd.

143 . The s igns we a nd cl, with the el or erhook , should never beused except in connection with other stem -signs (see 22

, 129, I.,

a nd 13 3 , I.

N AME O F THE EL A ND ER HOOK COMB IN ATION S.

144 . The double consona nt-signs of the cl a nd erhook series shouldnot be ca lled [m y-cl

,Ica y er, ga y

-a t, ga y-sr, etc.

, but by na m es form ed , likethose

'

of the as s-circle com pounds , by inserting the short vowel E between the two consona nt-sounds represented by the sign ; thus, kel , ker.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

5 0 THE COMP LETE PHON OGR A PHE R .

ORDER o'

s R EA DIN G voca m zs n DOUBLE CON SON ANT-SIGN S.

148. If a vowel be pla ced to the left of a perpendicula r or incl ineddouble consona nt-sign of the cl or erhook series , or a bove a horizonta l , it is rea d before both elem ents of the com pound thus, JQ ova l , 2 3eagle if it be pla ced to the right of a perpendicula r orinclined sign, orunder a horizonta l , it is rea d after both elem ents ; thus , p ray,

911010 .

149 . A vowel m a y be pla ced on ea ch s ide of a . double consonantSign thus , Q }

.

only.

150 . If a dis tinct vowel-sound is heard between the liquid a nd thep receding cons ona nt, ea ch m us t be written by its stem -sign ; thus ,

> zm l P feel. tri ad .R bore, R fa ir.

USES O F THE EL A ND EB HOOK SIGN S.

15 1. The double signs of the el a nd erbook series are used principa lly forsuch close com bina tions of the liquids with other cons ona ntsa s occur a t the com m encem ent of the words cla y, grow,flow, pry, brow,

etc. but they a re a lso genera lly used where there is a . s light una ccontod vowel sepa ra ting the liquid from the preceding cons ona nt, a s in

app le,"Q evil, L every .

ED O R EB. HOOK SIGN S JOIN ED TO P R ECEDIN G“EMS.

Q152. A n el or erhook sign m a y be joined to a preceding stem without ra is ing the p en from the pa per ; thus , n knuckle, bus ily,

ca per,T

‘

\ copp er, ra zor.

15 3 . But when a n el or erhook com es on the outs ide of a right ora n a cute a ngle, form ed by two s tra ight s tem s , a nd som etim es when itoccurs a fter the en c ircle , the hook ca n not be perfectly form ed without interfering with speed. In such ca s es , however , a slight offs et orshoulder serves ins tea d of a hook ; thus , A rq , L tiger, A dam ,

154. The rules forthe use of task, shoe, etc com m encing on pa ge 45

a lso a pplywhen those stem s a re m odified by initia l hooks thus,

EXCEPTION— R EL .

15 5 . The sign rel, however, is genera lly preferred a t the endof a consona nt outline , whether the word end with a vowel or not ;thus , pearl, p earby, V fa irly, q rl, girl.

GR OUP CON SON AN TS A N D THE IR SIGN S. 51

SPECIAL VO CALIZATIO N .

15 6. F orthe s a ke of obta ining briefer a nd m ore convenient outlines , double consona nt-s igns a re occa s ion a lly used even where there isa distinct vowel- sound between the two consona nts they represent.When necess a ry, such intervening vowel m a y be repres ented a s fol

lowsI. DOT-VOWELS a re indica ted by a sm a ll circle

,written in the three

vowel pos itions a nd pla ced before the double s ign forthe long vowels ,a nd after it forthe short vowels thus , ca re, dea r

, fa tell , -r. till .0 0

But when the position of the conson a nt- s igns renders it inconvenientto obs erve this rule , the circle m a y be written on either s ide fora longor a short vowel thus , t

o

engineer.

II. DASH-VOWELS a nd DIPHTHO N G s a re struck through the double consona nt- s ign thus , coa l, coa rse

,burst

, endure. When a

hook would interfere with the striking of a . vowel-s ign through thestem , it m a y be written a t the end ; thus 'w

ca ll, em p ire.

TWO F OR MS F O R SL , SR , ZL,ZB .

- TIIEIR USES A T THE COM N CEMEN T O F

WOR DS.

157. The s igns for l a nd rwith the cos-circle prefixed , a nd the s tem sas s a nd wewith the cl a nd erhooks , give two m odes of repres enting thecom bina tions sl , sr, zl , a nd er; thus , slee, see-er,

‘Dsel, Dser,

r) zel , Dzer. A ccording to the rules la id down a t 110

, 113 , a nd 114 ,

the a bove form s tha t ha ve the ini tia l circle should be used in wordstha t begin with the sound of ess thus , sa il

, soa r; the form s ed

a nd ser, when a n ass - sound is the firs t consona nt in a word tha t comm ences with a vowel ; thus , 5) a ssa rl , -Da cer; a nd the form s zel a nd

zer, when a zee-sound is the firs t consona nt in a word, whether there bea n initia l vowel or not ; thus , f

) . ea sel,I) . zea l , DEzra .

THE ESS-CIR CLE P R EF IXED TO THE EL A ND EB. HOOK SIGN S.

15 8. The ess -circle m a y be prefixed to a ll the cl -hook s igns , a ndto the curved er-hook signs , both a t the com m encem ent a nd in them iddle of words , by turning it on the ins ide of the hook ; thus ,skel , sp el , Q sfel , (3 Sibel , ax serl , O sm el

, Q ,snel , Q sfer, b

Ulngr, p sm er.

15 9 . A loop or la rge circle is never prefixed to a n cl-hook s ign, beca us e it would be lia ble to be m is ta ken forthe sm a ll circle.

52 THE COMPL ETE P HO N O G B APHER .

THE CIR CLE A ND 81‘ LOOP P R EF IXED TO ra n STR AIGHT ER -KOO K SIGN S.

160 . The two circles a nd the st loop are prefixed to the s tra ighter-hook signs , both a t the com m encem ent a nd in the m iddle of words ,by m erely writing them on the ar—hook s ide of the s tem ,

or , in otherwords , by m a king the book into a sm a ll circle, a la rge circle, or aloop , a s the ca se m a y be ; thus , ‘

\ p er, Sp a“,o\ 4fl

'

8 “e?”_

F ka y-sker, L_ tee-alter, Ksha y

-war, p ee-sker, p ee

-sp a ,

<1dee-sis-ter.

161. The cla ss es of signs trea ted of a t 15 8 a nd 160 m a y be

ca ll ed respectively the sleet series" a nd the alterseries .

OR DER O F R EADIN G VOCALIZED SKEL A ND SEER . SIGN S.162. When

,signs of the skel a nd skerseries a re voca lized. the con

sona nts a nd vowels are rea d in the following order : firstly, the initia lcircle or loop secondly, a ll vowels written before the s tem thirdly , thes tem with its hook , a nd the intervening vowel , if there be one a nd ,

fourthly, a ny vowel written a fter the s tem ; thus , sa ble, sa ber,

spra y, x supp ly,6\ em p ire, stager, L

.“ dis closed

, L7" disgraw,

p rosp er, disa ster.

168. Som eti m es , in the m iddle of words , it is m ore convenient toexpres s both the circle a nd the cr-hook dis tinctly ; thus , a ym ,

164. The consona nt rm a y genera lly be om itted from the Syll a blcsscribe a nd scrip , in such words a s describe,p rescribe,p rescribe, descrip tion, etc.

th

THE WA Y HOOK .

165 . The sem i- consona nt sound wa y, when preceded by s evera l ofthe consona nts , a lso coa lesces with them in a m a nner s im ila r to theliquids l a nd r, a s in the words twis t, request, etc. To represent thesecom bina tions , a la rge initia l hook is used on the cl-hook side of a nys tra ight consona nt ; thus , c__la zy-w, C_gay-w, P tee-w.

166 . These s igns m a y be na m ed kwee, gwas , twee, etc. They a re vo

ca lized the s a m e a s the kel a nd km s eries ; a nd the a ss-circl e is prefixedto them the s a m e a s to the kel s igns .EXA ma s C

V

twice,

LCfl acqm‘

re, q uick, 9 squa w, A b request.

THE YAY HO OK .

167. F ors tenogra phic rea sons , the consona nt gay is express ed by ala rge book on the er-hook side of the stra ight stem s ; thus , c ba g/11,

GR OUP CON SON AN TS A N D THE IR SIGN S. 5 3

f] tee-y, bee-y. The use of this hook will be fully expla ined herea fter, it being s eldom em ployed , except in phra se wri ting.

HOOK F O R EN , IN , O R UN .

_6 168. The sylla bles en, in, a nd 1 m. m a y be prefixed to the stra ighttreble signs of the skerseries ,” by turning a sm a ll ba ckwa rd hook on

the cl-hook Side of the stem a nd to curved stem s with initia l circles ,by turning a Sim ila r hook on the outs ide of the curve thus

,

av in

écn'

be, a" unscrew, ti, uns tm ny, A m sla ve.

NAME A ND USE O F THE IN ITIAL EN -HOOK .

169 . This hook m a y be called either the in, en, or a n hook, a ccording to which of those sylla bles it represent s . It is used before a ny

s tra ight stem of the skerseries , ” a nd before a ny curved s tem tha t isthe a re tha t of the stem en.

s a w0 \

170 . Ef or s ee m a y be a dded to a nystra ight s tem (whether it besim ple, or ha ve a n ini tia l hook, circle, or loop ) by a sm a ll fina l hook on

the circle s ide ; or 0 , L tee-f or 0 , cha yf or v,\ bee-f or

v, P a ger-f orv, u

sek-f orv, step-f or0 .

N AME O F THE EFF -HOOK COMP OUN DS .171. Thes e com pounds m a y be na m ed respectively kqf, iff , chef ,

be.we“.skef. stew.

When a vowel occurs between the consona n t represented bythe s tem —s ign a nd the ef or vee indica ted by the hook, the vowel-signis written to the stem a s if no hook were a flixed ; thus , K p a ve.

RULE FO R R EADIN G .

173 . A vowel- s ign written to a stem tha t ha s a n ef or vee hook, isa lwa ys rea d before the hook thus , Ldeaf , _ a cave.

BY AND VEE DISTIN GUIBE ED.

174 When grea t exa ctness is required, the hook m a y be m a dehea vy forvee ; thus , ”N ; p rove, instea d of proof . But genera llyno confusion will result from us ing the light-hook forboth ef a nd oce.

54 THE COMP L ETE PHON OGR A P HER .

EF A ND VEE HOOK O N CUR VES.

175 . A long na rrow hook m a y be wri tten to the curved sta tus to:d or m thus ,6d hqf, Q m ef . This book should, however, be used veryspa ringly by inexperienced phonogra phers . It is principa l ly used byrep orters in phra s ewriting.

EN HOOK.

176. The consona nt on m a y be joined to a ny s tra ight stem

(whether s im ple. or com pounded with a n initia l hook, circle, or la y )by a s m a ll fina l hook on the s ide oppos ite the ef—hook ; a nd to a ny

curved consona nt, by a sm a ll fina l hook on the conca ve side ; thus ,hay-n, Jtee-n, qf-n , f

’ lee-n.

N AMES O F THE FIN -HOOK CO MP O UNDS.177. The en-hook s igns a re na m ed in a m a nner s im ila r to the ef

hook s igns thus , the cha ra cters in the la s t section a re ca lled respectively ken, ten, fen, kn. The s igns cl-n, {sh-n, shoe-n

, ar-n, f ee-n are ca l led

el’

n, shen, sheen, e m , f en.

VOCALIZATION .

178. The era-hook signs a re voca lized the s a m e a s those of the 4hook ; thus , ca ne, a lla m , 4 shown

, K3 va in, Q; flown.

WHEN A N EF O R EN HOOK SHOULD N OT BE USED.

179. When ef , we, or en is the fina l consona nt-sound in a word tha tends with a vowel, the s tem -s ign m us t be used, beca use the hook doesnot furnish the requi s ite position for the s ign of such fina l vowel ;thus , cough,

'

m

k_cofi'

ee, e grave,c

k gra vy, 0 m en, m 9 .m a ny.

SHUN HOOKS.

180 . The sylla bles shun or zha n , a s hea rd in "diam , fusion, etc. , m a y

be added to a ny stra ight s tem by a la rge fina l hook on the gf-hook side ;a nd to a ny curved s tem ,

by a l a rge fina l book on the conca ve sidethus , _3 key-shun, b ef -shun .

s u m s orrun suns -noon com -c um .

181. The shun-hook signs a re na m ed a s follows : key-shun is

ca lled heshun ef-shun , feshun el-shun , elshun lee-shun, leshun em .

shun, meshun, etc.VOCALIZATION .

182. The shun-hook s igns a re voca lized the s a m e a s the of a nd onbook signs ; thus , .

Jca ution, f .

fip na tion,

.

f a shron.

§ 183 . If it should be necessa ry to disting uish between shun a nd

G R OUP CON SON AN TS A N D THEIR SIGN S. 5 5

tha n, the book m a y be thickrned forthe la tter ; thus , 5 eva sion,in

stea d of k) ova tion,which words

,in unvoca li zed phonography, m ight

in ra re ins ta nces be confounded .

184 . In the com m on orthogra phy, the two sounds represented bythis hook a re indica ted by a va riety of spelling, a s lion in notion, cea n in

ocea n, ssion in m ission, sion infus ion, shion in fa shion,

cia n in logicia n, sia n

in P ersia n, etc

BE EN USED IN STEAD or SHUN .

185 . When ish a nd en fina l a re the only consona nt-sounds in a

word , the s ign ( j shen m ust be used ; thus , cy'

ocea n. Sheri shoulda lso be used when the only other consona nts in the word a re reprosented by a n initia l circle or loop ; thus , J

'

sess io n secession, Jsta tion .

186. The word ocea n, a nd a ny s im ila r word, m a y, however, be reprosented by the shun-hookby joining it to the precedingword ;P a cific O cea n .

SMALL noon F O R SHUN— ITS N AME .

187. The sylla ble shun or zhun m a y be a dded to a ny stem tha t ha sa fina l circle or loop , by turning a sm a ll hook on the ba ck of the s tem ;

thus , _Q kegs-shun, he fes s-shun, P les ter-shun

,etc. This m a y be ca lled

the ishun—hook. It m a y be voca l ized by writing a first or secondpla ce vowel before the hook ,

a nd a third-pla ce vowel after it ; thus .-_Q

a ccession," he p hysicia n. But ishun m a y genera lly be left unvoca lized

without enda ngering the legibility-of the writing ; thus , gcessa tion.

HOOK F O R TR,DR

, O R DHR .

188 . The com pounds tr dr,a nd dhr, with a ny intervening vowel ,

m a y be a dded to a ny s tra ight sign by a la rge fina l hook on the en-hooks ide ; thus , _7 , ha y-tr, Jtee- ir a nd such com bina tions a re voca lizedthe s a m e a s those of the other fina l hooks thus , T ca ter,

fi a ctor,9 3

cla tter,

equa tor, ga ther, ra ther.

N AMES O F THE TE -HOOK A ND ITS COMP OUN DS.189 . This hook m a y be ca lled ter, der, ordher; a nd its com pounds

m a y be na m ed like those of the es s-circle , or those of the en a nd ef hooksthus ka y-ter or -dher is ca lled ketleror Icedher ga y

-ter or-dher, getteror

gedher ree-ter or -dher, reiteror redher, etc.

TER A N D DE R DISTIN GUISHED .

190 . When necess a ry, the hook m a y be sha ded fora'er thus , / 7

r‘der, instea d of v” writer.

5 6 THE COMP L ETE P HON OGR AP HER .

SP ECIAL VOCA LIZATION O F THE TEE -HOOK .

191 . Whenever it is neces sa ry to express a vowel or diphthongtha t occurs between the tee a nd ersounds represented by the {er-hook ,it m a y be done in a ccorda nce with the rule for specia l voca liza tion”

a t 156,or

,if it belong to the third pos ition ,

by writing it within thehook ; thus , c g crea ture.

CIR CLES A N D LOOP S ADDED TO THE FIN AL HOOK SIGN S.

ESS-CIR CLE ADDED To THE Er, SHUN , TEE ,

A ND CUEVED E N HOOK SIGN S.

g192 . The ass -circle (but not the loops or la rge circle) m a y be a ddedto a n ef , shun, or ter hook,

a nd to a n en-hook on a curved s ign ,by

Writing'

it inside the hook t hus , _o. ca ves, L3 occa sions

, K5 fa s him s ,I

? a ctors , Q9 ca nes .

CIR CL ES A N D LOOP S ADDED TO THE STR A IGHT EN -HOOK SIGN S.193 . A ll the circles a nd loops m a y be a dded to the s tra ight en-hook

s igns by s im ply writing them on the en-hook s ide , without a ttem ptingto Show the form of the hook thus , X p un , X p uns , X p uns ter, Jdunce

, A da nces,

aga ins t.

N AME S O F THE COMBIN ATION S O F STEMS , F IN AL HOOKS, A N D CIR CLES O R LOOP S .

194. These com pounds a re na m ed by a dding the sound of the circleor loop to the n a m e of the Sign to which it is a ffixed ; thus , kef- s isca lled kefs keshun-s

,keshuns ketter—s , [setters ven-s , cens ken - s

,hens

ken-SS, kens is ken- s t,kenst ken-s tr, kens ter. The circles a nd loops on

the en-hqok s ide a nd end of stra ight s tem s a re a lso ca lled the ens a nd

ens is,circles , a nd the enst a nd ensterloops .

CAUTION .— EN -HO 0 K CIR CLES SELDOM USED D: THE MIDDLE O F WORD S.

195 . The en-hook circles a nd loops should never be used in them iddle of words , except tha t ens m a y in a few ins ta nces be written ,

when the direction of the s tem s bet veen which it occurs perm its boththe circle a nd hook to be distinctly form ed ; thus , ra nsom

—ff

ya insa id. Therefore , such outlines a s[L dess-lca y, _g kesses -ree,

pee sp er, _T,_ ha y sker, etc. m us t not be l ea d respectively dens -ha y,kensis-ree

, p ensp ee, hens-ha y, etc.

ESS-CIR CLE USED F O R EN S.

196. In the m iddle of a fewwords the s im ple ass - circle m a y be usedforens without enda ngering the legibility of the writing, the en being

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

5 8 THE COMP L ETE P HON O GR APHER .

lengthened curve by com m encing it a t the s a m e point in rela tion to theline of writing tha t the single length of the s a m e stem is com m enceda t for the sa m e pos ition. But the following rule is found to givegrea ter dis tinctness a nd increa s ed legibility to these signs .

P OSITION S O F HOR IZON TAL STEMS.

204 . The pos itions of horizon ta l double- length curves are necessarily the sa m e a s those of s ingle lengths ; thus ,

FIR ST P OSITION m a ter,v

netter.

THIR D P OSITION

P O SITION S O F DOWNWA BJ) L EN G/I‘HEN ED CUR VES .

§ 205 . The pos itions of downwa rd double-length curves a re a s

followsFIR ST P OSITION .

—The lower end resting on the line ; thus , kvetter

, _j shetter

SECOND POSITION .—Divided by the line into two equa l parts ; thus ,

elem .

THIR D P O SITIO N .—A b0 ut two thirds of the sign below the line ; thus ,

f 0

“

k fetter the'ter shetter

P OSITION S O F UPWAR D LEN GTHE N ED CUR VE .

206. The pos itions of upwa rd double-length curves are a s followsFIR ST P O SITIO N .

—Com m encing a bout one third the length of a tee

a bove the line ; thus , f letter.

THIR D P OSITIO N —Com m encing a bout one third thelength Of a to:below the hue ; thus , letter.

VOCALIZATION O F L EN GTBEN ED CUR VES .

207. A ny vowel or diphthong s ign written to a lengthened curvels rea d before the a dded consona nts tr

, dr, or dhr;f My , m em ber, " f f lea der, _L n

fia flm

FIN AL HOOKS R EAD BEFO R E THE ADDED CON SON ANTS.208. The power of a ny fina l hook on a l engthened curve ta kes

effect before the a dded consona nts tr,dr

,thr

,or dllr thus , slender,

L ntorm entor.

GR OUP CO N SON AN TS A N D THEIR SIGN S. 5 9

F IN AL CIR CLE O B. LOOP TO B E R EA D AFTER THE ADDED CON SON AN TS .

20 9 . A fina l circle or loop is rea d a fter the a dded consona nts tr,dr

,etc. thus

,K N "

m a tters , A m others, cylinders .

SP ECIAL VOCALIZATION .

210 . A vowel or diphthong occurring im m edia tely before the fina lrof a lengthened curve m a y be written in a ccorda nce with the rule for“specia l voca liza tion”

a t 15 6 ; thus , w entire,

"

I, a dventure,

P OSITION S O F DOUBLE -LEN GTH STR AIGHT STEMS.

211 . The positions O f the double- length or repea ted perpendicula ror inclined stra ight stem s m a y be indica ted in the sa m e m a nner a sthose of the lengthened curves thus

FIR ST P OSITION : ree-ree.

SECON D P OSITION ree-ree.

THIR D P OSITION ree-ree.

HALVIN G .

HALF LEN GTH STEMS

212 . E ither tee or dee m a y be a dded by ha lving to a ny consona ntsign , whether s im ple or com pounded with a n initia l circle or Ioop , orwith a ny hook ,

fina l a s well a s initia l ; thus , _ Ica y-t, a_sek-t

,

stek—t, 0

\sis-p ea t, r sker-t, kel-t, ker-t

, L kwee—t, p sf-t

, p en-t,

p eshun-t, g p etter

-t, p leu

-t, p ren

-t, g ep en-t.

N AME S O F THE HALF -LEN GTH SIGN S .213 . The ha lf-length com pounds a re na m ed by pronouncing the

vowel e with the consona nts represented by the Sign , the vowel beingpla ced where it will m a ke the m ost ea s ily uttered na m e , thus , theha lf lengths a t 212 a re respectively ca lled ket , sekt or sleet , stekt, sis -p et,akret or skert, klet or Icelt, kert or kret, h eel , p eft, p ent, p eshunt, p ellerd, p lent,prent, sp ent . But the stem s es s

,z

’

sh, shee, el , lee, er, a nd rec, when ha lved,a re na m ed

,respectively , est, e

'

sht, shet, elt, let, ert, a nd ret.

CAUTION .— HALVIN G O F STEMS WITH F IN AL CIR CLES O R LOOP S ATTACHED.

214 . It will be observed tha t when a s tem with a ny fina l hook isha lved, the a dded tee or dee is rea d a fter both s tem a nd hook but whena . s tem with a fina l circle or loop is h a lred , the a dded tee or dee m us t be

60 THE COMP LETE PHON OGR AP HE R .

rea d im m edia tely before the circle or loop. In other words , fina l circles a nd loops a re a dded to the ha lf-length signs in the s a m e m a nnera s to the full-length stem s ; thus , “ 9

ka y- s dress) , ka y

- t- s (lcets ) , Ldcr—f-S (drefs) , lo der-f-t-s (drafts), _D

ka y-n-s (leens ), . .

oka y

-n - t—s (lcents),m cm -st (m eet) , m em -t-s t (m ets t or nwds t).

P OSITION S O F HALF-LEN GTH STEMS.

HOR IZON TAL STEMS .

§ 215 . The pos itions of ha lf- length horizon ta ls a re, of course , thesa m e a s the pos itions of the full- length horizon ta ls (see 61) thus

,

FIR ST P OSITION Amet

,

q“sent

,lcent.

SECON D P OSITION a

THIR D P OSITION

P ER P EN DICUL AR A N D IN CLIN EI) STEMS.216. The positions of perpendicula r a nd inclined s tem s a re a s

follows :FIR ST P OSITION .

— Above the line,the lower end of the s tem dista nt

from it a bout one third the length of a tee ; thus , tet, brent,l,

left, 7 rets , J j ,ent_J_dent.

SECON D P OSITION .— R es ting on the line ; thus , j’ stent,

"

j ,ent J dent.

THIR D P OSITION ._ Jus t below the line ; thus , -

l‘ tlent, - dent .

§ 2 l7. F orthe third pos ition , som e phonogra phers write ha lf- lengthperpendicula r a nd inclined s tem s through ins tea d of below the line ; thus

VOCALIZED HALF -LEN GTH SIGN S. — 0 R DER O F R EA DIN G .

218. A voca lized ha lf-length Sign is rea d in the following orderF irst, thefi tem (with its hooks , initia l circle or loop , if there be a ny)a nd its vowel-signs , in a ccorda nce with rules heretofore given ,

thesa m e a s if it ha d not been ha lved second, the tee or dee a dded by ha lving a nd , third, the fina l circle or loop, if there be a ny.

EXAMP LES get, da te, fi yet, L. sect, p la te, p ra te, A hurt, a s

word, .p settled, c;\ sobered, g. tra ined, oS spra ined, \3 p a tient, g blend, 3 , blends ,

in a ncient, bra nd s , f sta nd, ap proved, b

'

qfl'lcient.

DEE A ND TEE DISTIN GUISHED.

219 . When a stem with a n en-hook is ha lved, if it be deem ed de

s ira ble ever to distinguish whether the a dded sound l e dee or tee, it m a y

GR OUP CON SON AN TS A N D THE IR SIGN S. 61

be done by sha ding the hook fordee thus , g p a ined, instea d of g pa int.This dis tinction is , however, s eldom necess a ry in pra ctice , the contextbeing genera lly a suffi cient guide .

O220 . The ha lf- length s igns m a y be joinedwith other s igns , whetherof the s a m e or different lengths , or whether sim ple or com pound a nd

they m a y be used either a t the beginning, in the m iddle, or a t the end

of words ; thus , bottom, b a scerta in, intim a tion

intim a te,4

L, a scerta ined, i n? fortified,kc affidavit, m sentiment,

reputa ble, m na m ed,\9 p uzzled,

f ‘ f) m uzzled.

SP ECIAL R EMAR KS UP ON THE HALF-LEN GTHS.

IM ’R O P ER JOIN IN GS.221. A full- length a nd a ha lf- length s tem m ust not be j oined , if

one or both be s tra ight, or if both be curved , but a re a rcs of circless tru

’

ck in the s a m e direction ,except they form a n a ngle a t the point

of j unction ; forins ta nce , ha y a nd lcet, lee a nd ket, ci a nd ket, etc .

,a re not

a l lowa ble com bina tions , beca us e it is diffi cul t to dis tinguish such s igns ,onthe one ha nd, from a full-length stem , a nd on the other ha nd

,from

two full- length s tem s . Thus , ha y- ltd j oined,m ight cc supposed to be

lca y m a de a little too long , or ha y-ha y m a de too short . In these ca sesthe full-length s tem s shou ld be used ,

thus , write'

not for

correct, (v Inot f forliked

,

-L1not -K_ forej

'

ect.

s uT A m en EF on w a s.

222 . When the com bin a tion sht is im m edia tely preceded by e/' or

vee, it m us t be repres ented either by the full-length s tem s shee-tee, or

by the downwa rd ha lf-l ength isht ; thus , M lavished, Sfished.

STR AIGHT HALF -LEN GTHS IN SAME DIR ECTION N OT ALLOWED.

223 . Two s tra ight ha lf-lengths running in the s a m e direction ca n

not of course be joined , beca use they would a ppea r the sa m e a s one fulllength stem ; thus , is dee, not ded-ded . To a void the inconvenienceof disj oining in such ca ses , the firs t com pound should be written withfull- length stem s , a nd the other with a ha lf-length , a s in the wordfl ca tgut.

SYLLABLES -TED A N D -DED.

224 . The sylla bles - ted a nd -ded, term ina ting a djectives a nd the

perfect pa rticiple a nd preterit of regula r verbs , a re genera lly writtenwith the s igns ted a nd ded

,without rega rd to the m a nner of writing

the prim itive word ; thus , write a ct, but fi ~ not 7 for a cted ; 7

good, but fl . not7

] forgoa ded.

62 THE COMP LETE P HO N O GR APHER .

HALF -LEN GTHS DISJ O IN ED.

225 . Som etim es it is necess a ry to deta ch a ha lf- length from thepreceding stem ,

or els e to write its equiva lent full-length stem s thus ,

da ted, N , wa ited, l, drea ded, N I

0 wa ded.

EST STR UCK UP WAR D .

226 O cca siona lly ,when it is difficult or inconvenient to j oin the

ha lf-length es t to a fina l shun or en hook , it'

Is a llowa ble to s trike it upWa l d ; thus , K 5 fa ctionis t, fig

"

elocutionist.

MEDIAL VOWEL AFTER HALF -LEN GTH.

§ 227. When a vowel occurs im m edia tely a fter tee or dee a dded byha lving ,

if the next succeeding consona nt-s ign be a circle or loop , thereis no position in which to write the vowel-Sign ,

a nd it m us t be om itted a s the firs t i in UK

“

a nticip a te. But if the next cons ona nt a fter atee or dee sound be written with a stem - s ign , the vowel m a y be writtento tha t ; thus , esteem .

o

STEM—SIGN S F O R TEE O R DEE BEF OR E A F IN AL VOWEL.

228. When either tee or dee is the la st consona nt-sound in a word, ofwhich the fina l elem ent is a vowel , it should be wri tten with the s tems ign ,

beca use , if the ha lving principle were used , no vowel-pos ition wouldbe provided forthe Sign O f the fina l vowel thus , \ J

L into. The sa m eis a lso true when a word ends with a circle or loop preceded by tee ordec, with a n intervening vowel ; thus , fl )

induce This rule gives adis tinction by outline between such words a s p ity a nd p it,

notice a ndfig notes , etc.

EXCEPTION . SP ECIAL LICEN SE

229 . When , however, the fina l vowel of a word is third p la ce, a ndthe consona nt im m edia telv preceding it is the sound of tee or doe

,it is

a llowa ble , by wa y of license , to u se the ha lving principle , a nd then towrite the vowel-sign a t the end of the ha lved s tem ; thus , K; f a culty,

vita lity, neutra lity,K. fra ilty . Such vowel-Sign is read befO Iea fina l circle or loop joined to the ha lf length ; thus , L . f a culties .

23 0 . The a bove exception m ust not be extended to vowels of eitherthe firs t or second position its chief use is to shorten the outlines O f ala rge cla s s of long words tha t end with the vowel-sound i preceded byeither a tee or dee sound.

G R OUP CON SON AN TS A N D THE IR SIGN S. 63

AMBIGUOUS OUTLIN ES . — HOW AVOIDED .

23 1 . The use O f the ha lving principle to indica te both tee a nd deewill som etim es give the s a m e form fortwo different words thus ,

of ca ses , the context will Show whi ch word is intended . If. however,

it Should ever be deem ed desira ble to dis tinguish between such words ,the consona nt tee m a y be indica ted by ha lving ,

a nd deewritten with the

ful l stem -sign ; thus , p a te, a s dis tinguished from p a id ; though ,

genera lly, no a m biguity would a rise from writing p a id the‘

s a m e a s

p a te, a nd so with m ost other words of the s a m e cla ss .

HALE-LEN GTH R EE .

23 2 . Ha lf- length ree, when sta nding a lone , should genera lly beused forree followed by the sound of tee, a nd ree-dee written with thetwo stem —s igns ; thus , ra te, / Ira id. But a fter a nother Consona ntstem ,

ree m a y be ha lved to a dd either a tee or dee sound thus , ( V

m a rt or m arred, KV

/ fired .

TWO VOWE LS BEF OR E F IN AL TEE on DEE .

23 3 . When the sound of tee or dee is im m edia tely preceded by twovowels , the s tem -s ign should be used ; thus , p oet. This rule , a ndthe one given a t 23 2, secures a dis tinction by outline between suchwords a s 4 right , v

/ iride, a nd ( l riot.

F IN AL DEE P R ECEDED BY EL,R EE

,O R EN , ETC.

234 . When the sound of dee'

18 fina l , a nd'

1s preceded by either log,ree, or en, which

"

15 itself both preceded a nd followed by a vowel , thestern- s ign Should genera lly be used ; thus , . ( l solid, l/ ltarried ,

eyed.

UPWAR D A N D DOWN WAR D STEMS HALVED .

Q 23 5 . When convenient, the rules forthe use of upwa rd a nd downwa rd s tem s (see pa ge 45 a nd onwa rd) should be obs erved when thos estem s a re ha lved ; thus , p ulled , app ella te

' but ha lf- length ree

is genera lly preferred to ha lved er, even in viola tionof the rule. See

the exa m ple m a rt, a t 23 2.

64 THE COMP LETE P HON O GR A P HER .

G R OUP VOWEL S A N D THEIR SIG N S.

IMP R OP ER DIPHTHON G S.

GEN E R AL R EMAR KS.23 6 . A s h a s been before rem a rked, there a re but four proper diph

thongs recognized ih our la ngua ge . These diphthongs a nd their signsha ve been a lrea dy fully trea ted of a t pa ge 3 0 a nd onwa rd. We ha ve ,however

,m a ny other double vowels tha t do not com e s trictly within

the definition of proper diphthongs . but which a re yet so like them in

their na ture,a nd a re of such frequent occurrence in words , tha t it ha s

been found convenient to represent them in a s im ila r m a nner, a nd togive them s igns tha t m a y be m a de with fa cility a ndwithout ta king offthe p en .

237 These double sounds differ from the close or prop erdiphthongsin ha ving a less intim a te connection of their com ponents ; they m a y,

therefore,be term ed op en

~orim pm p erdiphthongs .

COALESCEN CE O F THE DOUBLE VOWELS.23 8 . The degree of intim a cy with which these double sounds co

a lesce va ries in different words . Som etim es they a fi woa ch very nea rlyto the cha ra cter of clos e diphthongs , a s , for ins ta nce , the sounds of

a h-‘

i in the word a ye (yes) , or 0 0 -1 in L ouis , etc. while in other wordsthe two concurrent vowels a re entirely severed, a s a h i in hurra lu

’

ng ,

0 0 -5 in cooing , etc . When ,however , the prim a ry a ccen t of theword fa lls

upon the second of the two vowel- sounds , a s in deistic, the m ost comp lete sepa ra tion occurs , a nd they cea se in a ny degree to resem ble properdiphthongs , except in the fa ct tha t they a re -two vowels pronounced insuccession ,

with no consona nt intervening .

COMP OSITION O F THE DOUBLE VOWEL S.239 . It will a lso be seen tha t in nea rly a ll of the double vowels .

whether they a re close or open diphthongs , the short s ound 1 is one ofthe elem ents , being united , either initia l ly or fina lly, with som e one

of the other vowel-sounds of the sca le , a s well a s wi th a nother 3. sound.

REMARKS O N THE DOUBLE-VOWEL SIGN S.240 . The imp roper dipht hongs , like the prcp er diphthongs , a re repre~

sented by sm a ll a ngula r cha ra cters , which a rewritten to th\consona nts tem in the position of the distinguishing vowel , or the vowel withwhicl the sound 5 is j oined . The first or second stroke of the s ign ism a de hea vy, a ccording a s the first or second vowel of the com bina tionis long . The signs representing the dot-vowels in com bina tion with "

i ,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

t“6 THE COMP LETE P HON OGR APHER .

241. In a sim ila r m a nner,a nother series of double signs m ight

a lso be provided for double vowels ha ving a s their ba s ic com ponentthe other short close vowel 66 but it would be of little pra ctica l va luein writing English, a s we ha ve only one ins ta nce of such a . com bination tha t

‘

does not fa ll within the s eries given in the a bove ta ble,na m ely , the prOperdiphthong

L

?6-66 (ow) .

SIMPLE SIGN S IN STEAD O F DOUBLE ALLOWABLE.

242 It is not im pera tive tha t the double signs should be usedthe double vowels m a y be correctly represented by the s im ple s igns oftheir elem ents , written to the consona nts in a ccorda nce with theprinciples la id down a t 3 5 a nd 57 thus , we m a y write 5

or

Wfor cooz

'

ng, Tor g for cl ayey.

TR EBLE VOWEL-SIGN S.

243 . When the vowel-sound ‘

z‘ precedes the proper diphthongs r,

or, a nd ow, it m a y be repres en ted by a n initia l tick ; thus ,"ii z-O I

,z-ow.

EXAMP LES L , genu ,M 1 Honeoye.

g244 When the vowel-sound 1. follows one of the four proper diphthongs , it m a y be represented by a fina l tick ; thus ,

V\

I-‘

i ,‘5 0 1-3 , ow-i

,Ew-

‘

i .Z

rea m ing, -li dewy.

SAME SIGN S USED F O R OTHER . DOUBLE O R TR EBLE VOWEL S.245 . N o confusion will result in rea ding if the a bove series of Signs

a re a l so som etim es used to represent such double or treble vowels a sa re com posed of a n a ccented long-vowel or diphthong, a nd a ny Shortvowel , except 66 ; thus , Sign N o. 14 m a y be em ployed for 6 -6 in

Owen. In like m a nner , Sign N o. 8 m a y be used for in crea tor,

N o. 22 forE6 in theology, etc.

LICEN SE A S TO DIR ECTION O F THE GR OUP -VOWEL SIGNS.

246. When m ore convenient, the s igns opening to the right a ndleft m a y be inclined a little from the horizonta l ; thus , or,

” 3 I6 ,

-1 a s in the words K void, L , droning, _J ehm oy, f folio,Wa sh. Ca re m ust be ta ken, however, not to incline them so m uchtha t they will be l ia ble to be m is ta ken for those opening upwa rd a nddownwa rd.

STEN OTYP Y .67

THE ASP IR ATE HAY .

DOT- SIGN .

247. When the a spira te occurs before either p ee, bee, ef , or s ee, itm a y be represen ted by a light dot pla ced before the Sign O f the in tervening vowel or diphthong thus , ha bit

, A hub, hea p ,

"

L ha lf .

This Sign is used to a void the a wkwa rd junctions which those conson a nts m a ke when j oined to a preceding s tem ha y. The dot-S ign m a y

a ls o be used before otherconsona nts in the m iddle O f words , fromwhich ,

forthe s a ke O f brevity, or to secure a n ea sier form , the stern ha yha s been om itted thus A lha m bra p erha p s .

TICK ~SIGN .

248 . The consona nt wa y m a y be a spira ted by a perpendicula r initia l tick thus , whey. It is a lso a llowa ble to a spira te wa ywith thedot-s ign written a fter the s tem a nd before the s ign O f the succeedingvowel or diphthong thus , h

“white.

THE N OMIN AL CON SON AN T.

249 . It is som etim es necessa ry to express one or m ore vowels ordiphthongs without a consona nt-s tem ,

a s is the ca se with a few wordstha t conta in on ly vowel- s ounds . In such ca ses a ny one O f the s igns

T J( J_ha ving no specific va lue

,m a y be em ployed a s a n outline to

which to write the vowel- s igns ; thus , l E a h,V

J: lo. This Sign,

which is us ed only for the purpose of Showing the vowel pos itions ,is ca lled THE N OMIN AL CON SON AN T.

STEN OTYP Y .

g 25 0 . P honogra phic outlines m a y be represented in m uch sm a llerspa ce , a nd with fa rles s expense , by the letters of the ordina ry prin tinga lpha bet tha n by the u se O f engra ved short-ha nd cha ra cters . Thiss tyle of printing is ca lled STEN OTYP Y .

25 1. The system O f steno typy em ployed in this work ,a lthough

Sim ila r in s om e of its deta ils to tha t found in other phonogra phicbooks , is believed to be grea tly superior to a ny like m ea ns heretoforedevised forthe s a m e purpos e. The pla n is a s follows : E a ch conso.na nt-s ign is represented by the letter or letters O f the com m on a lphabet by which it is m ost rea dily a nd na tura lly sugges ted. In the lis t

68 THE COMP LETE P HON OGR APHE R .

below,the phonogra phic na m e O f ea ch consona nt-stem is placed di

rectly under its s tenotype.

SR EE,

’ ‘L EE,

’ ‘R EE

,

’A N D

‘Ess .

’

25 2. The s tenotyp es of the ups troke s tem s shee, Ice, a nd ree a re dis

tinguished from ish, cl , a nd errespectively , by being printed in ita lics .

The s tenotype of a s , when struck upwa rd a s in elocutionwt,

K 2) fa ctionist, etc , should a lso be printed'

m ita lics .

STEN OTYP ES O F STEMS A N D O F CIR CLES, HOOKS, ETC , Di STIN G UISHED.

25 3 . The stenotyp es of the s tem -s igns a re dis tinguished from thestenotypes of consona nts represented by the circles , loops . a nd hookm odifica tions , a nd the dot a nd tick s igns forha y, by printing the form erin ca pita ls a nd the la tter in sm a ll letters ; thus , D, k

'

F

ESTE, 3 885 ; o__ SSKL_D

KSS, ho F ss ; stK , _c . Kstr; Kl,

ill , _9 ZHl , 0 H1 ; P Kr, CHr, ( THr,

c

\Wr ; SP1,

Q sF l , Q.

sFr, sPr,0\ ssPr, stPr Kw, Tw ; Ky,

By ; a_nsKr; Kf, QDHf Kn, F n ; _3 Kshn , b

F shn ; _e .Kfs ; P ns , P ns tr; N tr, k F itt

,

L tr, Dt, g P lnt, L

sKt, r eKrt, Prnt, 1, Drfts .

25 4 . When a stem m odifica tion m a y be em ployed to write m oretha n one consona nt, or group of consona nts , its s tenogra ph m a y va rya ccordingly ; thus , SP 9 or s , U s or eN z, __o Kss , Ks a , or

Ezz, R st or d ; A Mi or Mv, P S G rf or Grv, u s or sKv

JTtt , Tdr, orTdhr, A Mtr, Mdr, or Mdhr sP nt or sPnd .

STEN OTYP E3 or SHADE!) O IR CL l-ls , Ere.

25 5 . The phonotype of a . consona nt written with a sha ded circle,

STEN O TYP Y . 65,

a fter the ess - circle thus , 4 Ksshnyke F zshn.

STEN OTYP ES O F OUTL IN ES CON TA IN IN G MOR E THA N O N E STEM.

25 6 . A hyphen is printed between two s tenogra phs (whether of

single or group s tem s) to indica te tha t the s igns they repres ent a re

j oined ; a n inverted sem icolon , to indica te tha t they a re disj oined a nd

written nea r ea ch other ; a colon, to indica te tha t they a re disj oined,a nd the second s ign written close to , but a little under the firs t a n

inverted p eriod, to indica te tha t they a re disjoined, a nd the second s ignla pped over the firs t ; a nd a cross to indica te tha t they a re dis

j oined,a nd the second sign written through the firs t . A s im ple spa ce

m a rks the ordina ry sepa ra tion between words . A num era l j us t a ftera nd genera lly nea r the upper pa rt of a stenotype , whether of a sim pleor com pound s ign ,

indica tes the position of its phonogra ph . When no

num era l is given , the second pos ition is unders tood . A stenotype shouldbe na m ed a ccording to the phonogra phic nom encla ture a lrea dy given .

EXA LQ L ES m N -V, b B -K-M, G -G

, kM F -N,

P -B, L V-G ,

f

) H-Z, f) L -SE

, _ n_ Ks -K, L Ds -K ,

P s -V, L SE -K, j

_Sing, A L -M

, r“ L -M

,F -R ,

P -R,

“

N R -Pr, y P -R l

,

ansKr-B , A nslf v,

G rV , KTrs P s , L 9 Trs -G s , L / Dns -N G , P rsshn-L ,

Kltr-L, R -P t P Zld ,

_1 K-T G t, P -

,L d \f

P L t ; L K . Dshn ; II D-Td , fl; N n+D Ktr;

A M', + 13 3 ,

/ l R '-T,

P ’-T.

§ 257. When one of the s igns m entioned in the la s t s ection is

printed before a stenogra ph s ta nding‘ a lone, it indica tes how its ou t

line is to be written in rela tion to a ny outline th a t m a y precede it ;thus , fP ln2 denotes the outline of comp la in , a nd a lso tha t it should bewri tten nea r the next preceding word . See the prefix com

, 284.

ESS-CIR CLE BETWEEN STEMS.

258. A circle between two s tem s m a y be considered a s joined toeither ; thus , m

Ms—M or M-sM,Ms—L or M- sL . G enera lly ,

however,the circle should be represented in connection with the s tem

tha t precedes it , except in ca ses where the phonogra phic outline wouldbe bes t sugges ted by a tta ching it to the succeeding stem ; thus ,7

°Ks-J, >o Bs -J, 7 R s—K ; but 3

" T-sL , Lg“F -sL , J N -sL .

70 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A I’HER .

VOWEL S.

§ 259 . The vowel-signs , both s ingle a nd double, though seldomused in a dva nced P honogra phy , m a y , when necessa ry, be indica ted a sfollowsa 6 ii ,

raw or u, i i , iii , etc.

vetc.

260 . The stenotypes of the vowels m a y be written in with theconsona nt stenotypes in theorder of their occu rrence in the word. A

hyp hen between the s tenotype of a vowel or diphthong com m encing orending a word, a nd the stenotype of the nea res t s tem , indica tes tha tthey a re to be joined in writing . The s tenotypes of vowels to bewritten a ccording to the rule for specia l voca liza tion”

a t 15 6, a re in

pa rentheses .Em m a 3D oN , _

l_ea , RA BALM,

F IL L,7 v

L B-éK, T3 -oM ; 1 i-D‘; m ay,

.

31" D(é)r3, f. T(é)l ,

K(s)11,

ix s sP (i )r1.

G EN ER A L R EMA R KS O N O UTL IN ES O F W O R DS.

261. One of the peculi a rities of P honogra phy is its va riety of consonant form s , it often being poss ible to represent the consona nts of as ingle word with severa l different, a nd s om etim es very unl ike, outlines . This va riety results from the em ploym en t of m ore tha n one

m ea ns of representing certa in of the cons ona nts , s om e of them ha vingboth a n upwa rd a nd a downwa rd s ign , a nd others being som etim eswrittenwith a s tem , a nd s om etim es included in a group sign. This isfrequently the source of not a little perplexity to the beginner, who isem ba rra ss ed a t ha ving to s elect outlines before he ha s becom e fa m ilia rwith the principles tha t should control such choice. This is a dimculty, however .which a little pra ctice , in both rea ding a nd writing , soonovercom es . The genera l rule in rega rd to such words is tha t theyshould be written with the briefes t outlines tha t a re cons is tent withlegibility a nd ea se bf voca liza tion ; ca re being ta ken to obs erve A na logy of F orm , which requires , without rega rd to their deriva tion orm ea ning, tha t words of sim ila r cons truction , a s rega rds the consona ntsa nd vowels a nd their a rra ngem ent, be written in a sim i la r m a n

G E N E R A L R EMA R KS O N O UTL IN ES or WO R DS. 71

ner; thus if suddenly, Cb lovingly, nea rly, goa ded'

,

fvvg “

likcun'

se, C

C? sla ckwa ter; their prim itives , or com ponents , being

written sudden, fkv loving , T good, L

l -K like a nd

Ws 1 wise, sL

'-K s la ck a nd VVtrl wa ter.

262 . There a re occa s ion a l exceptions to the rule given in the la s tsection , a s where uncom m on ,

ra rely us ed , or peculia rly form ed words ,forthe s a ke of increa s ed legibility, a re written a ccording to wha t m a y

be ca lled A na logy of Deriva tion or Com pos ition ,which requires tha t

the deriva tive be written like its prim itive , the s igns for the a dditiona l sounds being s im ply j oined on ,

'

or tha t a com pound word shouldbe written by m erely j oining together the ordina ry outlines of its comp onents , even in viola tion of the requirem en ts of F orm A n a logy.

But when both a n a logies a gree in requiring a word to be written witha pa rticula r outline , but which ca n not ea s ily be m a de without ta kingoff the p en ,

it is better to disj oin tha n to cha nge the outline ; thus ,write F fl instea d of F f-K-SH-N t

,forafiecliona tc.

SP ECIA L DIR ECTIO N S A S TO CER TA IN OUTL IN ES.

263 . Speed in writing P honogra phy depends chiefly upon thea bility of the writer to m a ke the va rious outlines of words without hes it a tion. This fa cility ca n be m ore rea dily a tta ined by becom ing thoroughly fa m ilia r with the bes t m odes of writing those sylla bles , orsm a ll groups of con sona n ts , tha t a re com m on to cla sses of words , tha nby a ttem pting to lea rn the outline of ea ch word of the la ngua ge sepa ra tely . The following ta bles a nd rules will be found useful in thisconnection .

IN ITIAL LETTER S.

Exa m p les .

a nta gonis t, a nteda te . a ntidoteca ligra phy, ca lum et, ca lum ny

ca rbon , ca rica ture , ca rpetca ta logue , ca ta m ount , ca tegorycenta ge , centenn ia l , centiped , centuplechirogra phy , chironom y , chirurgeonChris tm a s

,chrom a tic , chroni c

circuit, circus , Circa ssia ncircle

,circula te

cis -a lpine , cis terncolla tera l , collect, colloquycork , correct, coronercounterfeit , counters igncuticle

,cutlet

,cutting

72 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

F IN A L SYL L A B LES.

204. The following a re the principa l fina l sylla bles tha t a re lia bleto trouble the novitia te .

Sumx. Sign

cise, by a s

cism , ssMhood, Hdom eter, Mtr

sis , we, as

Td

Exa m ples.delica te, deliverenterta in , enterpris efa rm ,

fa rther, fa rthingferm ent, fervid , fervorfurlong, furna ce , furtherhepta gon , hepta chord, hepta rchyhydra ulic , hydrogen ,

hydrom eterhypocrite , hypothesisintent

,intense , intention

intercede , interdict, interlinejurisdiction , j uris t, jurisprudencem eta l , m eta phor , m eteoricm ultifa rious , m ul tiform , m ultipleocta ve , octenn ia l, O ctoberpa ra gra ph , pa rchm ent, pa rlia m entpercola te , perfect, pers onphila n thropy, P hila delphiapolem ic, polyglot, polygonqua dra nt, qua druped , qua druplerela tion , releva nt, reliefretroa ction, retrogra de , retrospectSeptem ber , septennia l , Septua gintsubterfuge , subterra neansuperb, super-ca rgo, superfinesupra m unda ne , suprem es ister , sys tem , sus ta inunderdone , unders ignva lid, va lue , va lveverba l, verge , vers ionvolunta ry, voluptuousvulga r, vulture

Exa m p les.p recise, criticis e, exerciseos tra cism , criticism , solecismchildhood , s is terhood, boyhoodtherm om eter, ba rom eter, hydrom eter

ba s is , thes is , cris is , colossusquietude, solicitude, la titude

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

74; THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

3 . When the present tense ends with the a ss-circle , not written ins ideof a fina l hook

,— by cha nging the circle to a n si - loop thus , Ks 3 a ccru e,

s 3 a ccused, G lns

lgla nce, G lns t

lgla nced. B ut when the circle is written

ins ide of a fina l hook,the consona nt represented by such hook should

be written with its stem -s ign , a nd the circle cha nged to a loop ; thus ,F ns fence, F -N et fenced, Vus 3 evince, V

’-N s t evinced.

4 . When the pres ent tense ends with the st-loop,— by cha nging theloop to the a ss-circle

,a nd a dding ted ,

thus Ks t l a ccost, Ks -Td‘ a ccosted .

A B B R EVIA TIO N .

g271 . A lthough P honogra phy provides a n exceedingly perfectm ea ns of representing a ll the s ounds used in the English la ngua ge , sotha t it m eets the requirem ents of a very exa ct phonetic a na lys is , yetit is by no m ea ns essen tia l to legibility tha t in a c tua l pra ctice thes igns of a ll those sounds should be written . The a dva nced phonographer from choice

, a nd the pra ctica l reporter from necess ity , om ita lm os t entirely the signs of the vowels a nd diphthongs , a nd a ls o a hbrevia te m a ny of the consona nt outlines .

OMISSIO N O F VOWEL S.

272. To the ca sua l observer it m ight seem tha t the om is s ion of thevowel-s igns would occa s ion grea t uncerta inty , if not a bsolute illegibility , in rea ding P honogra phy. This , however , is so fa rfrom being theca se tha t a ll experienced writers prefer unvoca lized to voca lized out

lines , a nd cons ider tha t a n extens ive insertion of the vowels is a n

a ctua l detrim ent in rea ding. The principa l ca uses of this legibilitya re these : A s the vowel-signs form no pa rt of the outline , thegenera l a ppea ra nce of a word is not cha nged by

'

theirom iss ion .

The grea t m a jority of words a re dis tinct from others in their consona nt sounds , a nd consequently ha ve different a nd dis tinct outlines .

A s the outlines of words a re pla ced, in respect to the line of

wri ting , in three pos itions , a ccord ing a s their a ccented vowels a re

of the first , second , or third pla ce, even if two or m ore wordsshould ha ppen to be wri tten with the s a m e outline , they m a y gen

era lly be distinguished by this diff erence of p os ition. In the fewca ses of words tha t conta in the sa m e consona n t-sounds , a nd tha t belong to the s a m e position ,

when necess a ry, dis tinctions a re obta ined bysom e a rbitra ry difference of position or outline , or else by voca lizing,pa rtia lly or in full , one, a nd genera lly the m ore uncom m on

, of the

conflicting words

A BB R E VIA TIO N . 75

VOWELS TO BE OMITTED.

273 When the lea rner h a s m a stered the principles of P honOgraphy thus fa r expla ined, a nd ha s becom e s om ewha t fa m ilia r with the

outlines of words , he should begin to lea ve out the signs of the

vowels , or, in other words , to write wha t is ca lled Unvoca lized P honogra phy.

"But , in order tha t his writing m a y not becom e illegible to

him by a too sudden tra ns ition itwill be found the sa fer pla n to com

m ence by om itting the vowel-Signs only in the following ca sesI. When the exis tence of the vowel is indica ted by som e pecul ia r

m ethod of writing the cons ona nt outlines , a s is the ca s e with the ita licized vowels in the words a sk 113 ] ra cy 115 ] bushy 13 0 ]a like 13 2] felly a rk 13 5] berry 13 6] coffee, gra vy,m a ny 179] into, induce 228] poet solid a ppella teII. F rom shortwords of frequent occurrence , a s in by, he, a t , it,up , say,

they, on, in, etc.III. Una ccented vowels , a s in vota ry, ca p ita l , possible , enem y, prom

inence, etc.IV. In long words , m edia l vowels , whether a ccented or not , a s in

unostenta tious , incidenta l , s ta tesm a nship , etc.

VOWEL S TO BE IN SER TED.

274. The vowel-signs m os t essentia l to legibility, a nd which thelea rner should s till con tinue fora while to ins ert, a re the followingI. A n a ccented in p reference to a n una ccented vowel ; thus , a o

II. A diphthong, whether a ccen ted or not , in preference to a sim plevowel.III. A n initia l or fina l vowel , unless it is indica ted by som e p ecu

lia rity of the consona nt outline ; thus , L_ a ttic, W.

.ergo.

IV. The sign of the diphthong I genera l ly a t the end of a word , a ndusua l ly a t the com m encem ent when it ca n be joined to the first

cons ona nt-stem ; thus , k_My, -1 idea . Ini ti a l 1, when joined,

m a ygenera llybe a bbrevi a ted, its la s t stroke Only being written,which

m a y be struck either upwa rd or downwa rd, a s is m ost convenientthus , f eyesight,

f

jj isla nd. The s tenotyp e of this s ign is i ; thedirection-oi the a ccent m a rk showing the inclina tion of the sign.

V . In words ha ving a vowel before a nd a fter a single consona ntstem ,

both should be written ,if pos sible ; but if only one ca n be

inserted , the a ccented one will genera lly a fford the best clue to theword ; thus , x or obey .

76 THE COMP LETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

WOR DS DISTIN GUISHED BY DIF F ER EN CE or OUTL IN E ,

P O SITIO N ,ETC.

275 . The genera l om iss ion of the vowel- s igns , a s we ha ve seen,renders it necessa ry to m a ke distinctions between certa in words by ar

bitra ry differences of outline, pos ition , or voca liza tion.

worm s COMMEN CIN G wrrn ‘IL ,

’ ‘m ,

“m ,

‘EN .

’

276. When nega tives are form ed by prefixing the pa rticle in topos itive words tha tb egin with l , m ,

or r, for the sa ke of euphony, thepa rticle is cha nged resp ectively to il , em , or if , so tha t the firs t consona nt of the nega ti ve becom es doubled, a s in the words illega l , im m a teria l , irregular, etc . This doubling of the firs t cons ona nt a lso occurs , ofcourse , in nega tives m a de by prefixing in or a n to p ositive words be

ginning with n, a s in innosdous , unnerve, etc . N ow , in ordina ry speech ,we frequently hea r but one of these consona nts spoken, the nega tivebeing distinguished from its corresponding positive word only by thesound of its initia l vowel. In unvoca lized P honogra phy, however,this distinction would not a ppea r , a nd therefore both consona ntsshould be written, even in thos e ca s es where only one is hea rd ; thus ,write ft lega l , illega l ,

Nm odera te

,

” W im moderate,

resolute, ifl esolute, L7 noxious ,W

U innoxi'

ous, W

necessary, V \_O / unnecessary. But if a nega tive so form ed ha ve nocorresponding pos itive in u se, only one of the consona nts should bewritten, unless both a re a ctua lly hea rd thus , innocence. The

preceding rem a rks a re a ls o a pplica ble to thos e sim ila rly form ed,though not nega tive , words .tha t begin with the prepos itiona l , or intensive pa rticle in or en ; thus , N—N t inna te, N -N r-V innerve

,N -N -Bl

ennoble, M-Mnt -L ‘ em m a ntle .

277. m orworm s m srm uursrm n BY nun-E a m on or OUTLIN E, P 0SITIO N , on vooa m zu ron.

Kst l , cost—Ks-Dl , ca usedK-Jl , cudgel—K-J—L , ca joleKsahn’

, ca usa tion—Ksshnf , a cces sion—Karm a, a ccusa tion

sT~N shn, extenua tion extens ionKlshns , collision—K—L shn’

, coa lition—K-L ahuf’, collusionKs-R ss , exercise—Ks~6R ss , exorciseKr-Frl-L , corpora l—Kr-P fl-R l , corporea lG d', G od- G -D’

, guideG rdl -N , ga rden—G r-Dnl , gua rdia nTL R tr, ta rta r—Trtr’, tra itor—Tr9-Dr, tra der

A B B R EVIA TIO N . 77

Tm , tra in —T-R n,turn

truth—Tr3,true

Tu-B , a tta ina ble—T-N -Bl , tena bleDtrl

, da ughter , doubter— B t l -R ,a uditor— B t l -R ,

a uditoryDiu‘

, debtor- Dt-R ,edi tor

Dl t—R, a dultery—Dl l-Tr, idola try—Dltr‘, idola ter

DsQ-Tn , destine—Dst-N ,destiny

Dss ’, decea s e—D3 -sZ di sea seDs s a -T, decea sed, desist—D3 -d ,

dis ea s edDl l-N s , idleness—D-L -N s , dullnessD-M—N s trshn , a dm inis tra tion—D-Mns -Tshn ,

dem onstra tionD‘-M-N shu , da m na tion—fD-M-N shu ,

condem na tion—D-Mn,dim en

s ion—Do-M-N shu , dom ina tionD’

-R shn , a dora tion—Drehn , dura tionJnt‘, gentlem a n—J l-N t

, gia n tJnt , gentlem en—J-N t

,a gent

Jnt l-L or 5L, gentlem a nly— Jnt2-L , gentle—Jnt3 -L , genteel

P trn l,pa ttern— P t l -R n

,pa tron

P shnt'l,pa tient— P shnLT,

pa ss iona teP—R —P s , purpose— Pr—P s , proposeF rl -P , property— Prl-F rt , proprietyP r-Prshn ,

a p proprra tion— Pr-P -R shn ,proportion— P r—P -B sbh , prep

a ra tionP rfl-P -R shnd

, proportioned— P r2-P -R shnfT,proportion a te

Pr‘-B shn,a pproba tion— P r2-Eshu

,proba tion— Prs -Bshn ,

prohibitionP t t-Kshn , protection— P r-Dshn ,

production—P r-D-Kshn ,predica tion

Pr-Tu,perta in— P—R —Tu , a pperta in

P rs l -Kt , prosecute— P -R s—Kt , persecuteF rl—sK

,proscribe— P rB-sK ,

prescribePrfi-SR , oppressor— P s-R -Sr

,pursuer

Pr-SE , P russ ia — P -R —SE , P ers iaPrshn’

, P rus s ia n— P fi-R -SHn ,P ersia n- P 3 -R shn , P a risia n

P ‘-R shn ,

a pportion— P Z-R shn ,portion

Prl -Ex, profi'

er—F ri‘z-R , preferPr‘-Ms , prom ise—P rl -Mis , prem iseP r2-M-N -N t, perm a nent—P rs-M-N -N t

,preem inent

P rt l -N r , pa rtner— P l -N r, pa rt- ownerEta -F

,bea utify— B l -T-F ,

bea tifyB ’

-sL t , obsolete —B 3 - sL t , a bsoluteB -R —TH, birth— Br-TH,

brea thBn l -Dnd , a ba ndoned— Bnd

-N t , a bunda ntstD, stea dy , study— sTd , sta idstJ

,sta ge—sT-J, stowa ge

THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

sP -R t, support— sP rt, sepa ra te

sTshn . situa tion—stSHn , s ta tionTHst2

, a theis t—THs a -T,theis t

THs s-K, a theistic- THs ii -T-K,

theis ticTE - sM

, a theism —Tfl s-Z-M,

theismF -Vrd , fa vored—éF -V-R t

,or F v-R t, fa vorite

F l -L , form a l-ly— F l -R l , form erlyF 3 -N r-L

,funera l— F s-N -R l , funerea ]

F s‘-Kl, phys ica l— F s 3 -K-L , fisca l

F S-R s , fierce—F s-R s , furiousF l-Wrd , forwa rd, F r-Wrd , frowa rdF r-M, a f-firm —F ‘

, formVl ‘-Bl

, va lua ble , voluble—V—L -Bl,a va ila ble

Vishu , va lua tion— V-L shn , vi ola tionVl shns

, evolution—V3 -L shn ,volition

V l-L ut,violent -V l -L u t , va lia nt

Vl-Kshn, a voca tion— Vfl-Kshn

,voca tion

N ’-Bd , nobody— N s

-Bd, a nybodyN d-Kshn ,

indica tion— N -B sbh ,induction

N -V—SHn ,innova tion— N -Vshn , inva s ion

N -Dfi -N t, indefini te— N d-F ud’,undefined

N d2-L s , endles s —N d3 -L s , needlessN -J3 -N s , ingenious— N -J2-N -S, ingenuousM-P shn 1 2D,

im pa s sioned—M-P shu l -T, im pa s siona te—M-P shntfl, im

pa tientM—B lfl, a m ia ble—M-B13

,hum ble

Ml-R shn ’,a m eliora tion—Ml-E shu’, m eliora tion

M9-N -N t

,em inent - M3 -N -N t, im m inent

Ms -S3 , Mrs .—Mss3 , m isses

M-N -TH,m onth—Mn-T3 , m inute

Ml -G rt , m igra te—MQ-G rt , em igra te—M3 -G t t, im m igra teMl -G rshn , m igra tion—MQ-G rshn , em igra tion—M’

-G rshn ,im m igra

tionMshn3 , m iss ion—M-SHns , m a chineMshn-R ”

,m iss iona ry—M-SH’

-N r, m a chineryR nd", ruined—R ’

-N d, renewedR -Prshn ,

repress ion—R -P -R shn,repa ra tion

R fl-R shu ,refra ction—R -F -Kshn, reflection

R s’-M,resum e—R ‘

-S-M, rea ssum eL s , less—éL s , elseL t‘-Td, la titude—L t l -T-D, a ltitudei -L nd', isla nd—L pd l , la ndW ’-Mn,

‘

Wom a n—W3-Mn,wom en

A BB R EVIA TIO N 79

OMISSIO N O F CO N SO N A N TS.

278. The om is s ion of consona nt-s igns from the outline of wordswill be trea ted of under the genera l hea ds of Word-Signs

”a nd “Con

tra ctions .

"

WOR D-SIGN S.

279 . It ha s been a s certa ined by ca lcula tion tha t a bout a hundreddifferent words cons titute m ore tha n one ha lf of a ll the English tha t isspoken or written tha t is , in a s erm on

,newspa per, speech , or deba te ,

in which s a y ten thous a nd words occur , full five thous a nd will bem a de up by the repetition of certa in com m on words , not exceeding a .

hundred in num ber . N ow one of the prim e neces s ities of a pra ct icable system of shortha nd, is a s im ple a nd brief m ea ns of writing thesefrequent words . Ma ny of them a re short words of but one consona nt,which

,being written by a s ingle s troke of the p en ,

do not , of cours e ,require a bbrevia tion . But a cons idera ble num ber conta in severa lconsona nts , which , if written in full , would m a ke outlines of incon

venient length therefore , a s fa ra s pos s ible, they a re contra cted, a nd

one , two,or three consona nts , a s the ca se m a y be , used to represent

the entire word . Strictly spea king ,a ll such a bbrevia tions would com e

under the genera l designa tion of “Contra ctions but, for the s a ke

of convenience , such of them a s a re written with only one stem —s ign ,

either s im ple or com pound, a re ca lled Word-Signs ," a nd the use of

the word Contra ctions ” restricted to those tha t conta in two or m ores tem s . The term Word-Sign is a lso a pplied to uncontra cted outlinesconta in ing s ingle stem s , s im ple or com pound, tha t a re wri tten out ofthe position to which their a ccented vowels would entitle them

, a s

well a s to the s igns of a fewwords tha t a rewrittenwith vowel or diphthong s igns not in connection wi th a ny consona n t- s tem . A word tha tis representedby a word-s ign is ca lled a Sign-Word.

"

§ 280 . The following is a lis t of the word-s igns a rra nged in theorder of the ta bles of consona nts a nd vowels . E a ch consona nt words ign is represented by its phonotype , a nd oppos ite it a re its s ign-words ,printed in three lines a nd united by a bra ce . The words in theupper line a re writtenwith the word- s ign pla ced in the firs t pos itionthose in the second line with it in the second pos ition ; a nd those inthe third line with it in the third pos ition . When severa l words ofthe s a m e pos ition a re represented by the s a m e sign ,

they a re suchwords a s from pra ctica l experience a re found not to conflict when so

written ,the context a lwa ys showing which is intended a nd the word

forwhich the s ign is m ost frequently em ployed is given firs t . Wh en a

word-s ign outline is used for s ign-words of only one or two pos itions,

80 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

the va ca nt pos itions a re filled by words tha t a re fully a nd properlyexpressed by the outline a nd pos ition . A s such words , however, donot com e within the definition of Sign-Words , they a re distinguishedby being printed in ita lics . In ca se no word a t a ll ca n be found to fill

a pla ce , a bla nk is left in the bra ce . A few s ign s ha ve oppos ite themwords printed with double term ina tions thus , here-a r, dif erent-ce,give

-n to intim a te tha t the corresponding s igns represent hea r a nd

here,difi

'

erent a nd def erence, give a nd given.

281. m sr orwonn-srcns .

ca n , counselcom e , 0 0 .

could , kingdombeca usecom es

, Co’

s

a ccuse

ca ll

cla imcool

cycleexcla imschool

significa ncy

significa nce

unscrew significa nt

s ignifica tion

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

82 THE COMP L ETE P HON OGR APHER .

surp rise

a dva nta ges-ousreligiousla rgelya ngel

da nger

da ngers -cue

genera l -lyreligion

genera lizegins but

,object

be

genera liza tionobjection

subject

pa rt-y, ha ppy, pa tentp la intifi

'

opportunity

subjection

poss ible belong-ing

hopesopportunitiessp yspoke, specia lspea ksp a n

subordina te d-ionspoken sa bred

sp in

insubordina te-ion

suprem e

A BB R EVIA TIO N . 83

other , either[idhr]their

,there

either[édhr]

wi thin

8110 11“form

,ha lf

wa shed, sha lt

showed

shoot

(.Q

firs t

m ea sure

m ea sured

phila nthropya s tonish-cd

-ica l -erha ve, ha lye

s evera l, Sa vior

OVCI’

( a [f]tha nk-cd

, ha thworththink

84 THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A PHE R .

a m ongst

sing-le-ula r

extinguish

[f] com m eninfluenceshonestnextinfluencedentire

, a notherna ture

M.

from , tim e , m ym em ber, hom e

a lm os t

a m used

m ultitude-p lym illion-th

hum a n

B .

or, a re [m iddle or endher of phra s es]here~a r

R

m encing phra s es]our , a re [a lone or comwere

,where

,recollect

here-a r

world

recollection

A BB R EVIA TIO N . 85

CIR CLES A ND VOWE LS .

a we

owe, oh ! 0

s elves

a h

a ye m ea ning ever']the em pha tic]a n , a nd a ye [m ea ning ycs

’

]

‘N ow

’

A ND‘N EW .

’

282. En is the only consona nt-sound of so la rge a num ber of wordstha t it becom es neces sa ry to increa se their legibility by m ak ing a som ewha t a rbitra ry distinction in the ca s e of the two words now a nd new ;

the firs t being written with the first s troke of the s ign ow joined fina llyto the stem ,

a nd the otherwith the la s t s troke of raw j oined a lso a t theend ; thug,

Mnow

,

CO N TR A CTIO N S

P R EFIXES A N D SUFF IXES.

283 . O ne of the m os t convenient m odes of a bbrevia tion is the useof contra ctions forcerta in initia l or term ina l sylla bles tha t a re of ft cquent occurrence , ca lled P R EF IXES a nd surrrxns . By this m ea ns a la rgenum ber of words m a y som etim es be a bbrevia ted without burdeningthe m em ory with m ore tha n a s ingle s ign.

P R EF IXIS .

284. The prefixes are written a s follows1. Con

,com , coo, a nd CUM—by a light dot written nea r the begin

ning of the rem a inder of the word t hus , j content com p la in,

W cognom en, cum bersom e. Usua lly, however. the dot is notem ployed except a t the com m encem ent of a pa ra gra ph , sentence , orline ; forwhen either of these prefixes is preceded by a consona nt,whether in the s a m e or the preceding word, it m a y be indica ted byproxim i ty—tha t is , by writing the rem a inder of the word nea r,and som etim es a little under

,the preceding consona n t-stem ; thus ,

V

J" inconsta nt , irreconcilia trkm , recom m end , decomp ose,

discomp ose,W \ unrecomp erwed,

v‘

fl incognito,V

s incum berw,

86 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

VN encum bered, disencuanher

, (S they comp la ined. Som etim es itis a llowa ble to ‘j oin the la tter pa rt of the word to the firs t , withoutta ld ng OK the p en ; thus , v ins tea d of hf} , for unconscious ,

l ins tea d of L for a ccom m oda tion,n “ ; instea d of for tu

com plete or in comp lete, \_pincons istent, incom iderabte or in

considera ble. But the joining of the pa rts should only be done in theca se of a word of frequent occurrence, a nd when the outline so form edis unlike tha t of a ny other word with which it m ight conflict. It m a y ,

however, be genera lly done with s a fety in words com m encing withcircu/m ; thus , circumference, Q circumflex.

2 . F O R , roa m —by F written nea r, or joined to , the rem a inder of theword ; thus , k

‘

7 foreknowledge, HM _forwa rd, forever. F or-c

in the m iddle of a word m a y a lso be written in the s a m e wa y thus ,

fl uunforeseen. But som etim es it is better to write these sylla bles

in full thus, Fr

s-Bdforbwl, F 2-R -s oresa it .

3 . MA G N A , MA G N E , MA G N I—by the s tem M written pa rtia lly overthe rem a inder of the word ; thus ,

A

W m a gna m'

m ous, m ag

4 . SELF—by the word-s ign for3e written in its proper gosition on

the line,a nd j oined to the rem a inder of the word ; thus , j selfish,

-QV” self -evident. When the rem a inder of the word begins with the

a ss-circle , it m a y be enla rged to sis to indica te the prefix thus , 0

self-s a m e. The nega tive pa rticle un m a y be prefixed to self by the inhook thus , j ' unsetfish. Con or com ,

a fter this prefix, is indica ted by

proxim ity ; thus self-com m a nd, self-conceit.

5 . WITH—by the s tem DHj oined to the rem a inder of the word thus ,

SUF FIXES.

285 . The sufiixes a re written a s follows1 . BLE or EL Y— by the s tem B j oined, when it ca n not conveniently be

written by B1 ; thus , °v \ sensible-y , p rofita ble-y . Ifneithea or

B1 ca n be joined, B m a y be used di sj oined, or the suffix om itted thus,

R s -P ns 5B or R s -P ns . resp onsible-y.

2 . B L EN ESS—by Bs deta ched thus , p rofla blenes s .

3 . EVER—by the ef-hook ; thus , Lwha tever, whichever.

4. F UL by the ef-hook ; thus , m . ca reful , joyfit l .

6. F um rcss—by F 5 deta ched ; thus , "QB " doubtfuhness .

6 . L nssm ws—by L s deta ched ; thus , f ”ca reles sness

,(fl thought

lessness .

A BB R EVIA TIO N . 87

7. IN G—by a light dot a t the end of the preceding pa rt of the word,when it ca n not conveniently be expressed by the stem N G ; thus ,p etting, m eeting. The plura l m os m a y be expressed by either a

hea vy dot or two light ones thus , A or m eetings .

8 . MEN TA L,MEN TA L ITY— by Mnt written nea r the end of the pre

ceding pa rt of theword ; thus , TA instrum enta l-ity, gs funda m enta l-ity,

9 . O L O G Y— by J j oined to, or disj oined a nd written pa rtia lly under,the preceding pa rt of the word, when it ca n not a s conveniently be

written in full ; thus , p hysiology, a strology.

10 . SEL ‘

EL by the word-s ign for self , joined to the preceding pa rtof the word thus

,

qm yself , .L. itself .

11 . SELVEs—by the word- s ign forselves , j oined to the preceding pa rtof the word thus , 6 them selves .

12 . SHIP—by the stem SHwritten nea r,or joined to , the preceding

p a rt of the word ; thus , 0 lordship , b p a rtnership .

—27 .

13 . SOEVER— by sV j oined to the preceding pa rt of the word thus ,

OMISSIO N O F SL IGHTLY EN UN CIA TED CO N SO N A N TS .

286 . The s igns of slightly or im perfectly enuncia ted consona ntsm a y genera lly be om itted from the outlines of words without im pa iring their legibil ity ; therefore , it is genera lly s a fe to om it the signs of

‘

1 . K—between the s ounds of ing a nd tee,ish, es s

,or zee thus ,

W . sa nctify, O sa nd/ion,Hf a nxiety .

A T sound - a t the end of a sylla ble im m edia tely a fter the ess

circle , when the next sylla ble begins with a s tem -s ign ; thus ,p ostp one.

3 . P— between the sounds of em a nd key , tee, ish, or ess thus,

V H p a ngdu'

a , L temp t, L5 a ssump tion, A glimp se. When it ifnecessa ry to distinguish m d from mp t, it should be written with the

full s tem —s igns thus , (A thump ed, Q1thum bed .

4 . A n S sound— a t the end of a sylla ble , when the next sylla blecom m ences with the sound of ish, or a nother es s thus m is sha p e,

fl . m is sta te.

AR BITRARY CON TR A CTIO N S.

287. The reporter frequently m a kes contra ctions by em itting fromoutlines the following s igns1. K ,

a nd som etim es G — before the sound of tee, ish, or ess , when no

vowel-sound intervenes , a nd occa s iona lly a t the end of a word ; thus .

88 THE COMP L ETE P HO N G G R A P HER .

F f a ct, b afiection,exp la in, ta ke, L n dogm a tic. 3 1117when 3

d istinct vowel-sound occurs between the consona nts , t he ha y shouldbe expressed ; thus , b va ca tion.

2 . K,or G — genera lly after ing thus , 0 angle, ba nker.

3 . P ,or B —occa s iona lly before the sound of tee, or ish thus ,

_h bap tism ,

cha p ter, omScrip ture inscrip tion.

4 . N — frequently before J thus ,5 . M— frequently before P or B thus , cha mber.

OMISSIO N O F F IN A L SYL L A B LES.

288. Mos t words ending in -ntia t- ly ,-ntia te, a nd m a ny in

-ntio n orm sion, a nd

-

grap hical-ly, m a y be a bbrevia ted by lea ving off respectively

the fina l sylla bles -tia l-ly,-tie te, -tion or -sion a nd - ica l-ly ; thus , pru

dentia l- ly, substa ntia l-arts, K app rehension, L . ) geogre

p hy-ica l-ly.

OMISSIO N O F B O OKS.

289 . It frequently ha ppens tha t a lthough in certa in com bina tionsa consona nt m a y be bes t written with a hook , it would be inconvenient , a nd perha ps im pos s ible without ta king off the p en , to represent it so when a dditiona l s igns a re j oined to the outline . In suchca ses the hook m a y be repla ced by the stem -s ign ,

or, a s is m ore ft c

quently done , the hook-consona nt entirely om itted from the outline ; thus , Ja tta in , L> a tta inm ent, a ssign , L a s signm ent , 3 tra nce

,

tra nsp ose,”

b tra nsfuse, 5 lord, ( f la ndlord. If, a fter comp leting such a n outline, the writer should

-

deem it ess en tia l to legibility, he m a y , when poss ible , go ba ck a nd m a ke the hook.

EXCEPTIO N S

290 . The foregoing rules form a king a rbitrary contra ctions shouldnever be a pplied in a word whose outline when a bbrevia ted would belike tha t of a nyother word with which it m ight conflict ; neithershould they be used unless the contra ction would be a pos itive ga in , in

point of brevity, over the com plete outline of the word thus , fa ctionshould be written in full to a void its conflicting with fa shion, a nd theoutline tTrds-Kshn is better tha n £Tr‘-Dshn for contra diction. P roperna m es should a lso genera lly bewritten in full. If, however, a properna m e occur frequently in a report

,it m a y be a bbrevia ted either in

a ccorda nce with the foregoing rules . a s Meg-K Ma tteo ; or , if it be a .

long, inconvenient outline which ca n not be shortened a ccording torule , a n a rbitra ry contra ction m ay be extem porized by the report-ir

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

90 THE COMP LETE PHON OGR AP HER .

before , Bfbega n, Grn1begin , G n3

beginner , G n-R 3begun , G m 2

belief-ve, B13belong-ing , Bl l

belonged, B ld1beneficia l , Bn3 -F -SE

benevolent-ce, B -N —Vbenigna nt , B 3 -N -G

bespea k, B a - sPbetween , Tu3

beyond , Y l

bishopric, B 3 -SH-Kbroken-hea rted

, Br-Kn—R -Td

brother, Br

brother-in-law, Br-N

'

lbut

,B 2

0 .

Ca binet, K-B 1

ca lcula ble,Kl -K-B l

Ca lvinism,R l-Vs l-M

ca n , K l

ca nonica l , K l -N u-Kca pa bility ,

K -Blt3

ca pa ble , K-B l2

ca pta in , K-P n l

ca sua l-ly , ZH1

ca tholic,K—THl

ca tholicism , K—THss‘-Mcelestia l , 513

certifica te , t a -F

cha nge , OH2cha ngea ble , GHQ-B1cha ra cter , E rl-Kcha ra cterize , Krl -Kscha ra cterized

,Erl-Kst

cha ra cterizes , Krl -Ksscha ra cteris tic

,Kr3 -Ks-K

cha rge , CHl

cha rgea ble , CHI-Bl

children , CH13Chris tia n, Kr3

Christia nity, Krlcircum s ta nce, sTnscircum s ta ntia l , sTn‘

cla im,Kl

com e,K

com eth , K"-TE

com pa ny, Co. ,K9

conform a ble , fF l-B lcons equence, s us l

consequent , i sKnt 1consequentia l , t sKn2contingency, fTa -N -J

contra distinguished , tTrdst’ N Gcould, K3

counsel , K‘

county, Knt 1covena nt , K-V

cover, Kv

Da nger, Jrda ngers -G us , Jrsda rk, Drldebenture

,D-B

Decem ber,D-sM

decla im, D-Kl

defenda nt,D

deficient-cy , D‘-F -SE

deform -ed , Dl -F

deform ity , D’-F -T

degenera te , D-J

degenera tion , D-Jshn

degree , G r3delinquent-cy, Dln’

deliver-y , D13delivera nce

,Dlns ’

dem ocra cy , D‘-Mdem ocra t

, D‘-M

dem ocra tic,D_'-M-K

dem ons tra te , Dl—Mns -Ttdem ons tra tion , D-Mns -Tshndenom ina te , D l-N

denom ina tion , D’-N

denuncia tory-ion , D-N u

describe . sKrldescription , sKrshn3

des igna te-ion , D-sG

des tructive , D9-s’

1‘rv

develope-m ent, Dvdid

,Da

didst , Dstadifference-em , D3

differences , Ds 3difficul t-y, Df3

dignity-fy-fied , D

'-Gdisa dva nta ge , De-Jdisbelieve , DsU-B ldischa rge , Ds l-OHdiscla im ,

Ds—Kl

ABB R EVIATION .

discover-y , Ds-Kvdiscovered, Ds-ddiscrepa ncy , D-sKr-Pdiscrim ina te-d , D3 -sKr-Mdiscrim ina tion , Dfl-sKr-Mdis orga niza tion, DsQ-G nsslmdis orga nize , Ds '-G nsd isorga nized , De‘-G us tdi splea s ure , D-szHd isqua lify , DST-Kwdisqua lifica tion , Ds-Kw-Kshndiss a tisfy—ed , Dss’-

'

l ‘

dis sa tisfa ction , Dss l-Tshndis sim ila r , D3 -ssMdistinguish-cd, Dst3 -N Gdis tinguisha ble, Ds t3 -N G -Bl

do, D2doctor, Dr1doctrine

,Dl-Trn

dom es tic, Di -Ms Kdown- s ta irs

, Dnstrs l

downwa rd, Dn l-Wdduring , Dr3

dwelling-house , Dw-Hsdwellingo

p la ce, Dw-P ls

E

E ccles ia s tic-a l , Kl ss -Tlem pha tic

, M-F t l

enda nger, N -Jrendea vor , N -Dv’

enla rge , N -J1

enla rged, N -Jd‘

en la rgem ent , N -Jl -Mnten thus ia s m , N -TH3 -Zs -Menthusia s tic, N -TE ‘-Zs-Kentire , N trlepiscopa l-cy, P s3 -Kepis copa lia n, P s -Kequa l , Kw3equinoctia l , Kwn l-Kequiva lent-co, v 3

especia l-ly , S-Pes ta blish , St l-Bes ta blishm ent , St l-B-Mnteva ngelica l, V-N -Jever , V2everla s ting , W-Ls texcha nge, SCH-Jexcha ngea ble, sCH-J-Blexchequer , Ks—OH2exchequer-bil l, Ks—OH-B

excla im , sKlexcla m rtion , sKlshn

excom m unica tion,Ks2 -N -Kshn

executor , sKtrexecutrix , sK-Ksextem pore-a ry , sT-Mextem pora neous , sT-Msextens ion , sTn

ext enua te , sT—N -T

extenua tion , sT-N ebn

extinguish , stN G 3extra ordina ry, sTrl-Rextra va ga nt-cc, s

’I’rv1

eye,v

fa m ilia r, F 3 -Mfa m il ia rity, F l -Mfa nta s m , F utei-Mfa vora ble-y , F v-R -B

F ebrua ry, F -B

fina ncia l , Enl -Nfirs t , F a t (or F s in phra s es)for

, F2

forever , F -V

forgive-n , F’-G

form , F l

form a lity , F ‘-L t

form a l-ly, F '-Lform a tion, F shn

’

form er , F l-Mrform erly, F l-Mx-Lform les s , F ‘-L s

forwa rd , F l-Wrdfrequent-ly, h u tsfrom , Ml

91

G a ve , Gi2genera l-ly, J

'

n

genera lize , Jusgenera liza tion , Jnsshn

gentlem a n , Jnt l

gentlem en, {Int2give-n , G 3

glory , G 1glorifica tion , G lshn

glorious -ies , G 1880 , G

‘

governm ent , G vgovernm enta l , G va t

92 THE COMP L ETE P l—IO N O G R A P HER .

governor, G -V

gra ndchild , G rnd l -OHdgra ndchildren , G rnd l-OH

H.

Ha bea s corpus , B - sKrh a d , D

‘

ha lf, F 1ha lve

,V1

ha ppy, P Iha s ,

ha th,TH‘

ha ve , VI

he , H2

hea r, R

3,or R 3

henceforth,Hns9-F

her, R 2here

,R“

,or R s

heredita m ent , Hrd9-Mntheretofore

,

“

R t'-F

h ieroglyph-ic—a l , Hr3 -Grlfhim

, H2

his , .

5.

historica l , St l -R -Klhistory , St3 -Rhom e , M2

how,H1

hum a n ,Mn

’

hunger-y , N Gr

I,

ignora nce , N rns3ignora nt , N rut3im m ea sura ble , M-ZHr—Bim m edia te-ly, M

s-Md

im perfect-ly-ion ,M-Pre

im porta nt-cc , M-Prt 1

im poss ible-ility,M-P s l

im poverish-cd-m ent , M-P vl

im pra ctica ble-ility, M-Frl

im proba ble-ility, M-Frl-B

im prove-m ent, M-P r’

ina rtificia l -ly , N rt-F ’

-SE

inauspicious -ly , N s -I’3 -SHinca pa ble , N -K-B l

incons idera te . nsDrt3inconsis tent , N es-Tnt’indefa tiga ble, N d-

‘

F t'

indefinite, N -Di

indescriba ble , N ds l -Kindifferent, N -D3

indignity a nt-a tion ,N D’ G

indiscrim ina te , N ds 3 -Kindispens a ble , N ds P ns ’individua l

,N d Vd'

indoctri ne , N D‘ Trn

infer, N -F ’

inferred, N

-F d2

inference , N -F s’

inferentia l,N -F n’

infinite, N -F ’

,or N f’

infiniteness , N -F s-N s , or N fa -N oinfinitesim a l , F -F s 3

infinitive,N—F v3

infinitude , N -F 3 -Tdinfirm N -F Q-Minfirm l ty ,

N -F Q-Mtinfluence , N s 3influenced

,N s t3

influences , N ss3influentia l , N -SHl 2inform

,N - F '

inform ed, N

-F d l

inform a l, N -F '-Linform a l ity , N -F l-L tinfringe , N -F 3 -J

infringem ent , N -F 3 -Jntinfringer, N -F 3 -Jrinha bit

, N -B t l

inhospita lity , N s—P tl-L tinquiry ,

N l -Kw

ins cribe , nsKrlinscriba ble, nsKr-Bl linscription , nsKrshn8

insignifica nt, N s 3 -G‘rinsignifica nce , N s 3 G usins titute , N s T3 -Tinsubordina te i on

, nsB idlintegi ity, N t Gintellect , N t-L t3intellectua l , N t-L tfl-Lintellectua lity , N t-L t l-L tintelligence , N t -J a s?intelligent, N t Ju tfiintelligible , N t J“Blintel ligibility, N t-Jo-B lt

intem pera nce , N -T—P rusintem pora te, N -T-F rtinter10 ga tive, N trkGinti insic-a l-ly, N trs

‘ KIowa , i—W

irrecovera bl e, R r-Kvirrefra ga ble , R r1-F r-Girregula r, R rGirreleva nt, R -L -Vnt

irreligi on , R r3 Jnir1eligious , R 1

3 -Js

irrespective , Rrs -P virrespons ible , RrI-sP ns

Ja nuary , J L Nj oint-stock, Jt l-sKj urisprudence

, Jrz-sP

j uxta pos ition , Jst—s hn

knowledge, N -Jl

L .

L a ngua ge , G w1la nguish, L l -N G -SHla rge , Jla rgely, 3 11la rger, Jrlla rges t, Jst lleg isla ture , L -J

'

length , N G—TH2lengthen ,

N G—THn’

lengthened, N G -THnd’

long , N G 1longer, N Grrl

M

Ma ga zine , M3 -G

m a gnificent , M-F 3

m a gnificence , M-F 53

m a jes ty, M-J l

m a lform a tion ,Ml—F shn

m a lig na nt—cy, Ml3—Gm a nufa ctory, M-N -F l

m anufa cturer , M-N -F ’-Rm a nuscript, Mi-N s-KMa ss a chusetts , Me—CHsm ea nwhile , M-WI3m ea sure , ZHrm ea s ured, ZHrdm echa nic-a l , M1-Knm echa nism , Mfl-K sMm em ber, M2

ABBR EVIATION .

N ever, N -V,or N v

nevertheless , N -t -Iflnext , N stnobody , N fl-Bdnondescript, N nds l-Kt

93

north , N r (com m encing phra ses ;notwithsta nding, N t-DHs t1N ovem ber, N -Vnum ber, Br

object , B 1 or B2objection, B shnfl

obliga tory , BIS-Gobserve , Bs—Robserva tion , B s -E shuoftentim es , F n l -Msofttim es , F t l -MsO hio , Hi‘om nipotent-cc

,M-N -P 3

om nipresent ce. M-N -P 1'2

om niscient—cc , M-N -SHlopinion, N n

3

opportunity, P 3orga n , 6 11 1

orga nic, G nl -Korga nism , G ns

l-Morga nize , Cains l

m em ora nda , M-M-Dl

m em ora ndum , Ml-Mm em ory. Mfl-Mm enta l-ity , Mntm ercha ndise , Mr-OHd-Zm ercha nta ble, Mr-CHt-Blm ercy, MrMessrs , Ms—R sm illion-th , M13

m isdem ea nor, Ms—D3m isfortune. Ms~F t'-Nm isrepresent-cd , Ms—R -Pm isrepresenta tion ,

Ms-R -P shnm is ta ke, Ms?-Km ista ken, Ms’-Knm ortga ge, Mrl-Gm ovem ent

, Mut’

Mr.

, Mr3

Mrs Ms—S3m ultitude-p ly , Ml

94: THE COMP LETE P HON OGR APHER .

orga nized, a d l

origina l-ly, R 3 -Jorthodox-y , R l-TH-Dostenta tious , St ‘-N t-SEother. DHr1our , R 1

over, Vrl

owes , a

P a rlia m ent a ry, Frl-Lpa rticula r, Prt3pa rt-y , P l

pa rtner,Prt l -N r

pa rt-owner , P l-N rpa ten t

,P l

p a tenta ble , P l-Blpeculia r , P 3 -Kpeculia rity ,

P l -Kpecunia ry , P 3 -E upeople

,P I3 or P 3 -P

perfect-ion , P r2

perfected, Pr‘D

perform , P rl -F

perform a nce, Prl -F sperpendicula r , Pr3 -P n-D

perpendicula rity, Prl-P n-Dperpetua l , PrQ-Pphila nthropic

, F ln l -Kphila nthropy , F ln lphonogra pher, F n-R

phonogra phic , F n-KP honogra phy , F npla intiff , P 2pla tform , P lt

l-Fplea sure , ZH2plenipotentia ry , P ing-Ppopula r-a tion

, Pl -P

poss ible , P elpoverty, P v‘pra ctica l-ly, F rl-Klpra ctice , F rlpra cticed, Prst 1pra ctices , P rs lprejudice , Pr-Jprejudiced

, Pr-Jst

prelim ina ry, Pra-L -M

Q .

Qua lity-ify , lqua lifica tion , Kw-E shuqua ntity , Kwn t ‘ques tion

,Kw2

ques tiona ble , Kw9 -Blquestioner, Kw2-R .

preroga tive , Frl-R -G

prescriptive , Pr3 -sK-P v

preserve, P r- sR

preserva tion , P r-sR shn

principa l- le , P r3privilege , P rs-Vlproba ble , F rl -Bprocla im ,

P r2-R i

procla m a tion , P rz-Klshn

productive , Pr-Dv

profit-cd , P rft

l

prophet, P rft Iprophetic

,Prft"-K

property , Frl -Pprescribe , P ro l- sK-B

proscription ,P ro l-sK-P shn

protra ctive , Frl -Trvpublic-sh -cd, P -B

publica tion , P -Bshn

publisher , P -B—SHrpunish-cd—m ent

,Pn

pure,P s-R

R .

R ecla im , R -R l

recla m a tion , R -Klshnrecollect

,R 2

recollection , R shnrecover-y, R -Kvrefer, R—Freference , R freflect, R -F -K-Treflection, R -F -Kshnreform , R l-F

reform a tion , R *-F shnrefra ct , R P -R t

refra ction , R fI-R shnregenera tion, R -Jshn

regenera tive , R—Jvregula r, R -G

religion , Jus

religious , Js 3relinquish , R l3 -N Grelucta nt, t ’

-N t

ABB R EVIATION .

rem a rk,”

B A-Mrem a rka ble, R '-M-Blrem em ber , R 2 M, or M’

rem em bra nce , R Q-Ma , orMs“rem ons tra te , B J Mns-Ttreprehensible , R

'l -P rusrepres ent, R f-Prepresented , R -P EDrepresenta tion ,

R -P shnrepres enta tive , R -P

representa tives , R -P srepublic-ish, R -P -B

republi ca tion , R -P Bshn

republ ica n , R—P—Bnrepugna nt-ce, R —P -Gresem ble, R s—Mresem bla nce , R s -Msreserve-a tion, R s-R

res igna tion , R s -G

respective-ful , R s -Pvresponsible-ity , R el-P a srestrictive, R 3 - s

'

I'

rvresurrection , R s-R shnretra c tive , -

'l‘rv

retrospective,R trs—Pv

retire R t‘-Rreturn , R t—EuR em , R —Vrevela tion , L shn’

revolution , L ebus

Sa nguine , sN G nlsa nguina ry, sN G n-R

’

s a tisfa ction , sTshnl

sa tisfy-ied-ac tory , s'l.‘l

Sa vior, sVself, o

selves , osentim en ta l ism , eN t

-Mnts Msentim enta list, sN t-MtstSeptem ber, sP t-Msevera l , sVsha ll , SH!sha lt, SHt‘should, SB?s ignifica nce , a s

'

significa ncy, a3

significa nt, a tfisignifica tion, sG shn’

signify, 36 3

s im ila r, sM3

singular-le, eN G 'society, ss

’l‘l

som ething, eM-N G

som ewha t, tspea k, sP 3spea ka ble , sP °-B1specia l, sP 2spendthrift, sP d-THrftspoke , sPspoken, sPn

s trength , sTr’-TEstrengthen , sTr

2-THns trong , s'I‘rlsubject , sBsubjected, m Dsubjection, sBshsubjective , ssubordina t e-d—ion , sBrd

‘

subscribe sB l-sKsubscripti on, sB a -sKshnsugges t , sJsugges tion , a

sugges tive , ssupereroga tion- tory, sPr-R -G

sup erficia l-ly

-ity , sPra-F -SE

superscribe , sPrl-sKsupers cription , sPr

3 -sKshnsuprem e , s li’r3surpris e , sPrs1surreptitious - ly, sR 3 -P tSwedenborg, sWd-B

Swedenborgia n , sWd l-BnSwedenborgia nism , sWdl -B -sMsym pa thy, sM-TH3

system , 551“

T.

Ta berna cle , TT-Brta citurnity, T-sTrnt

tem pera nce , T-Prnstem pera te , T-Frt

testa m ent, T-sMnttesta m en ta ry , T-sMnt-Rtha nk-cd , THI

.

tha nkful , THfltha nkfulness , TH1 : F stha nkless , THl -L stha nklessness , THI: L sthanksgiving , THs3 -Gtha t , DHlthe, or

95

96 THE CO MP L ETE P HON OGR AP HER .

them ,DH2

thenceforth , DHns -Fthenceforwa rd , DHns -F -Wrdtheology, TH‘J

theologica l, TH’-J-R I

these , Z3thing ,

N G 3

think, TH"tim e , M l

together, G dhr2took

,T3

tra nquillity , Trn3tra nquil-ly , Trl -N Gtra nscendent-a l , Trs -N d-N t

tra nscendent a lism ,Trs—N d-N ts -M

tra nscribe , Trs'-K-B

tra nscript, Trs l -K-P t

tra nscription ,TrsS-Kshn

tran sfer. firs-F rtra nsference , Trs -F stra nsform ,

Trs l -F

tra nsform a tion , Trsfl-F shntra nsgress , Trs - G s

tra nspa rent-cy , Trs-P

tra nsubsta ntia tion , Trs-B

truth,Tr2

Una ble , N -B13

uncla im ed, N -Klunder

,N"

undignified , N-D3 -G

undiscovera ble , N ds -Kvunfrequent, N -F rnt3

uniform , Yus-F

uniform ity , Yn l-F -T

unim a gina ble , N -Ju l -B

unim a gina tive , N -Jvl

un im porta nt-cc, N -M-Prtl

univers a l , Vr- sLuniversa lism ,

Vr-sL s -Munivers a l- ist , Vr- sL stuniversa lity , Vrl-sL t

universe , Vreaunivers ity, Vrs -Tunm ea sured , N -ZHrdunpopula r, N -P l-P

unquestiona ble , N ’~Kw-B

unques tioned, N Q-Kwuns a tisfa ctory, Nunusua l-ly, N -ZI13

unwilling , N l'-N O

unwillingness , N l3-N aupsta irs , P s trsusua l- ly, ZH3

Yea r , Ysyes , Ys

yet , Y

young ,Y

younger, Yryounges t, Ystyou

-r,y a

yours , Ys3yourself, Y83yourselves , Yss 3youth , TH3

youthful , TH?-lyouthfulness , TB S : Es

Wa s , Z1.

wea lth-

y , WIZ

well , Iizwere , R 2

wha t , T2when

,W2

whencesoever, Wes -Vwhenever, Wvwhensoever , W-sV

Where,R 2

whereby , R Q-B

Wherea s , R swhether , Wdhrwhich ,

0 8 3

While , W1lwhils t , Wls t lwhither, Wdhr3

'

who-m . H‘

Why , W l

will- ing. L 3

wish , SE 3

Wished , SHt3wi th , D113Within , DHn3

W ithout, W I

wonder , Dr2world . R ld

worldly, R ld-Lworth , THwould W3

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

98 THE COMP LETE P HO N O G R A I’HER .

PHR A SE O G R A PHY .

§ 298. The lea rner ha s now ha d presented to him a l l tl e s tem )gra phic m a teria l used in P honogra phy. He ha s a ls o been m a de a oqua inted with the fa ct, tha t in pra ctice the s igns of the vowels a re

seldom expres sed ; so tha t , in grea t m ea sure , they m a y herea fter beexcluded from considera tion ,

a nd his a ttention directed to the consona nts a lone. Thus fa r, however , the consona nt~signs ha ve been us edto represent the consona nt- sounds , both s ingly a nd in groups , a s theya re found in sepa ra te words only a nd it yet rem a ins , therefore, to extend their use to the repres enta tion of groups of consona nts a s they occurin phra s es , or collections of words . This m ode of writing ,

by whichthe consona nts of s evera l words a re j oined or grouped in one cha ra cter

,is ca lled P HR A SEO G R A PHY .

TWO K IN DS O F PHR A SE .

Q 299 . There a re twowa ys of form ing phra se-s igns the s irr'rp lest is tom erely j oin the phonogra phic outlines of two or m ore words togetherwithout a ltering the form tha t ea ch would ha ve if written by itself,a nd is exa ctly like joining words in wri ting ordina ry longha nd thus ,

—5 in a ny ca se. The other m ode of phra s e-writing , a nd theonly one which requires extended expla na tion , is to group together ,by m ea ns of the s tem - s igns a nd their va rious m odifica tions , the consona nts of severa l words , without reg a rd to the form of ea ch individu a lly

— a portion ,a nd som etim es a ll of the words , a s it were , los ing

their identity of outline thus , 3 by a ll their.

3 00 . The fo'llowing is a s ta tem ent of the power of the different

consona nt m odifica tions , or a tta chm ents , when us ed in phra s e-writing,

a nd in the precise order of their introduction on the preceding pa g esof this work.

CIR GLES A ND L O O P S.

‘HAS,

‘nrs ,

’

on‘us

'

A DDED BY THE res -om ens .

3 0 1. A s , ha s , is , orhis m a y be a dded both initia lly a nd fina lly,a nd a s fina lly, by the ess circle ; thus , 3 a s so is in, H who ha s or

.L it is or ha s , 3 so h-a s , b , forus .

802 . A n ess-circle word-sign is prefixed to a word com m encing withthe circle , or sufi‘ixed to one ending with it, by enla rging the ( ircleinto sis ; thus , P ha s sa id, Q }

is seen, (O fa oe us , gives us ,

‘3 a :

his is a s , or his is.

P HR A SEO G R A P HY . 99

IT,’

on‘THE

’ ADDED BY CHANGING THE CIR CLE To A SMA L L L O O P .

3 0 3 . To,it, or the m a y be a dded to a ny of the ess-circle word- s igns ,

either a t the com m encem ent or end of a phra se,or when s ta nding

a lone , a nd a lso a t the end of m os t words ending with the circle , bycha nging it to the sm a ll loop ; thus , Fa s to wha t,

O

} a s to her, a s

the m a n a s it were, 1, wha t is the,a h a s the or to, n

an is the or to

,d a s

it is , 0,is it a s

,ra ise the.

I

‘THER E

,

’

O R‘THEIH

' ADDED BY CHAN GING THE CIRCLE To A LARGE L O O P .

3 04 . Ihere, or theirm a y be a dded both initia lly a nd fina lly, in the

ca ses s ta ted in the la st section , by cha nging the circle to a la rge loop ;thus

,ha s there been, is there a ny, [3 wha t is there,

“abeca use there,

" 9 beca use there 2'

s , ( 0 wa les s there, 0 a s there,-

5 is there. It is a llowa ble forthe reporter to som etim es represent there or theirin this m a nner ,even a fter words “tha t end with the st—loop ; thus , 2? a lm ost there

,

f lest there.

3 0 5 . When it is im poss ible or inconvenient to join a Ioop to euother outline ih the ordina ry wa y , it m a y be written with the deta chedform , a nd then joined ; thus ,

"m ha s there not been,

is there

soon,fl a s there is.

THE HO OKS.

‘A L L ,

’

O R‘WILL’ ADDED BY THE EL -HO OK .

‘

9 3 06. A ll , or will m a y be a dded by the cl-hook thus , ca n a ll

by a ll , but will, rwha twill, “pr ewarrdo a ll, 0 theywill, Q fora ll

, " Q if a ll, 0 a m ong a ll.

OUR ,

’

O R‘O R

’ ADDED BY THE ER—HO OK .

3 07. A re, ca r, or orm a y be a dded by the er-hook thus , wha t a re,

by our, which a re, on or or mg , q , lcnowour 6 they a re,

L forour, v a m ong our.

WE , WER E , WOULD,’

O R‘WHAT’ ADDED BY THE WA Y-HO OK .

3 08 . We, were, would, or wha t m a y be a dded to s tra ight s tem s by

the wa y-hook ; thus ,A

“ca n we

,were we, or where were, P wha t

would or we, P a t wha t,or ought we.

‘rou ,

’

YOUR ,’

O R‘ rEA R

’ ADDED BY THE YA Y-HO OK .

3 09 . You, your, or yea r m a y be a dded to stra ight s tem s by the

100 THE COMPL ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

ga y-hook thus , ca n you

-r, by your, but you-r,

r] wha t your

or yea r.IN

' ADDED BY THE IN -HO OK.

3 10 . The preposition in m a y be written with the tn-hook ; thus ,h in som e. The outline of the word to which in is thus prefixed shoulda lwa ys be written in its proper pos ition , ins tea d O f following tha t of tn.

‘HA VE ,’ ‘

O E,’

on‘IE

’ ADDED BY THE EF -HO OK .

3 11. Ha ve, of , or if m a y be a dded by the ef -book ; thus , ca n

ha ve, l, out cf , p art of , Lwha t if , G they ha ve, a

m a y ha ve. The

ef-hook on curves should be m a de a little Wider, a s well a s longer, tha non stra ight stem s .

‘A N ,

’

OWN ,

’ ‘O N E , B EE N , O R

‘THAN ’

A DDED B Y THE EH-HO O K .

§ 3 l 2 . A nd,a n

,own

,one, or been, to a preceding a uxilia ry orp ronoun ,

a nd tha n to othera nd com pa ra tives , m a y be a dded by the en-hook thus ,you a nd

," K; tf a n

,herown, L farone, K, ha ve been, Cother

tha n, a m ore tha n. It is a llowa ble to turn a sm a ll hook forn on theinside of the ter-hook, or of the t ee-hook on curves ; thus , fl ra ther

tha n, (0 they ha ve been. A nd

, a s the tshun-hook a fter the ster-loop isseldom used, it m a y, a t the writer

’

s option ,be em ployed a ls o a s a n

en-hoqk ; thus , {QB f a ster tha n . The en-hook a fter the ter-hook a nd

ster-loop m a y be used in writing the words bittern,western

,southea stern

,efc

‘THER E

, THEIn ,

’

O R‘ OTHER' ADDED BY THE TER -HO OK , A N D BY

L EN G TIIEN IN G .

3 13 . There,their

, or other m a y be a dded to stra ight stem s by theter-hook, a nd to curves by lengthening ; thus , fi

ca n there, L _ of

their, J ;

sha ll there, should there, though there L cf their,A vwill there, on their

,

a m ong their.

‘IT,

’

on‘TO

' ADDED BY HALVING .

§ 3 14 . The, it, or to m a y be a dded by ha lving the la s t s tem of thepreceding word thus , a t the or it, from the or it

, va m ong the,

able to, 1) sa id to. The use of the ha lving a nd looping principles for

dh, a s well a s fort a nd d,is in a na logy with the pra ctice of a dding dhr

a nd tr, dr, by the tor-hook , or by lengthening , a lthough there a re

pra ctica l rea sons fornot m a king it of“

such genera l a pplica tion.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

102 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHER .

CERTAIN WO R DS DISTINGUISHED.

3 21 . It will be observed tha t som etim es two or three words a re

Wri tten with the s a m e s ign ,being dis tinguished, one from the other,

only by difference of pos ition. N ow, it is obvious tha t , in phra s ewriting ,

this m ode of dis tinction ca n be preserved with such wordsonly when they com m ence phra ses ; therefore, when the context ca nnot be relied upon to show which word wa s intended in ca s e the signis thrown out of its proper pos ition , the writer m ust m a ke a d is tinc

tion either by cha nging the form of one of the conflicting words , or byvoca lizing one of them . F orinsta nce , K a nd Knt m a y a lwa ys be us edforca n a nd ca n not,

'

evcn when , in phra ses , they a re rem oved from thefirs t pos ition ; but those outlines should be used for could a nd could

not only when they s ta nd a lone , or begin a . phra s e— in other ca s esthey should be expressed in full ; thus , write T‘ £Knt’, or T3 -Kd- N t for

it could not. Did a nd should a re dis tinguished from do a nd sha ll re

Sp ectively , in a . sim ila r m a nner . R ee should never be us ed for a re

except a lone, or com m encing a . phra se ; in other positions eris us ed.

See, when thrown out of pos ition , is voca lized to dis tinguish it from sa y.

If to is om itted before sa y, it should be voca lized, or else it m ight bem ista ken forso. The word ill should a lwa ys be written in positiona nd voca lized to distinguish it from well. Own a nd no should beeither written in pos ition or voca lized

, when necessa ry to distinguish them from know a nd a ny respectively. In phra s es (except a tthe cdm m encefncnt), cha nge a nd p a rt should be written in full tha t theym a y not be confounded with cha rge a nd qrp ofl unity. Here-w , whens ta nding a lone , should be written with er; but, in phra s es , or compound Wol‘ds

,either oror rec m a y be used , a ccording to convenien ce .

Him is written on the line , a nd go in the firs t pos ition , to a void theirbeing m is ta ken, in fa st writing . form ea nd come respectively ’

. in phra s es ,grea t ca re should be ta ken to m a ke the dis tinction clea r between the

ha y a nd‘

em , a nd the ga y a nd ha y. He is a lso written in the secondposition to dis tinguish it from who. When s tanding a lone

.or oom

m encing a phra se . else is voca lized to dis tinguish it from les s in otherpos itions it m a y be distinguis hed by being written downwa rd, lessbeing s truck upwa rd . A lso voca lize ha st in phra ses , to dis tinguishit from la st. Indwd should a l wa ys be disjoined to a void its beingm ista ken forno doubt.

EVEE’A N D HAvn

' DISTIN GUISHED.

322. Ever a s a word-sign , whether sta nding a lone or used inphra ses , should a lwa ys be written with the stem V, to dis tinguish itfrom ha ve, which , in phra s es (except a t the com m encem ent), is written

P HR A SEO G R A P H Y

. 103

with the wee-hook ; thus ,(

L do you ever,

do you ha ve. But overa s a

suflix m a y be written with the va c-hook . See 285 .

n cxs son‘I,

‘A N ,

’

A N D‘A N D.

’

323 . The words I, a , a n,or a nd m a y be j oined to the following 0 1

preceding word by a light tick, the pos ition of which is governed bytha t of the word to whi ch it is so a tta ched— a s follows1. I, a t the com m encem en t of phra ses—by a light tick inclined in

the direction of oka y, a nd written either upwa rd or downwa rd, a s ism os t convenient ; thus , I hop e,

“believe, 9\o I a m a ze, ,V

I

know,A I a m

, f? I ca n not. This s ign m a y be cons idered a s a n a b

brevia tion of the sign of the diphthong I. See 274 .

2. A ,a n

, or a nd, a t the com m encem ent of phra s es—by a light tickwritten in the direction ofp ee thus

, Ca nd then, 1 a nd wha t , a nd

m y, a nd we, {fl

a nd a s for.

3 . In the m iddle , or a t the end of phra ses , a tick inclined in eitherdirection m a y be us ed foreither of thes e words , except when a n a nd

a nd a re better written with the en-hook ; thus , if I m ay,

in a m a m oru,C

Y} worse a nd worse, in a .

M

HOOKS O N m n ous .

3 24. The sm a ll hooks , both initia l a nd fina l , m a y be a tta ched tothe tick word-signs , with their ordina ry word- significa tion, except tha tthe en-hook

, so us ed, s ta nds fornot ; thus , Iwill,

4 Ihave,‘7 Iwill ha ve,

u Iwill have no,i

tIun'

ll not, and will or a ll , a nd ha ve, a nd will

have,3a nd wr

’

ll not,“a nd are,

5a nd a re not,

N(I nd oreof .

‘A ,

'nerd ,

WHEN STA N DIN G ALONE on FOLL O WED BY cox, CO N , m e.

§ 3 25 .I should a lwa ys be written with its tick-sign ; but a , a n,

a nd and , s ta nding a lone , m a y be written with their dot-signs ; excepttha t the tick-s igns a re preferred before words tha t, fora ny purpose , a re

written in proxim ity to them thus , j I contend, l a ia nd concluded.

TICK FO R THE .

’

326. The is genera lly indica ted by ha lving or by looping ; butwhen it ca n not be so written ,

it m a y be expressed by a light horizon

ta l or p erpendicula r tick thus , Athe m ost, 1

enterthe.

JOINING orrc s WITH cm cnrs , a rc.

827. The tick-s igns m a y be joined to the circle word-signs , a nd to

10 4 THE COMPL ETE PHO N O G R A P HER .

ea ch other, a s well a s to the s tem -signs ; thus , Qa s a m , e

'

or a s I, a nd a -n, a nd the.

STENOTYP ES O F THE TICKS.

3 28. The stenotypes of the tick-signs a re a s follows a or it fora ,a n

,or a nd i or i forI— the direction of the a ccent showing the incli

na tion of the tick ; a nd é forthe; thus , ai - sP s2 a nd supp ose, Tsi -é. it is a

,

i—Ml I a m,i-Bl3 I believe, i-sP

-s I sp ea k, é

-Ms t2 the m ost, é-s

’

1‘3 the suit

,

Vt rfi-é whetherthe, OH3 -i-M which Im a y, £11 a nd a ll , ava nd ha ve, iv Iha ve,il Iwill, a -a a nd a -n, 5. e a nd the.

-IN G THE’

A N D -IN G A .

’

63 29 . In a ll ca ses where the fina l sylla ble d a y would be expres sed bythe dot

, the m a y be a dded by cha nging the dot to a perpendicula r orhorizonta l tick

,a nd a , by cha nging it to a n inclined tick written in

the direction of P or CH thus , ( I letting the, “

K"

p utting the, \J\shutting

a , N,sprea ding a . The u se of these ticks m a y a lso be extended to som e

words where fina l ing a lone is written with[

the s tem N G ,when it

m a kes a difficult or indis tinct a ngle a t its junction with the precedingpa rt of the outline thus

, p a ying, p a ying the, p a ying a

R UL ES F O R PHR A SE—WR ITIN G .

§ 3 30 . A lthough no rules O f univers a l a pplica tion for the con

struction of phra ses ca n be given , the lea rner wil l find the followingdirections of grea t use in tea ching him genera l principles , s o tha t heca n form proper phra se- s igns him s elf a s they a re needed .

GENERAL R UL E .

3 3 1 . Words tha t a re na tura lly collected into a phra s e or cla use inspea king, m a y genera lly be j oined in a phra s e-s ign in writing ; thus ,a s-well-a s ,

’

in- the firs t-pla ce ,’

ou-the-pa rt-of—the . ’

SP ECIAL R UL ES.

3 3 2. A noun or pronoun in the objective ca s e m a y be j oined tothe preceding verb or prepos ition by which it is governed ; thus ,‘ ta ke-this , ’ ‘

s a ve-them ,

’ ‘by-them ,

’

for-him ,

’ ‘ to-him .

’

If a ny

qua lifying word or words intervene , they m a y a lso be included in thephra se ; thus , ‘

a t-the-tim e ,’ ‘

ou-thc-pa rt ,’ ‘ for~m y-s a ke , ’ to-m y

own-knowledge .

’

3 3 3 . A verb m a y be j oined to its nom ina tive ; thus I-see,’ ‘he

lives , ’ ‘ the -sun-shines .

’

If the verb ha ve a ny a uxi lia ries,they ,

together with a ny intervening a dverb or a dverbs , m a y be joined to it,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

106 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

in rea ding or tra nscribing, m a y rea dily be supplied by reference to theconstruction or context.

na vs’

cum-rm ) .

§ 342. When have- occurs before alone in a phra se-sign, a nd it ca nnot ea s ily be written with the ef-hook, it m a y be om itted ; thus ,

or om'm m .

3 43 . When of occurs between two words belonging to the sa m ecla use , a nd it ca n not conveniently be written with the J-hook, it m a y

be om itted , a nd then intim a ted by writing the adj a cent words i nproxim ity ; thus , Q loss of m oney a nd som etim es by j oining

them ; thus , M words q y ta rt.

ro’

344 . A t the com m encem ent of a phra se ,to m a y genera lly be

om itted , a nd then intim a ted by writing the next word, or the t e

is com posed entirely of horizonta l or ha lf-length perpendicula r orinclined stem s , the s tem T3 should be used ; thus , L4 . to m e. Thisposition below the line m a y be denom ina ted THE F OUR TH cos soxu rr

rosrrrox, a nd num bered a s such ; thus , 7 CH‘.

3 45 . To m a y a ls o be occa s iona lly om itted from the m iddle of a

p hra s e-s ign , when, by s o doing, the writer is a ble to s ecure a n

ea sier or briefer O utl ine ; thus , t s a id to ha ve,

which a re to ha ve,

FB O II—J m '

onm'rm ) .

Q846. F rom such phra ses a s‘ from hour to hour, ’ from week to

week,’ etc . , from —to m a y be om itted a nd intim a ted by writing thesigns of the repea ted word nea r ea ch other, or, when m ore conve

nient, by j oining them ; thus , Hfrom da y to da y, from tim e to

time, R‘-R from hourto hour.

A ND’ crum b .

847. A nd m a y often be om itted from the m iddle of a phra se. a ndthe a dja cent words j oined, especia lly when they a re the sa m e wordrepea ted thug, G n-G n aga in a nd a ga in.

R EP EATED O R . SIMILAR WO R DS IN PHR A SE .

Q 848. When a word of two or m ore sylla bles is repea ted, or isfollowed by a difi

'

erent word ha ving the s a m e or a s im ila r outline, a nd

PHR A SEO G R A P HY . 107

with or withou t a com m on word intervening tha t the context willrea dily supply if it be om itted,—write the first sylla ble or s tem(whether s im ple or com pound) of the firs tword , —ornit the interveningword if there be one— a nd j oin to

,or write nea r, such firs t s tem , the

la s t word in full ; thus , Dr’ Dr-Kr da rker a nd da rker, Ert l -Brtrbrightera nd brighter, B -B trbettera nd better

,Wd l -Wdrwidera nd wider, M-M-N -TE

m onth after m onth, Va-V—b' viva ooee, N

Q-V-L us nolens oolens , T3 l -Tl tittle~

ta ttle.

PHR ASE CO N TR A CTIO N S.

3 49 . The reporter oftenfinds it conven ient to use a bbrevia tedoutlines forphra ses a s well a s forwords . The following lis t is m a inlycom posed of thos e phra se-contra ction s tha t a re not form ed in a o

corda nce with the foregoing rules . Som e of these phra ses would properly com e under the hea d of specia l phra se contra ctions ”

in the nextsection ,

but forconvenience of reference they a re a lso inserted here .

Court of A ppea ls , E rt9 -P lsA ccording to E rd l

Court of B a nkruptcy , Krt2-B -N G

Court of Cha ucer Krt9-CHs -Ra bsolutely necess a ry ,

B s - sL t-N se-R y ,

a ct of Congres s , Ktl -G rsCourt of Com m on P lea s , Krt"

a ct of P a rlia m ent, Kt l - Pr-L .

N ' P li

d 3

a cts of Congress , R ts l-G i‘scrl m ina l jurl spru euce , Kr

-Jrs -P

a cts of P a rlia m ent , Kts ‘-Pr—L D .

a nything else , N s—N G -L s

a nything les s , N 3—N G -L s Di vine B eing. DV L B

a s fa r a s you , sF rs'

-Y defenda nt s counsel , DsQ-Ka s fa ra s there is , sF rsdhrs l during the la tter pa rt of the , Drt3aa s good a s , sG ds

1 M V P“,

a s grea t a s , sG rts l (1111‘n the tlm e, Drt3 -M

a t a ll events , Tlvl -N ts Ea t a ny ra te , Tl-N rta t first , Ts t l E ight or nine . T

‘J-R -N u

a t la s t , Tl -L s t E ight or ten ,Tfl-R -Tn

a t lea s t , Tlst ‘ et cetera , T- sTr

a t len th Tln l everla s ting life , V-L s -L fg

B . F .

B a ptis t Church , E ts ‘-OH-OH'

British A m erica,Ertl -M-R -K

by the bye, Bt 1 Bby wa y of illus tra tion ,

B l-W

F ive or seven , F vl -R -evn

five or s ix , Evl -R -sKs

forever a nd ever , F g-V-V

forinsta nce , F 2- sTns0L s trshn four or five, F 2-R —F v

Ca ll for, Kl l -F G

ca ll forth , Klf 1 G entlem en of the Jury , Jnt9-JCa tholic B ishop , K-THl -B G ra nd Jury, G rd

l-Jr

Cons titution of the U. S .

,s t hn’ G rea t B rita in , G rt

Q-Brt

Ys G rea t Brita in a nd Irela nd. G rt’Lcounty court. Knt l -K Brt-R lnd

10 8

H.

He ha s som e , Hss ‘Z-Ml loly G hos t, H

’

-G

Hon . gentlem a n, N r-Jnt‘

Hon . gentlem en , N r-Jnt2

Hon . m em ber , e -MHon . sena tor, N rL sN trHouse of R epresenta tives ,Hs l-R -P s

I.

In consequence , N 3 -sKnsin effect, N ’

-F -Kin fa ct, N 3—F tin reference , N ’

-R f

in rega rd , N ’-R -G rdin response , N ’-R - sP ns

in the firs t pla ce , N t‘L F s -P s

in the la st pla ce , N t3 -L s P13in the firs t insta nce , N t‘-F s -Tns

in the la s t insta nce, N t‘-L s-Tns

JJesus Christ, Js a -KJustice of the P ea ce , Js‘l-P sJus tices of the P ea ce , Jssfi-P s

justifica tion by fa ith, JsQ-F -TH

L .

L a dies a nd gentlem en, L fi-Ds-Jnt

la s t will a nd tes ta m ent, l -L -T

sMntlea rned counsel , L rnd-Klea rned friend, L m d-F nd

lea rned gentlem a n , e -Jnt

legisla tive session, L -Jsslm

Lord a nd Sa vior Jesus Chris t, Ls ‘

V-Js-K

M

Ma rine Court, M-m -Krt

Mem ber of Congress". Mf-G rs

Mem ber of the Ba r, M9-BrMem bers of Congress , Ms-G rsMem bers of the Ba r, Ms-BrMeth

c

o

lgist Church, M-THds-OH

Methodist Epis . Church, M-THdsP s-CH-CH

N .

N ewYork , N -Y l

THE COW L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

N ew York City, N -Y'- sT

N ew York Sta te, N -Y l sTi t

n ine or ten , a -Ex-Tu

no s ir, N s 2

N or th A m erica , N r-M-R fi-KN orth Ca rolina , N r-R r

—L l-N

0 .

O bjected to, BQ-T

objection sus ta ined , B -s sTnd

O ld a nd N ew Tes ta m ent, L 2-N -TsMnt

O ld Tes ta m ent, L—TesMnton her pa rt, N l-R -P

on our pa rt, e -P

one or two, W’-N r-T

over a nd over a ga in, Vrl-V-G n

P C

P a rty of the first pa rt , P l-F s-Ppa rty of the second part, P I

sKnd-P

per a nnum , Pf -N -M

persona l esta te , Prs g-l -Tt

p la intifi‘

s couns el , P S2 KP resbyteria n Church;w -OH

R .

R ea l esta te, R P-s

'

l‘t

right or m l-R —N GR om a n Ca tholic , R ’flC

'PH“n

religious

lS.

Sa vior of the world. sVl R ldSecr

'

y of the Trea sury. s 't?-'

I‘rSecr

'

y of Sta te , sKrtf-sTtSeer’y ofWa r, sKrt9-WrSena te a nd Hous e of R epresent

a tives , sN tflHs -R -P sSena te of the United Sta tes

.

sN t‘l-Ys

six or eight, sKs" R -Ts ix or seven, sKs

’J ? sVnSouthern Sta tes , sDH’

-sTtsSouth A m erica , sM-B L KSouth Ca rolina , sKr-L l-NSuprem e Court, sPr3 KrtSuperior Court

,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

110 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R AP HER .

P UN CTUA TIO N A N D O THER MA R KS.

3 5 1. The following a re the punctua tion a nd other m a rks used inP honogra phyCom m

Snm conou

CO L O N

P ER IOD

EXCL A MA TION o o o o o o o o o o o o

IN TER R O G A TIO N

DOUBT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

HYPHEN K

P A R EN THESIS

B a a cxnrs

G EN ER A L R EMA R KS O N PUN CTUA TIO N .

THE P ER IOD.

§ 3 52 . In ra pid report ing the writer ha s no tim e to indica te them inor pa uses , but he should a lwa ys m a rk the full s tops . A s to them ode of doing this the pra ctice of reporters is va ried, som e us ing thesm a ll cross , or a m odifica tion of it like this ( >o ) others the long s igngiven a bove , which is struck downwa rd in the direction of oka y , whilem a ny use no m a rks a t a ll

,but indica te the pa uses by spa ces in their

notes . If the la tter m ode be a dopted, the spa ce fora period should bea bout three qua rters of a n inch , a nd fora colon or sem icolon , a bout athird or ha lf a n inch in length . In ca se , however , the reporter writesra ther openly, the spa ces should be correspondingly increa sed.

EXCL AMATIO N A N D IN TER R O G A TIO N P O INTS.

85 3 . The m a rks of excla m a tion a nd interroga tion should bewritten a s shown in the ta ble a bove , with the phonogra phic point a tthe bottom for if m a de in the ordina ry wa y , with the s im ple dot,they m ight be m is ta ken forphonogra phic words . Both of these s ignsshould a lso be pla ced a t the end of the cla use or sentence which theya re intended to m a rk; It is recom m ended in m os t phonogra phicworks tha t the interroga tion point be pla ced a t the com m encem entof the interroga tion but , a s it is frequently im poss ible to tell whether

A P P L AUSE

L A UGHTER

DA SH

CA R ET

INDEX

P ARAGRAP H

SECTIO N

A e m sx

DA G G ER

DOUBL E DA G G ER

P UN CTUA TIO N A N D OTHER MA R KS. 111

a spea ker, when he com m ences a sentence,is going to a sk a ques tion

or m a ke a s im ple a ffirm a tion,it is O bvious ly im pra c tica ble in reporting

to follow this rule .

P A R ENTHESIS A N D BR A CKETS.

3 5 4 . A s the difference between the m a rks of p arenthesis a nd thebra ckets is not com m only unders tood , it is proper tha t their us e

should here be expla ined. The m a rks of pa ren thes is serve toindica te tha t a n expression is inserted in the body of a sentence withwhich it ha s no connection in sense or in cons truction

,while

bra ckets a re genera lly used to s epa ra te two s ubjects , or to inclosea n expla na tion ,

note , or obs erva tion sta nding by itself. Therefore,the m a rks of pa renthesis should be u sed to indica te a s ta tem en tgiven in the words of the spea ker , but which h a s no connection insense or in cons truction with the a djoining m a tter a nd the bra ckets ,to inclose a ny expla na tion, note , or O bserva tion given in the wordsof the reporter .

DA SH.

3 552 The da sh should be m a de wa ve-like , to a void its beingm ista ken forthe stem ka y.

A CCEN T.

3 56 . A ccent m a y be shown by writing a sm a ll cross close to thevowel-sign of the a ccented sylla ble ; thus , a arrows , a rose; butgen era lly this m a rk is unnecess ary ,

a s the pos ition of the word a lm os ta lwa ys indica tes its a ccented vowel .

EMPHA SIS.

3 57. Em pha s is is m a rked a s in longha nd, by dra wing one, two,

or m ore l ines undem ea th the em pha tic word. A s ingle line under as ingle word should be m a de wa ve-l ike , to distinguish it from key.

CA P ITA L S.

§ 3 58. An initia l ca pita l m a y be m a rked by dra wing two short

pa ra l lel lines under the firs t pa rt of the word ; thus , p20 l im es news

pa per. The entire word m a ybe m a rked forca pita ls by dra wing the p a ra llel lines under the whole of it. But a s this m ode O f ca pita lizing O O

cup ies too m uch tim e to be of pra ctica l use to the reporter, he m a y,

with a dva nta ge , substitute a single line drawn under words to m a rkboth properna m es a nd em pha sis thus , A Ja m es . Such line should,however, be m a de a li ttle longer a nd hea vier tha n a ha y.

112 THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A P I-IER .

IN ITIA L S O F P R O PER N AMES, ETC.

3 59 . The initia l s of proper na m es a re best written in longha ndIf, however , phonogra phic letters a re used ins tea d , a s wi ll som etim esbe necess a ry in ra pid reporting , signs shoul d be selected to indica tethe com m on, a nd not the p honograp hic, initia ls .

O

CO N SO N A N T IN ITIA L S.

3 60 . The letter B ., a s a n initia l , m a y be ind ica ted by the phono

gra ph bee, D . by dee, F . by ef , H. by ha y, J . by ja y, K . by ka y, L . by

lee, M. by em , N . by en,P . by p ee, R . by error m e

,S . by ess , T. by tee,

V. by vee, W. by wa y, Y. by ya y ,a nd Z. by zee. The letters 01, Q.

,a nd

I . should a lwa ys be indica ted in longha nd . [See

CA UTIO N .

§ 3 6L The phonogra ph ga y, a nd not ja y, should be used fortheinitia l of such na m es a s G eorge , G erm a ny , etc . , a s well a s of G errit,G ouverneur , etc.

,forga y indica tes the true initia l G . , whileja y would

indica te J. F or a like rea son p ee, a nd not ef , should’ be us ed forthenitia l O f P hilip , P hilo, etc.

VOWEL IN ITIA L S .

3 62 . The letter A ,a s a n initia l , m a y be indica ted by a hea vy dot

on the line , E . by a hea vy dot under the line , I. by the s ign of thediphthong 1 written a bove the line , 0 . by the word - sign forowe, a nd

U. by the sign O f the diphthong Ewwritten on or below the line . The

vowel initia ls should be indica ted a ccording to the a bove directionswithout rega rd to their sounds ; thus , A . should be repres ented by a

la rge dot written on the line , whether it be the initia l of A bra ha m ,

A rthur , A l fred, or A ugus tus . The vowel initia ls m a y a lso be indica tedby writing the signs of 5 , E, I, 6 , or EW to the nom ina l cons ona nt.This m ode , however, is ha rdly pra ctica ble in swift writing.

IN ITIA LS O F TITLES .

§ 863 The initia ls of titles a re bes t written with the longha ndletters ; thus , L L .D . , MD ,

A .B ., etc.

N UMBER S ETC.

§ 864 . N um bers should genera lly be represented by the ordina ryA ra bic cha ra cters . Though in som e ins ta nces they a re not quite sobrief a s the words phonogra phica lly written , they a re som ewha t m orelegible , a nd their distinctive cha ra cter renders them conspicuous in o

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

114 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

F O R MS MO DIF IED BY MO TIO N .

3 69 . We ha ve a lrea dy seen 14) tha t the ba s is of the phonogra phic consona nt-s igns is the segm ent of a circle extending ninetydegrees , a nd a stra ight line of equa l length . These two cha ra cters— a

line of bea uty a nd a line of speed—written in va rious directions , withlight a nd sha ded stroke , a nd m odified by m ea ns of circles , loops ,hooks , etc .

,constitute the entire va riety of phonogra phic word-form s .

Cha ra cters m ore s im ple or ea s ily drawn ca n not be devis ed. B ut whentra ced a s a ccura tely a s m a y be with skillful p en ,

with the ra pidity of

speech , the origin a l geom etrica l figures a ppea r m odified, a nd filled withlife a s well a s m ea ning . P honogra phy written ,

or engra ved a s we gen

era lly see it, with a n a ttem pt a t m a them a tica l precis ion, in a ccorda ncewith the origina l geom etrica l des ign,

a ppea rs dea d,s tiff, a nd unwieldy,

beca use it is unm odified by the spirit of m otion .

Q 370 . The principa l m ovem ent in writing being forwa rd, a ll indirect or s ide m ovem ents a re m ore or less subordina ted to it. So th a ta ll perpendicula r or partia lly ba ckwa rd s trokes wil l be shorter tha nthose written forwa rd horizon ta lly or inclined ; a nd a ll words whichwould na tura lly extend fara bove or below the line of writing will bebrought m ore into linea lity by encroa ching a little on the rules of p os itiou , a nd by m a king the phonogra phs sm a ller.

371 . A ll horizonta l curves , instea d of being segm ents of a circle ,will be segm ents of a n ellipse cut through its longes t dia m eter

'

; thisform being produced by the ra pid forwa rd m otion which is of necess ity m ore reta rded nea r the beginning a nd end of the s troke tha nthrough the m iddle , while the upwa rd a nd downwa rd m ovem ents a reequa l throughout, or, ra ther , reta rded in the m iddle of the stroke consequent upon the cha nge of direction , upwa rd or downwa rd .

Q 372 . Inclined curves will be m ore or less irregula r , curving m ostnea r one end ,

a ccording to the direction of the curve thus , ef a nd (sha re lia ble to be curved m os t nea r the beginning , a nd cl a nd er, nea r theterm ina tion .

Q373 . The m odifica tion of perpendicula r curves is less a ppa rent,

but those convex to the right will be curved m ost nea r the beginning,a nd those convex to the left curved m os t a t the lower end .

374 . In the joining of s im ple signs the a ngles of junction will bem ore or less m odified a s the a ccelera tion of speed dem a nds—obtusea ngles being m a de m ore a cute by cha nging the inclina tion of inclineds tra ight lines , or by m odifying the curva ture of curves thus , thestern P , in the outlines K-P will be nea rer perpendicula r tha n whensta nding a lone

,while in T- l’ it will be nea rer horizonta l a nd N before

on P R EP AR IN G CO P Y A N D R EA DIN G P R OOF . 115

P will be m ore curved, especia lly a t its term ina tion ,tha n when it oc‘

curs before CH.

375 . A t points of junction of two cha ra cters where a hook orcircle occurs , the cha ra cters will displa y a sort of court esy to ea chother

,bending a little new a nd then from the origina l geom etrica l

creed tha t they m a y form a gra ceful a nd neighborly union ; for exa m ple

, L before Brwill be m ore curved tha n . usua l , while F before Brwill be cons idera bly s tra ighter .

376 . Sha ded curves ra rely ha ve the hea vies t portion of the sha deprecisely in the m iddle

,but m ore or less towa rd one end , a s the di

rection of the p en m os t fa vors the execution of a sha ded s troke thus ,the s tem s ZH, Z, N G ,

a nd W a re sha ded hea vies t a little before them iddle

,a nd DH, V , H,

a nd Y j us t a fter the m iddle .

377. A nd a s,by the la w of m echa n ics , increa s e of speed m us t be

a ttended with decrea se of force , a ll strokes will be written a s light a sis cons is tent with proper legibility ; a nd

,short roa ds being sooner

tra veled tha n long dis ta nces , the reporterwill n a tura lly a dopt a s s m a lla sca le of penm a nship a s legibility will s a nction .

378 . The foregoing s ta tem ent is not in conflict with the directionsconta ined in 28, for the m odifica tions ca used by m otion a re solely theeffect of speed upon outlines

,a nd they will a ppea r even when s im ple

geom etrica l a ccura cy a lone is a im ed a t by the writer.

O N P R EP A R IN G CO P Y A N D R EA DIN G P R O O F .

379 . A lthough the superintending of printing does not com ewithin the strict duties of a reporter, yet when his

.

reports a re printed,

i t not unfrequently ha ppens tha t he is ca lled upon to t a ke cha rge ofa nd correct the proofs . In such ca se the following hints on the subjectwill be of use .

P R EP A R ATIO N O F CO PY .

3 80 . In prepa ring m a nus cript forthe printer the first requis ite isto write it in a pla in a nd legible h a nd . If proper na m es a nd foreignor technica l express ions occur , ca re should be ta ken tha t they becorrectly spelled a nd clea rly written . The i

'

s should be dotted , a ndthe i’s cros sed , which in the ha s te of writing a re too li a ble to be leftim perfect. J should be distinguished from I

,pa rticula rly when they

a re us ed a s initia ls , by bringing the form er below the line . Words ors entences m ea nt to be printed in CA PITA L S should be m a rked bydrawing three lines under them ; in SMA L L CA P ITA L S, by two linesa nd in Ita l ics , by one. Should interlinea tions be m a de , or a dditions in

116 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

the m a rgin ,or on the op posite or a sepa ra te lea f, the pla ce of insertion

should be m a rked with a ca ret, with a line , if possible , lea ding fromit to

,a nd inclos ing the m a tter to be inserted ; a nd if the a dditiona l

m a tter 1s des igned a s a note forthe foot of the pa ge , tha t fa ct shoulda lso be s ta ted ; putting such or a ny other direction within a circle ,tha t it m a y be rea dily noticed . N o a bbrevia tions of words or phra s esshould be used . The punctua tion should a lso be ca refully a ttendedto . A nd

,a t the com m encem ent of a ny s en tence m ea nt to begin a

new pa ra gra ph , but not dis tinctly exhibited a s such , the m a rk (fla ppropria ted for tha t purpose , should be pla c ed ; for on no a ccountought the pa ra gra phing to be left to the com pos itor .

P R O O F - R EADIN G .

3 81 . The following a re the pn'

ncip a l m a rks used in correctingproof- sheets . When it is desired to cha nge a word to ca pita l , sm a llca pita l , or Ita lic letters , it should be underscored with three , two, orone lines , a s directed in the la s t section , a nd the words ca p s , 3m . ca p s ,

or Ita l,a s the ca s e m a y be , wri tten in the m a rgin directly oppos ite the

line in which the word occurs . If a word printed in Ita lics is to becha nged to R om a n letters , or vice versa ,

a line is dra wn under it, a ndthe a bbrevia tion R om ,

or Ita l ,a s the ca s e m a y be , written in the

m a rgin . O m itted words or letters a re m a rked for insertion by beingwritten in the m a rgin ,

a nd a ca ret pl a ced in the text where theom iss ion occurs . Bu t if the om iss ion be too long for the s ide m a rgin ,

it m a y be written a t the top or bottom of the page , or on a a reet of

pa per a tta ched to the proof,a nd connected with the ca ret by a line .

A nything m a y be struck out from the text by dra wing a line throughit , a nd writing in the m a rgin the cha ra cter dL, a ppropria tely ca lled ada le. If a nything is to go in the pla ce of the era s ed m a tter

,it should

be written in the m a rgin instea d of the dele m a rk. When a nything ha sbeen era sed , a nd it is a fterwa rd decided to reta in it a s it wa s before ,dots a re written under it, a nd the word s tcl pl a ced in the m a rgin . Whenthere is not sufficient spa ce between two words or letters , a ca ret is pla cedbenea th the pla ce where they should be sepa ra ted, a nd the sign itwritten in the m a rgin . When there is too grea t a spa ce between the lettersof a word ,

they should be connected by two curved lines , one a bove a ndthe other below, their conca ve s ides being turned towa rd the spa ce , a ndthe s a m e signs m a de in the m a rgin if twowords

’

a re to be brought nea rertogether , only the lower curve is used . When two lines a re too nea rtogether. a horizonta l ca ret is pla ced a t the end a nd between them

,

a nd the term lea d or lea ds written in the m a rgin . If the lines a re toom uch sepa ra ted , the correction is m a de in the s a m e wa y, except tha tda le lea d or lea ds is written in the m a rgin, using the peculia r s ign

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

118 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

etc. , by underscoring them a nd writing qu or qy or in the m a rgin ,a long with his sugges tion . A line like a double-length oka y should bedra wn a fter ea ch m a rgina l correction ; with the exception of the p eriod , which is pla ced within a circle , a nd the a postrophe, referencem a rks , a nd superiors

,which a re written over the s ign

SP ECIMEN O F A CO R R ECTED P R O O F -SHEET.

THE CR O WN IN G O F P ETR A R CH.

A N othing ca n be conceived m ore a ffecting ornoble tha n 0 . W4 .

tha t cerem ony . The s up er?! p a l a ces a nd p orticos by fi m ‘

which h a d rolled the ivory cha riots of Ma rius a nd a nd a‘

C a es a r h a d long m ouldered into dus t. The l a ureled

fa s ces , the golden ea gles , the shouting L egions , the ca p A a .

tives , a nd the p ictured cities were indeed W a nting to éa Jhis victorious proces s ion . The s cep tre h a d p a s s ed a wa y

4?from R om e . But she s till reta ined the m ightierinfluence

of a nM a} a nd wa s now to confer the x

{wonder rewa rd of a n intellectu a l trifim ph. To the m a n a

whoh a d extended the dom inion of hera nc ient l a ngua ge

hovh a d erected the trop h ies of p h ilos op hy

va nd

v

im a gina tion in the L ha unts of ignora nce: a nd few est,

whos e ca p tives were the he a rt s of a dm iring na tions

ench a ined by the influence of his son

g - whos e s p oil s

were the trea sures of a ncient geni

cient, a nd the in

who ha d res tored the0 a ges of hum a n civiliza tion lit

nth whichheha d des erved

owflgtoh lm theirrefinem ent,—n~om I’d .

who owed to him their lum e

AN everW a s a x Q

a tlon s o a ugus twitnes sed bywes tm ins ter orR heim s .

MA CA UL A Y .

m ow a’

fiom o/‘am zdy a nd /w a

y

O N P R EP AR IN G CO P Y A N D R EADIN G P R OOF . 119

SP ECIMEN O N O P P O SITE P A G E CO R R ECTED.

x) 3 82 . When the corrections indica ted by the m a rks in the specim enon the oppos ite pa ge a re m a de by the printer , the result will be a s

given below. The ba la nce of this pa ge wa s , in fa ct, set up from a

p roof ta ken from the pla te of the sp ecim en .

THE CR OWN IN G O F P ETR A R CH.

N O THIN G ca n be conceived m ore a ffecting or noble thantha t cerem ony. The sup erb p a la ces a nd p orticos bywhich ha d rolled the ivory cha riots of Ma rius a nd

Ca es a r ha d long m ouldered into dust. The la ureledfa sces , the golden ea gles , the shouting legions , the ca p

tives , a nd the p ictured cities were indeed wa nting tohi s victorious p roces s ion . The s cep tre ha d p a s sed a wa y

from R om e. But she still reta ined the m ightier influenceof a n intellectua l em p ire, a nd wa s now to confer the

p rouder rewa rd of a n intellectua l trium ph . To the m a n

who ha d extended the dom inion of hera ncient la ngua ge_who ha d erected the trop hies of p hilosophy a nd

im a gina tion in the ha unts of ignora nce a nd ferocity.whose ca p tives were the hea rts of a dm iring na tions ,encha ined by the influence of his s ong

—whos e sp oil swere the trea sures of a ncient genius , rescued from oh

scurity a nd deca y— the “Eterna l City” offered the justa nd glorious tribute of hergra titude. A m idst the ruinedm onum ents of a ncient

,a nd the infa nt erections of

m odern a rt, he who ha d restored the broken link be

tween the two °

a ges of hum a n civiliza tion wa s crownedwith the wrea th which he ha d des erved from the m od

em s who owed to him their refinem ent,—from the

a ncients who owed to him their fa m e. N everwa s a corona tion so a ugust witnes sed byWestm inster or R heim s .

120 THE COMP L ETE P HON OGR AP HE R .

R EP OR TIN G .

GEN ER AL R EMAR KS.

383 . The first grea t requis ite of the profes siona l reporter is speed—the a bility to follow a ra pid spea ker a nd ca tch a nd convey to pa perevery word tha t he utters . The a vera ge ra te of public spea king is a bout120 words per m inute. Som e very delibera te Spea kers do not go be

yond 80 or 90 words per m inute while others a rticula te 180 , or m ore.But there a re very few,

however slow m a y be their usua l ra te of ut

tera nce, who do not occa siona lly spea k a t the ra te of 140 or 150 wordsper m inute a nd no phonogra pher should cons ider him s elf com petentto report

,with certa inty , even a m odera te spea ker , until he ca n write

a t this ra te .

3 84 . A s to the length of tim e required to a tta in this speed, verym uch will , of course , depend on the na tura l ta lent of the writer a ndthe a m ount of tim e he is willing to devote da ily to the ta sk. The

a vera ge a m ount of tim e necess a ry to qua lify a tolera bly expert writerto follow a spea ker a t the ra te of 140 to 15 0 words per m inute , is fromten to twelve m onths , by pra cticing a n hour a da y ; or s ix m onths ,with twohours ' da ily pra ctice . It will genera lly be found a n ea sy ta s kto increa se the ra te of speed from 10 0 to 140 or 15 0 words ; but to gobeyond this , m uch la bor will be required, a nd the progress will be lessperceptible .

METHOD or P R ACTICE .

3 85 . When the lea rner h a s a dva nced to 3 68,a nd is a ble to write

with cons idera ble fa cility the outlines of the grea ter pa rt of the comm on words of the la ngua ge , he should com m ence to write from eu

other person ’

s rea ding . B efore doing this , however, the entire lis t ofword- s igns , a nd a cons idera ble num ber of the contra ctions , should bethoroughly com m itted to m em ory , a nd the principles of P hra s eogra phyca refully s tudied a nd m a s tered forit should be the a im of the writerto a tta in a s soon a s pos s ible the utm os t pra ctica ble brevity a nd perfection in his outlines , so tha t he will a fterwa rd a lwa ys use the bes tform s , even in his m ost ra pid reporting, a twhich tim e the reporter is a p tto la pse into a ny vices of style tha t he indulged him s elf inwhile lea rning . A n hour's pra ctice from dicta tion in this m a nner is m ore beneficia l tha n severa l hours ’ copying from a book . A t fi rs t the rea dershould proceed slowly, a ccom m oda ting his speed to tha t of the writer .

Speeches , serm ons , lectures , legisla tive deba tes , reports of tes tim ony,a nd the like , form excellent pra ctice forthe beginner , a nd a ccustomhim to the kind of phra seology he m a y expect when a ctua lly enga gedin reporting. When the services of a rea der ca n not be obta ined, the

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

122 THE CO MP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

3 90 . Most of the reporters in N ew York use books , m a de especia l ly fortheir use, tha t a re sim ila r in sha pe a nd s ize to the Covers .These books usua lly conta in a bout one hundred lea ves , or two hundredpa ges , a nd a re bound in stiff boa rd covers , on which a n index of theca ses reported in the book , with da te of tria l , etc.

,m a y be kept.

Q 3 91 . The reporter should a lwa ys write on a ta ble or desk whenone ca n be obta ined, which is usua lly the ca s e in the courts . The

newspa per reporter ha s , however , oftentim es to ta ke notes while sta nding or sitting in the a udience . With

'

a little pra ctice a pers on m a y

write very stea dily on his knees by pla cing under his reporting booka three-eighth of a n inch boa rd, of m a hoga ny

.

or rosewood , m ad e a bouts ixteen inches long a nd five broa d . If this boa rd he m a de in two

pieces , a nd j oined in the m iddle by m ea ns of hinges tha t ca n not befilosed without pres s ing a spring , it m a y be ca rried in the pocket.This porta ble writing-desk, a s it m a y be ca lled, gives m uch

'

sup p ort tothe m iddle of the a rm , a nd ena bles the reporter to write better a ndfa s ter tha n on the knee a lone .

3 92 . The phonogra pher should, in his pra ctice , a ccustom him s elfto the occa s iona l u se of both p en a nd pencil . F orpra ct ica l reportingthere is nothing so effective a s a gold p en ,

when a suita ble'

one ca n

be obta ined . A s a genera l rule , a pencil should be us ed when notesha ve to be ta ken upon the knee , or when s ta nding, but p en a nd ink

when a ta ble or desk is provided. A good, fine-pointed steel p en m a ybe used by the lea rner in writing his exercises , but is not very servicea ble in reporting , a s it is lia ble to corrode a nd suddenly fa il a t a tim e

when the writer ca n not s top to repla ce it with a new one.

L AW R EP O R TIN G .

3 93 . It is a n erroneous though com m on belief tha t the duties of areporter a re s im ply to ta ke down a nd furnish a tra nscript of a l l

,a nd

exa ctly wha t he hea rs , a nd tha t the m erit of a report consists in itsbeing a n exa ct record of every word uttered by the spea ker. The fa ctis tha t the exa ct words of a n a ddress a re very ra rely preserved. O f the

grea t m a j ority of even the better cla s s of our public spea kers , whethera t the ba r, on the ros trum , or in the pulpit, few a re a ble to spea k extem pora neously in such a m a nner tha t they would be willing to see averba tim report of their words in print. Their sentences m us t oftenbe rem odeled. a nd occa s iona lly the wording of entire speeches m a y bes a id to be a lm ost exclus ively the work of the reporter . F or this reason fa cility of com pos ition is a qua lifica tion of the grea tes t im porta nceto him . G ood judgm ent is a lso a bsolutely indispens a ble— indeed, itoften ha ppens tha t a poor stenogra pher , with judgm ent, m a kes a betterreporter tha n a good stenogra pher,who l a cks in tha t respect. N ow,

this

R E P O R TIN G . 123

is especia llv the ca se in la w reporting , beca us e in this , a s in a ll otherlega l m a tters , so m uch depends upon m ere form . The profess iona lla w reporter should be convers a nt with the ordina ry lega l form s a nd

express ions , pa rticula rly thos e tha t a re m et with in tria ls ; a nd , if heha ppens to he him s elf a well-rea d la wyer , it will ena ble him to m a kea ll the better reports .

§ 3 94. The proper reporting of objections , m otions , a nd rulingsrequires m ore judgm ent a nd experience tha n a ny other pa rt of theduties of the l a w reporter. If counsel would a lwa ys sta te in so m a ny

words the grounds O f their objections , little or no difficulty would beexperienced . but oftentim es a long a rgum ent is m a de

,from the whole

of which the reporter is obliged to elim ina te the gist O f the O bjection ,

a nd to put it in proper lega l phra seology . It will not do to ta ke downa nd write out jus t the words O f the counsel , forthis would frequentlyrender the report very volum inous , a nd a t the s a m e tim e subject thepa rty who orders it to m uch unnecess a ry expens e. It would therefore s eem tha t som e knowledge of the rules of evidence is a n a lm os tindispensa ble qua lifica tion of the l a w reporter . But in the a bsenceof m ore extended instruction in this respect, the following hints m a y

be found servicea ble .

3 95 . When a witness ha s been regula rly sworn , he is first exa mined by the pa rty who produces him . This is ca lled the direct exa mina tion ,

” or the exa m ina tion in chief.

”A fter tha t the other pa rty

is a t liberty to cros s—exa m ine a nd then the pa rty who firs t ca lled himm a y re-exa m ine. This is ca lled the “re-direct,

"a nd , a ccording to

s trict rule , it closes the exa m ina tion O f the witness . O n the re-exa mina tion it is perm itted to a sk him a ny ques tions necess a ry to expla inm a tters elicited from him in the cros s-exa m ina tion .

”But the re-ex

a m ina tion is not to extend to a ny new m a tter unconnected with thecros s-exa m ina tion

,a nd which m ight ha ve been inquired into on the

exa m ina tion in chief. The s trictnes s O f this rule is , however , in thediscretion of the court , frequently rela xed. F urther questions are

oftentim es a llowed to be put by the oppos ite counsel , especia lly when ,

on' the re-direct

,a ny new m a tter ha s been dra wn out. This is ca lled

the re-cros s -exa m ina tion .

3 96 . The obliga tion O f proving a ny fa ct l ies upon the pa rty whosubsta ntia lly a s s erts the a ffi rm a tive of the is sue . The a ffi rm a tiveof m os t ca ses na tura lly rests with the p l a intifl

'

,or pa rty bringing the

a ction ,a nd therefore it is tha t he proceeds first a nd gives evidence to

substa ntia te his cla im . When the pla intiff ha s finished his evidence ,he rests , a nd then som etim es defenda nt's counsel m oves to dism iss thea ction on the ground tha t even if a ll the evidence a dduced by thep la intiff were a dm itted to be true, he woul d ha ve no lega l right to

124: THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A P HL‘R .

recover . If the m otion is denied,which is genera lly the ca sewhen thereis no jury, a s judges genera lly prefer to hea r the whole of a ca se beforedeciding a ny of its m a teria l points . the defenda nt ’s counsel excepts , a ndproceeds to produce his proofs . But if the court gra nt the m otion ,

pla intiff ta kes a n excep tion , a nd the tria l ends there . F requently them otion to dis m iss is only m a de p roform a , to preserve , forthe purposesof a n a ppea l

,a ny rights tha t m a y be covered by it. In such ca se the

m otion is denied without a rgum ent , a n exception ta ken , a nd the tria lproceeds . Som etim es , before the pla intiff produces a ny evidence , dcfenda nt’s counsel m oves to dism iss the com pla int on the ground tha tit does not s ta te fa cts suffi cient to cons titute a ca use of a ction . Thisobjection , however , is genera lly ta ken by dem urrer , a nd not on thetria l .

3 97. The order of proceeding in the tria l of a ca use is genera llythe following : (1) The im p a nneling of the jury ; (2) the openingrem a rks of pla intiff '

s counsel in which he s ta tes the n a ture of his

ca se , a nd in genera l wha t he expects to prove (3 ) the exa m ina tionof pla intiff’s witnesses ea ch of which defenda nt s counsel cros s - exa mines , unl ess he wa ive the right ; (4) the opening rem a rks of defenda nt's counsel (5) the exa m ina tion of defenda nt’s witnesses ; ea ch of

which is cross -exa m ined by pla intiff'

s counsel,unless he wa ive the

right (6) the rebutting tes tim ony of pla intiff ; (7) ditto of defenda n t ;(8) the sum m ingup or a rgum ents of defenda nt

'

s counsel (9 ) ditto ofpla intiff ’

s counsel (10 ) the cha rge of the judge to the jury (11) theverdict . In som e courts tria ls a re ha d without juries a nd som etim es ,even when the pa rties ha ve a right to tria l by jury , they wa ive it a ndproceed before the judge a lone .

3 98. In ordina ry civil tria ls the reporter ha s genera lly nothingto do with the im p a nneling of the jury ; but in crim ina l tria ls this isa very im porta nt m a tter , a nd should be ca refully reported . It is

a lwa ys well to ta ke notes of the O pening rem a rks of counsel , for,a lthough they a re seldom ever required to be written out

,they

will som etim es throw light on obscure or doubtful portions of thetes tim ony, a nd ena ble the writer to a scerta in whether he ha s cor~rectly reported the la ngua ge of the ques tion or a nswer. G rea tca re should be ta ken to report every word on the exa m ina tion of wit

nesses a nd in tra nscribing, theirexa ct la ngua ge , whether gra m m a t

ica l or ungra m m a tica l , should be preserved ; a nd if a ny words a re

m ispronounced , tha t fa ct should a lso be indica ted if poss ible. By thism ea ns , on a n a ppea l , the judges will be a ble to form a better j udgm ent of the weight tha t should be a tta ched to the evidence of the

respective witnes ses in the court below, tha n if a ll were m a de , by m ea nsof corrections , to Spea k with equa l propriety . The la ngua ge of the

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

126 THE COM P L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

designa ted , va ry in different courts , a nd a ls o a ccording to the na tureof the proceeding . In ordina ry courts for the tria l of civil

"ca uses thepa rty bringing a n a ction is ca lled the P la intif ,

a nd the pa rty a ga instwhom it is brought, the Defenda nt. The a ppea ling pa rty in the N ewYork Court of A ppea ls is ca lled the A pp ella nt, a nd the other pa rty theR esp ondent. A ll pros ecutions for crim e a re brought in the na m e of

The P eop le. When a proceeding is brought in priva te interes t , butwhich m us t nevertheless be brought in the na m e of The P eople , a s ,forinsta nce , in election ca ses , a m a nda m us

,or certiora ri, the m oving

pa rty is des igna ted The P eop le on the rela tion of (or ex rel) So a nd So, giving the na m e of the pa rty forwhos e benefit the proceeding is brought ;a nd who is genera lly ca lled the R ela tor. O n a proceeding for theproba te of a will , the pa rty offering it is ca lled the P rop onent, a nd thepa rty O ppos ing the proba te , the Contes ta nt .

40 1. Th e firs t pa ge O f a report'

is genera lly used a s a . title-pa ge , onwhich a ppea rs the na m e of the court the title O f the suit the n a m eof the judge before whom it is tried , s ta ting a lso tha t it wa s beforea jury , if such be the fa ct ; the da te of the tria l ; the n a m es of thecounsel a nd forwhom they a ppea r

,a nd the index to the witnesses .

The title -pa ge is a lso a n a ppropria te pla ce forthe reporter to write ors ta m p his bus iness ca rd . A new title-pa ge should be m a de out forea ch da y’

s report . The ba ck of this sheet m a y be written on ,or not ,

a ccording to the ta s te or convenience of the writer.§ 40 2. A t . the com m encem ent of the exa m ina tion of ea ch witness

should be written in a pla in , a nd ra ther l a rger ha nd tha n usua l , hisfull na m e , com m encing it just outs ide of the m a rgin line , a nd underscori ng the whole with two lines . Then should be s ta ted forwhichpa rty he wa s ca lled— tha t the witness wa s duly sworn or a ffi rm ed

,a nd

the n a m e of the counsel conducting the direct exa m ina tion . E a chquestion and a nswer should be preceded by the initia ls Q. or A . , written ih the m a rgin nea r the line . These letters should not encroa chtoo m uch on the m a rgin , a s it is required by counsel fortheir notesa nd references . The firs t line of a ques tion or a nswer m a y be indenteda little , a s a t the com m encem ent of a pa ra gra ph . A line should be leftbla nk between the direct a nd cross -exa m ina tion , a nd the followinghea ding written on a line by itself ‘Cros s-exa m ina tion by Dett

‘

s (or

P l lf’

s ) counsel ’ —or ‘by Mr. SO a nd So,’

giving the couns el ’s na m e.If, in the course of a n exa m ina tion by one counsel , a single ques tion isinterposed by the other counsel , or by the judge , the words By P la intif

'

a Counsel (or Defenda nt'

s , a s the ca se m a y be), or B y the Court shouldbe written just a fter the initia l ‘

Q.

’

without indenta t ion,a nd in p a

rentheses . Should it be followed by one or two m ore questions bythe sa m o pa rty , the words B y the sa m e m a y be inclosed in the pa ren

R E P O R TIN G . 127

theses . If, however , a considera ble num ber of such ques tions occur,

the words B y P lfl”

s (or Deft’

s) Cl unsel or B y the Court should be writtenon a sepa ra te line

,a nd the questions then recorded in the ordina ry

wa y. When the origina l exa m ina tion is resum ed by the counselwho wa s thus interrupted

, a sim ila r form ula m a y be us ed to indica te it .

§ 40 3 . R em a rks m a de by the counsel or by the Court, such a s

obj ections , rulings , exceptions , m otions , etc.,should genera lly be

Written in the third person , a nd the entire m a tter indented a n inch orm ore from the m a rgin line . If the indented m a tter does not form a .

com plete s entence of itself, it should be inclosed in bra ckets . Whenthe words of couns el a re given in the firs t person

,they should be pre

ceded by the couns el’

s na m e , a nd then written in the s a m e m a nner a sa question or a nswer

,th a t is , without being inden ted . The na m e

need not be written in full , but m erely Mr. So a nd So, writing the Mr.j us t outs ide , a nd nea r the m a rgin line . The words P la inttf

’

s (or Defenda nt

’

s) Counsel a re som etim es used instea d. In either ca s e theyshould be underscored with a single line . R em a rks by the judgetra nscribed in the firs t person a re written in the s a m e Wa y , butshould be preceded by the words The Court, underscored .

F O RMS.

§ 404 . The following specim en form s will serve a s guides to thereporter in prepa ring reports . The perpendicula r line a t the left ofthe pa ge represents the m a rgin line of lega l-ca p pa per.

THE TITL E-P A G E— F O R M 1 .

Suprem e Court , Circuit, P a rt 1 .

A lbert H 3 0 111180 11 B efore Hon . G eo. G . B a rna rd”3 a nd a j ury .

Ja m es W . Wi lson .

N ew York , Ja nua ry 5 th , 1866.

A ppea ra nces .

F orP la intiff,Ja m es T. B ra dy , Esq .

F orDefendant,Wm . M. Eva rts , Esq .

Index.

Direct .om a s R . Jones , pa ge 2 , pa geH. Johnson

,12

,

THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

THE TITL E -P A G E—F O RM 2.

N ew York Court of A ppea ls .

Ja m es w. Wilson ,1

A ppella ntvs .

A lbert H. Johnson ,

R esponden t

Al ba ny, A pril‘

lo, 1865 .

Index .

A rgum ent of Ja m es T. B ra dy, Esq . ,pa ge 2.

Wm . M. E va rts , 5 3 .

THE rrrL E- p A en—rorm 3 .

Surroga te'

s Court,County of N ew York.

In the m a tter of the proba teof a pa per propounded a s Beforethe la st will a nd testa m ent Hon. G ideon

of Tucker ,Ja m es N . N orton ,

decea s ed.

Ja nua ry 5 th , 1866.

A ppea ra nces.F orP roponen t.

A . w. Bra dford, Esq .

A . A . R edfield, Esq.

[Index sa m e a s in N o.

F orContesta nt,

THE TITLE - P A G E— FO RM 4.

U. S. Dis trict Court,Southern Dis t. of N ew York.

The United St atesvs

186 ca sks of B ottled B efore Judge Shipm a nB wr, m a rked C. W . a j ury.

B . ,Bunge , Burba ge

8L Cc .

, Cla im a nts .

[R em a inder s a m e a s N o. L ]

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

13 0 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

Som etim es it is necess a ry to s ta te the obj ection m ore in deta il thusDeft

’

s counsel objects to the ques tion a s

incom petent forthe following rea sons [s ta terea sons] O bjection overruled ; deft

'

s counsel excepts . [A s this form conta ins bothverb a nd nom ina tive

,it should not be ih

closed in bra ckets ]9 407. Som etim es the evidence produced on the tria l consists

of written docum ents a s well a s ora l testim ony . The followingform s m a y be used when deeds or m ortga ges a re offered

P lff'

s counsel O ffers in evidence the m ortga ge in ques tion

,executed by defenda nt to

John M . Sm ith ,to secure the s u m of

da ted Ma rch 8th,1860 recorded in the office

of the R egis ter of the City a nd County of

N ew York,Ma rch 9th

, 1860 , in L iber 400of Mortga ges , pa ge 10 ; m a rked “Exhibit1 of this da te .

A lso a n a ss ignm en t O f s a id m ortga ge byJohn M. Sm ith to P IE, da ted N ov. 10 , 1861 ;m a rked Exhibit 2" of this da te .

O N TAKIN G N OTES IN L AW R EP O R TIN G .

q408. It should be the a im of the reporter,while ta king notes of a

lega l proceeding ,to s tenogra ph the m a tter in the s a m e form tha t

he wishes it to a ppea r in when tra nscribed . By so doing , especia llyin reporting objections , rulings , etc. , he will s a ve him self m uch tim ea nd trouble when he com es to the m os t la borious pa rt of his ta s k

,the

m a king of the longha nd tra nscript .

N A ME or WITN ESS, ETC.

b40 9. A t the com m encem ent of ea ch ca se its title should be fullywritten out in longha nd, a nd there a lso should a ppea r, either in longha nd or P honogra phy (a ccording to the length of tim e the reporterha s to write it), the na m e of the court , the na m e of the judge,whether or not there is a jury , the da te O f the tria l , a nd the a ppea r~a nces . A t the hea d of the exa m ina tion of ea ch witnes s his na m eshould be written in longha nd in full , a nd followed by a phonegra phic p ee or dee, to indica te whe ther he wa s ca lled by P la intifi

‘ orDefenda nt, then the outline of the word sworn" or a ffi rm ed

,

"a nd

the na m e of the exa m ining counsel , which m a y a ls o be written phonogra p hica lly .

QUESTIO N A ND A N SWER DISTIN G UISHED.

§ 410 . In notes of testim ony it is the pra ctice of m os t reporters todis tinguish the ques tion from the a nswer by com m encing ea ch line

R E P O R TIN G . 13 1

of the question a t the left of the pa ge , a nd indenting ea ch line of thea nswer a bout one third the width of the pa ge thus ,Where do you res ide

I reside in N ew York cityWhere were you on the night of the 28th of Decem ber when thisa ffa ir occurred

1 wa s a t m y house in 26th Street until a bout8 o

'clock,a nd then Iwent to the opera

A lthough this m ode of writing ques tions a nd a nswers (especia llywhen they a re short only occupying a portion of a line) ta kes upm ore pa per tha n a ny other, yet this is m ore tha n counterba la ncedby the increa s ed dis tinctness tha t is given to the notes , a nd thegrea ter ea se a nd convenience with which the reporter is en a bled torefer to pa rticula r portions of the testim ony, when ,

a s is often theca se , he is ca lled upon to do so by the counsel or the court. The m os tconvenient m a teria l to ta ke notes of tes tim ony on

, is pa per m a de intobooks , a ccording to the directions a t sections 3 89 a nd 3 90 . B ut if or

dina ry lega l or foolsca p be used instea d, it should be divided into twocolum ns by ruling a line , or by folding it so a s to m a ke a n indenta tion

,

through the m iddle of the sheets from top to bottom . The pa pershould then be filled colum n by colum n

, beginning a lwa ys with theone a t the left of the pa ge a nd

,if the reporter chooses , he m a y write

on both s ides a s he goes a long . sheet by sheet. If this is done,the

pa per should be turned over endwise a s in tra nscribing, a nd , in ca s e ap en is us ed, while he is writing the first colum n on the ba ck

,the sheet

should be pla ced so tha t it will project ha lf its width to the right ofthe pa per on which it rests , to a void blotting the la s t colum n of thefirs t s ide . When notes a re ta ken in this wa y, ea ch ca s e should befolded by itself, indorsed with the title of the ca s e

,da te

, etc . , a nd

fi led a wa y .

P A SSA G ES MA R KED F O R CO R R ECTIO N .

411. When the reporter ta kes down a ques tion or a nswer tha t hewishes to rea d over before com m encing to tra nscribe it, in order toa lterits a rra ngem ent or correct a n error, he shouldm a rk it a t the tim eby dra wing nea r it a perpendicula r line a t the left of the pa ge .

CA SES CITED.

412 . Wh en ca ses a re cited by counsel , a nd extra cts rea d fromthem

,the reporter need not a ttem pt to write them a t length . A fter

writing the title of the ca se , a nd the na m e a nd volum e of the R eportwhere it is to be found, it will be suflicient to give the com m encinga nd concluding words of ea ch period , with a long da sh between . This

132 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

will ena ble the reporter when tra nscribing to a scerta in exa ctly wha tportions of the ca se were rea d, a nd wha t om itted.

HIN TS O N TR A N SCR IBIN G .

413 . O rdina rily the report er tra nscribes his own notes into longha nd . This is the m os t wea rying pa rt of his duties , a s it O ften ta kesseven or eight hours to write out wha t wa s ta ken in shortha nd in one

hour. A n experienced reporter should be a ble to render his notesof testim ony into leg ible longha nd a t the ra te of s ixteen to twentyfolios (of one hundred words ea ch) a n hour, a nd notes of a rgum ent,speeches , etc.

, a t the ra te of ten to s ixteen folios .

414. When grea t expedition is required, notes m a y be tra nscribedby dicta ting to two ra pid longha nd copyis ts from difi

'

erent pa rts of thereport a t the sa m e tim e . In this ca s e one of the wri ters m a y com

m ence with the beginning of the report, a nd the other a t the m iddle,devia ting, however , a little to one s ide or the other , when by so doinghe is ena bled to s ta rt with a n ew wi tness . or a t the beginning of a

cross-exa m ina tion. The rea der should sit between the copyists , a nddicta te a few words , first to one a nd then to the other, keeping oneof the pla ces in his note-book with the index finger of his right ha nd,a nd the other pla ce w ith the index finger of his left ha nd. By turning the hea d a little , a s ea ch sentence is dicta ted , towa rd the write rforwhom it is intended, a ll da nger of confusion will be a voided. Thisa lso m a y be done by ca lling ea ch by na m e every tim e he is a ddress ed.

A little ingenuity a nd pra ctice will ena ble the rea der to keep bothwriters consta ntly em ployed. In this m a nner of tra nscribing , fromthirty to forty folios m a y be written out per hour ; a nd , if the copyis tsare ca reful , the m a nus cript need not a fterwa rd be rea d over

,or com

pa red with the notes .415 . A nother m ode of expediting this pa rt of the work is to die

ta te the m a tter to other phonogra phers , who then proceed to tra nscribe their notes . F orthis purpose a dva nced lea rners of P honogra phya re genera lly em ployed , a s they a re willing to do the work forthesake of the pra ctice it gives them , fora com pens a tion tha t reporterscan a fford to give . Ma nuscript prepa red in this wa y, however, shoulda lwa ys be carefully t e-read , a s errors will occa s iona lly occur.

416. There is a nother m ode of tra nscribing, by which a report ca nbe gotten out very nea rly, or quite , a s fa s t a s the original notes wereta ken ; but it ca n not be used except in prepa ring m a tter fortheprinter, a nd it is perha ps well not to resort to it even fortha t, exceptwhere a grea t a m ount of work ha s to be done in a n unusua lly lim itedspa ce of tim e . The pla n is a s follows : Ha ving s ecured the servicesof five or six ra pid longha nd writers , they a re sea ted a bout a round

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

1 34 THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A P HER .

to the office of the pa per a nd begin to tra nscribe . Som etim es ea ch one

ta kes first a short turn of five or ten m inutes , a nd then a fterwa rd along turn of fifteen to thirty m inutes . so tha t he m a y be tra nscribingwhile his co- reporters are ta king notes of the speeches . If the spea king continues to a la te hour , the reporter whose turn com es la s t is genera lly required to finish up the m eeting with a longha nd sketch , whichis bes t given in the third person . The report of a politica l m eetingwill be very m uch m ore effective a nd interesting if it ha ve a properintroduction . In this m a y be included a description of the decora tionsof the ha ll

,a s ta tem ent of the num ber a nd cha ra cter of the persons

present,a nd

,if a ny em inent persons a re a m ong them ,

their na m es . In

newspa per reporting m uch m ore la titude is a llowed forthe judgm entof the reporter tha n in reporting l a w proceedings . It is his duty tocorrect gra m m a tica l errors

,im prove the construction, to som etim es

om it objectiona ble pa ssa ges , a nd frequently to a lm os t rewrite entirespeeches . The form of introduction to a speech used a t the presen ttime by the N ew York journa ls is s im ila r to the followingThe Cha irm a n then introduced the Hon. Thom a s Jefferson , who

spoke a s follows

SP EECH O F HO N . THOMA S JEF F ER SO N .

Then follows the speech . If the spea ker wa s received with a ppla use ,tha t fa ct should , of course , be sta ted in the introduction . The in

t errup tions by the a udience duri ng the delivery O f a speech shouldbe ca refully noted , a nd written in bra ckets in their proper pla ces . The

following will serve a s illus tra tions [A ppla use ] [G rea t cheering . )[A voice , “Tha t

’

s so. The R esolutions , L ists of Vice-P res idents ,a nd som etim es entire speeches , m a y be obta ined in m a nuscript . a nd the

reporter thus relieved from m uch la bor. With these few hints , thereporter will proba bly find no difficulty in giving sa tisfa ction in thisbra nch of his profession.

A P P E N D IX .

420 . THE m a teria l from which a system of s tenogra phy m us t be

cons tructed , is necess a rily so lim ited tha t it is ha rdly pra ctica ble tofurnish one com plete a nd cons is tent representa tion for a ll the s oundshea rd in the va rious la ngua ges of the world . N evertheles s , for theuse of the s tudent of la ngua ges a nd P honetics , it is thought a d

vi s a ble to give s igns fora few of the m ore com m on foreign sounds ,both cons ona nt a nd vowel , a s well a s for those vowel-sounds in the

English l a ngua ge tha t a re not represented with exa ctness by the ordinary twelve-vowel sca le . [See 45—41 ]

EXTEN DED VOWEL -SCA L E .

SIMP L E vowm s .

4 5

a t a sk m et on los t up whole cur foot

COMP O SITE VOWELS

Em a il ; G er. long o F r. 1. 12 ; G er. 1. u

queue ; G othe vii iibel

F r. eu ; G er sh . o ; Eng ebef. r F r. sh . u ; G er. sh . u

jeune bocke ; her hutte lilcke .

COMP O SITE VOWELS F O L L OWED BY 1 .

long 0 a nd“i

1long u a nd i

a n] luit

r?short a a nd i

13 6 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

DOUBL E VOWEL S.

9 421. O n a previous pa ge there h a s a lrea dy been presented a

double-vowel s chem e , in which the short, clos e vowel‘

i is the ba s icelem ent of ea ch group. It wa s a ls o intim a ted 241) tha t a s im ila rsca le of double vowels m ight be constructed, in which the ba s ic soundwould be the other short , close vowel 66, but tha t it would be of littlepra ctica l va lue in writing English , a s m ost of the sounds a re seldomif ever hea rd in our la ngua ge Som e of them , however , a re of veryfrequent occurrence in s evera l foreign la ngua ges , a nd , therefore , it isproper tha t s igns should here be given them . The m os t convenient,una pprop ria ted s ign fordouble vowels is a sm a ll crescent-sha ped cha ra cter

,which

,being turned in four different directions , a nd m a de both

sha ded a nd light forlong a nd short vowels , a nd Written to the consona nt- s tem in three pos itions

,w ill give twenty-four dis tinct s ign s .

A nd if this schem e were cons tructed precisely on the s a m e pla n a s the

other,these signs would be used to repres ent the following twenty

four double sounds : a lt-66, d 5—5 6, é

75 -65 , (no-66, 6

-66,

0 - 0 0,u - 0 0

, 0 0- 0 0

,0 0 - 0 0 ; 66 (iii- Li

,- 12

, 65- 5 , 66- 5 , 5 5 -5 , 66-a w

,5 5 6

,

0 0 -0 , oo-u ,

0 5 -0 0,66-65 N ow, of the firs t twelve of thes e sounds , only

three,na m ely, 6- 06,

”

12 5 6, a nd 6—66, a re ever used ; a nd a s thos e ha vea lrea dy been provided with double s igns in the other s ca le , we m a y

exclude the whole twelve from a ny further repres enta tion . This ,then

,will give us twenty-four cha ra cters for the twelve rem a ining

double-sounds— two s igns forea ch ,a s shown in the following sca le

DOT-VOWEL S.

DA SH-VOWELS.

a o-aw,3 66- 0 , 56- 0 0

,0 0 > 3 < 5 66-12 66-6

422 . These signs m a y som etim es be used with a sem i- cons ona nta lva lue to represent the frequent English com bina tion of w with a . suc

ceeding vowel. Sim ple initia l to m a y be written a lso with this cha ra cter , m a de uniform ly light , a nd j oined to the next stem ; thus ,j wa sh. A nd , by a lwa ys us ing the sign with its opening upwa rdor downwa rd, when a dot-vowel intervenes , a nd opening to the rightor leftwhen it is a da sh-vowel

,the outlines would need no a ctua l voca l

iza tion to be perfectly legible ; thus , waft, Vwinter,

This sign forw should, however , be spa ringly used, it being genera llybetter to em ploy the stem wa y, except when it form s a n indis tinct

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

P HO N O G R A P HIC WR ITIN G EXE R CISES. 13 9

PHONOGBAPI—IICWRITING EXERCISES.

§ 426 . THE figures inclosed in bra ckets in these writing exercisesrefer to the preceding sections of this work . Som etim es severa lnum bers a re included in the s a m e bra cket , to a ll of which sections thelea rner should refer before proceeding to write the s igns or words th a tfollow .

EXER CISE I.

§ 427. [20] Ka y , ga y , en , ing, em ,ha y ; [21] tee , dee , cha y , ja y ,

pee,bee

,zhee

,ess , zee

,ith

, dhee, ef,vee, er , ya y, wa y ; [22] ish ,

lee,ree .

worms or O N E STEM.

428 . [3 1—44] A che , Coe, ga y, eight, toe , ode , da y, doe , a ge, a p e,p a y , ba y, show ,

they ,foe

,no

,a im ,

ha y , hoe , wa y ; [5 4, 61, 62,71] eke , oa k,

ka y, Co . , echo , coo , cow, cue , egg , a go, guy, a t , a te,

ea t , it, ought, ea t , out , tea too,two, to , tie , toy , eighty, a dd ,

a id,

a wed , odd . owed , dey, Dee, da w,dough ,

die,Dow, due , eddy, a do,

a dieu , etch , ea ch ,itch , cha w,

chew,edge , ja y , ja w, Joe , joy, Jew,

ope,up

, p a , p ea , p a w, P oe, pie , p ew, O pie , ba h ,be , bea u , by ,

hey,

how ,obey , a bbey , a sh , sha h , she, show , shoe, shy, oa th , tha w, thigh ,

thew, O tho, they ,

thee,thy, thou , if, off, oa f, F a y , fee, few, eve , of,

vie, vow ,

view,a vow

,Ann , e

’

en ,in

,on ,

na y , knee , gna w, nigh ,new

,A nna , A nnie , a nnoy , a new ,

a m,m a , m a y , m e , m a w,

m ow,m y,

m ew,m ew

,a re, a ir, ea r, ore , a rrow ,

era , E rie , a iry, a rra y, ha w,who,

high , how,hew ,

a hoy , yea , ye, ya w , you , we, Wa ugh ,woe, woo ;

[5 8] eyed, ice , icy ,eyes , ivy ,

ire ; [22 , 3 9] a -le, ell , eel , ill , a ll , la y , lee ,l a w

,low ,

is le , oil , owl , lie , lieu , oily , a lla y , a lly, Eli, a lloy , a llow, ra y ,

ra w ,roe , rue , rye.

429 . [6 1, 62] Write the hori zonta l s tem s ka y, ga y , en ,ing , em ,

ha y, in the three consona nt pos itions , a nd then write in the s a m e pos itions the perpendicula r a nd inclined s tem s tee , dee , cha y , ja y , pee , bee,ish, zhee, ess , zee, ith , dhee, ef, vee , lee , er, ree , ya y , wa y.

EXER CISE II [64—68]Jornm o or CO N SO N A N T- STEMS .

43 0 . Join the following s tem s tha t a re connected by hyphens[64] key-ka y , ga y

-

ga y , tee-tee, dee-dee , cha y-cha y , ja y-ja y, p ee-pee,

bee-bee,ree-ree ; [65] ish -ish

,ess -ess , zee

-zee,ith- ith

,dhee-dhee, ef-ef,

140 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

vee-vec,ing-ing, en-en

,em -em

,lee-lee

,ar-er, h a y

-ha y, ya y-

ya y , wa y

wa y ; [66] ef-en , ef-ing , veelen ,

vee- ing, ith-ef,ith-vee , dhee-ef, dhee

vee , lee-em ,lee-ha y, en- shee , ha y -ess ; [67] ka y—ga y , ga y

-ka y, teedee , dee-tee , cha y-ja y , ja y-cha y, pee-bee , bee-pee , vee-ka y , ef-ga y,

dee-vee, ga y

-wa y , vee-ga y , ha y-zee, dhee-ing , ya y

-ing , bee-ing ; [68]pee- ing , pee-en , en-ree

, em-pee

,ef-ka y, ith-eu

,dee-ef, tee-ef, lee-er,

lee-ess , lee-ish , lee-shee , em ~ess .

EXER CISE III.

worm s or rwo STEMS .

43 1 . [63 , 70 , 72] Ca ulk , ca ke , coke , cook ,cuckoo

,cog , keg,

ca tch , couch , ketch ,coa ch , ca ge , kedge , ca p ,

copy ,occupy, ca pe,

cope , cup , coupee , keep , kip , coop , ca b, cob , cub , cubby, cube , Cuba ,kith

,a ching , ca lm ,

com m a,com b. G a wk , ga g , gog , gig , gewga w,

gouge , ga ge , ga ng, gong , ga m e , gum , gum m y . Ta ck , a tta ck ,a ttic

,

ta lk , ta ke , tuck ,tick

,took,

t a g ,tug , outgo, a tta ch

,touch

,touchy ,

tea ch,towa ge , t a p ,

top , type , ta pe , tip , ta bby , ta boo , tub, tube , teeth ,

tooth , tithe , teethe , tongue , Tyng , Tom ,a tom , ta m e , tom e , teem ,

tom b.

Dock , dike , decoy , deck, duck, deca y , duke , dog , dug , dig, Dutch , ducky,

d itch , dodge , a da ge , Doge , deep , dip , dupe , dep6t, da b, da ub , dub,debut

,dea th

,doth

,Edith

,da ng , dong , ding . a iding , da m , dim e , da m e ,

dom e,dum b , dum m y ,

deem , dim ,doom . Cha lk,

cha lky, chock , check,choke

,chuck

,cheek

,chick

,cha p

,chop

,cha ppy , choppy , chea p , chip,

chub chubby ,etching ,

chim e,chum . Ja ck , jocky, jocco, Ja ke , j oke ,

ja g, ja ggy , jog , jig , gip , j ob , j ibe , Job, edging , ja m , jem , Jim ,Jim m y,

Ja m ie . P a ck, p eck ,

pike , pica , opa que, peck , epoch , epic, poke , P uck,pea k

,pick

,puke

, p eg , p ug , p ig , pa tch ,pouch

,poa ch ,

pea ch,pitch

,

P itChY’podge , pa ge , a pogee , P a l) , pa pa , P 0 P , poppy , PUP PY. P 0 P . pope ,

pip,peep

,pipe

,pa th

,a pa thy, pith ,

pithy , pa ng , a ping ,pa lm , pa lm y.

B a ck ,a ba ck

,ba lk , ba lky , ba ke , beck , buck , book, ba g ,

bog, boggy , beg ,

bug , buggy , big , ba tch ,botch , botchy , bea ch , bea chy , bitch ,

bij ou . bob,

ba be , ba by ,bibb , booby ,

‘

ba th , both , ba the , Booth , ba ng , bung , ba lm ,

ba lm y, bom b , boom . E thic , thick , tha tch, thong , thum b , them e .

F olk , fa g ,fog , foggy , fig , fetch , F itch , fa dge , fudge , effi gy , fop , fip ,

fob, P hebe , fib, fa ith , fa ng, fa m e , foa m , fum e . Va g ue , vogue , evoke ,vouch , a vouoh ,

vetch,vim . N a ck , knock ,

neck , nook , na g, nog ,

notch ,nitch

,inch ,

enjoy , na p , nea p , nip , na h, knob , knobby , nub,nib,

'

nea th . na m e , enem y, num b . Ma ck , Ma ckey, m ock , Mike . m ica ,m a ke

,Mecca , Mocha , m uck ,

m ucky , Ma g , m ug , m uggy , m a tch, m uch ,

m a gi , im a ge , m a p , m op , m ob, m oth , m othy, m onth , ruith , m outhe ,a im ing , m a m m a , m a im ,

m um , m um m y , Ma um ee . Ha ck , ha wk , hock ,

hook, ha g ,

hog. ha tch , hitch , hedge , ha ng, hung , ha m , hum . Yolk,

ya m . Wa lk , a woke , a wa ke , week , wick, wa g, wig, wipe , weep , web.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

142 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

boleth , Shena ndoa h ; vivifying, a venging , victim ,victory ; nickna m e,

nickna ck,unca ging , uncocked , unpa cking , infect , na viga te , a ntim ony,

nutm eg, entom bing, A nno Dom ini ; m a tchlock, Ma c A da m , em ba lming ,

em bodying , m em ento, m im icking, m onotony, A m ina da b, m a n

a ging, m unching .

WO R DS P R O N OUN CED A L IKE , A ND IIEN CE WR ITTEN THE SA ME .

§ 434 . [78] A le, a il ; a ught , ought ; a ll,a wl ; ode , owed ; da y,

dey ; doe , dough ; toe , tow ; ought, a ught ; be, bee ; is le , a isle ; roe,row ; da m ,

da m n ; yoke , yolk ; week, wea k ; wa y, weigh ; ha y, hey !high , hie ; pea k ,

pique ; ba y , bey ; bow ,bea u ; berth , birth ; bow,

bough ; key, qua y ; sea , see ; lea ,lee ; 10 ! low ; lie , lye ; m ue, m ew ;

na y, neigh ; no,know ; 0 ! Oh ! owe ; I, eye ; a y ,

a ye ; hue , hew,

Hugh ; so, sow, sew ; ewe, you , yew ; by, buy, bye ; ore , oa r, o

’er ;a ir

, ere, eyre , e’ er

,heir .

EXER CISE VI.

WO R DS or O N E STEM,WITH IN ITIA L ESS—CIR CL E .

Q43 5 . [95 , 98, 10 5] Sa ck , sock , sky, skow ,P syche , s a ke , soke , suck ,

seek, s ick , Skew. Sa g, soggy. Sa t , sought, sot , s ty , sight, s ta y, s a te ,s tow, sea t, sit , city , s ettee

,’soot , suit, s tew. Sa d

,s a wed , sod , s ide.

sowed, sewed, soda , s a id , seed, seedy , sued . Such . Sa ge , sedge , s iege .

Sa p , sop , spy, soa p, sup , s ip ,

soup,spew . Sob

, sub . South, Seth ,s ooth . Scythe , soothe . Sa fe , sofa . Sa lve , Sa voy , s a ve , Sieve . Sa ng,

song, sung, s ing . Sa wn , Sign , sown ,snow

, son , sun , sunny, seen ,sin,

soon. Sa m,ps a lm , s a m e , sum , som e , seem . Swa y.

WO R DS O F O N E STEM,WITH F IN A L ESS-CIR CL E .

43 6 . Ca ss , a x , ca use , ox , coys , cows , ca s e , a ches , oa ks , keys , kis s ,ekes , coos , a ccuse. G a s , ga uze , goss , guise , ga ze , guess , eggs , goes ,geese , goose . Toss

,ties , toys , toes , oa ts , O tis , tea s e , ea ts , its . A dz,

dies , dice , da ys , a ids , does , odes , dues , deuce , a dduce . Cha ws , choice ,chose , chess , etches , cheese , choose , chews . Ja ws , j oys , a ges , edges ,a egis , juice, Jews . A shes , shies , cha ise, shows , shoes . Tha ws , thighs .Those, thus , this . O ffice, fosse , pha s e , fa ce , efi

'

a ce,fuss , fuzz, fees ,

phiz, fuse , efi'

use. Vice , vies , voice , vows , a vows , va s e , ea ves , views .

G na ws , nice , a nnoys , ounce , nose , knok's , niece , knees , inns , noose,news . Ma s s , a lm s , m oss , m ice , m ouse , m a ize , m a ce , a m a ze

, m ess ,a im s , m uss , Miss , a m iss , m oose , m use , a m use . Hic s , hous e , ha ze,hoes , hiss . Yes , use, ewes , yews . Wise

,wa ys , woos , Weis se .

worms or O N E STEM, WITH INITIA L A N D FIN A L ESS-0 m m .

6 487. Sa cks , skies , sex, six, seeks . Sets , sta ys , sea ts , cities . Soda ,

P HO N O G R A PHIC W R ITIN G EXER CISE S.

seeds , seduce . Sa ges , sedges . Spies , spice , spouse , spa ce, suppose.Suffice , suffuse, sneeze , s ince .

EXER CISE VII.

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE F IR ST WITH A N IN ITIA L ESS-CIR CLE .

438. Sca pe , skip , s cope, s coop , sca b , sca bby , schem e , skim , scum ,

sca the , skinny , Scotch , sketch , seeking , soa king ; s igm a , Sa gina w,

sa gging sea ting , set-to, s itting , suiting ; Sodoni , s iding ; sa chem ;

spotty , speedy, speech , spike , spoke , speck, supping ; subdue, s a b

ba th , s obbing ; seething, soothing ; sa fety, sphere ; Sa va nna h , s a v

a ge, civic , s a ving ; s a nk , s ink , sunk , s inging ; sna p, snip , snipe, snub,Sunda y , sna th ,

sna tch , s inge , snowshoe , snea k , sna ke , scenic , Seneca ,s na g , snug , s inning , s igning ; Sa m bo, s im oom , Sm ith , sm ooth , sm udge,sm a sh , sm oke , sm oky, sm a ck

, seem ing , sum m ing ; swa p, sweep , swoop,swa m ,

swim , swing , swung , swa b , swig.

WO R DS O F THR EE STEMS,THE F IR ST WITH A N IN ITIA L ESS-CIR CLE .

§ 43 9 . Skipping , scoop ing , ~

schem ing , skim m ing , sca thing , sketching , skunk ; s a ta nic ; spiking, spunk , spunky, spa nk ; subpoena , subduing ; suffoca te ; seventy , seventh ; s inking ; sna ppish , sna pping,sunshiny , sna king , snea king , syna gogue ; som ebody, sym phony, sem ivowel , sm oothing, sm a cking , sm oking ; swinging , swigging, swimm ing, swa m p , swa m py.

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE L A ST WITH A F IN A L ESS-CIR CL E .

440 . Copse , coppice . Ca ipha s , Ca diz, coyness , ca utious , coa x ; goddess , ga ynes s , A gnes , a gonize ; top a z, typhus , Thom a s

,Tha m es , Tu

nis , ta x ,tongs ; depose , deba s e , defa ce , edifice , diffus e , device , devise,

a dvice , a dvise , dem ise , deduce , duds , A donis , Dennis , duchess , Dix,docks , decks ; chops , Chinese, checks ; j a cka ss , jocose , Ja bez, Ja m es ,genius , Jun ius , Ja nus , Jona s pa ppous pa poose , pum ice , pa thos , a pex ;box

,ibex

, B a cchus , bodice , a bduce ; ethics ; fox, folks , focus , fix,

a flix, finis , fides , fa m ous , P hoebus ; vex , Venice , Venus ; a nxious ;onyx , a nnex , unea se, enca s e , inca se , notice , induce , A ndes , N a tchez,infus e , invoice , novice , a nnoya nce , newnes s , a nnounce ; m a kes , m ix,

em boss , om inous , m ena ce , m inus , Minos ; ha cks , Hicks , ha gs , hogs ,hugs , hum s , highwa ys ; yokes , ya m s , Young

’

s a wa kes .

WO R DS O F THR EE STEMS, THE L A ST WITH A F IN A L ESS-CIR CL E .

441. Ca lm ness , covetous , ca ctus ; gum m iness , G a nges ; tim epiece ,ta m enes s , tidings , touchiness , techiness ; deputize , dim nes s , dum bness ,a dm ix , dog-da ys ; chea pness , Chocta ws Ja pa nese , j a undice ; picka xe,pitchiness ; book-ca se, bonnets , bounteous ; sha bbiness , sha gginess

THE CO MP L ETE P I-IO N O G R A P HER .

thickness ; fa etious , foggines s , fungus , a ffects ; venom ous ; inkiness ;infa m ous , invidious , num bness , incubus , noxious ; Mem ph is , m ightines s , m utinous , m uddiness . m a dnes s , m oodiness , m outhpiece , om ni

bus , m eekness , m inx ; ha nks , hunks ; ya nkees .

EXER CISE VIII.WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, WITH MEDIA L ESS CIR CL ES .

442. [10 8, 10 9] Ca sk , Cos s a ck ,ca ssock

,excite , exit, oxyde , a ccede,

exude , oxen , cousin , ca us ing . G a sp , goss ip , ga zette , gusset , gus ty,A ugusta , ga ssing, ga zing , gues s ing. Ta sk, tusk , ph thisic. tsego,

ta cit, outset , ta s ty , testy , outs ide , Tuesda y ,toss ing , tea s ing . Desk ,

dusk, disk , a uda city, dus ty , deceit , disobey, dis a vow ,deceive , dows ing ,

dosing, dozing, educing , a dducing, A ddison ,design ,

dozen,disown,

dizen , dism a y . A tchison , cha s ten ,chos en ,

choos ing . Joseph,Ja s on .

P a ucity , oppos ite, opa city ,pa sty , ups et, episode , p a s s a ge , pa s seth ,

pa cify , pa ss ive , pa s s ing, pa us ing, poising ,pa cing ,

pos ing , O ppos ing,a ppea sing. B a sk, B isca y , besought, besot, beset, bestow,

obesity ,beside , bus ied, beseech , bes iege , a bus ive , ba s ing , a ba s ing , buzzing ,a busing, bison ,

ba s in , boa tswa in [pronounced bos'

n] , ba ssoon , besom ,

bosom . P hysic, fa ucet , offset , fa cet , fusty , fa ca de , effus ive , fa cing,effa cing ,

fusing, fa sten ,pha sm a . Va s t-y ,

vista , vis it, vis a ge , eva s ive.N osega y , nicety ,

na s ty, hones ty ,unsought , insight, uns ea t, ins ide ,

uns a id, ensued , uns a fe , uns ing , unsung , A nson , ens ign , ins a ne,unsown , unseen . Ma sk ,

m osque , Moscow,m usk

,m usky , m us ic

,

m us ty ,m is ty, m ess a ge , m a ss ive , m iss ive , m a ss ing , a m a ss ing , a m a zing ,

m is s ing , m us ing, a m using ,m a son . Ha s ty , ha s p , his s ing . Whisk,

wa sp , wisp , Wes son .

WO R DS O F THR EE STEMS, WITH ESS-CIR CL E BETWEEN THE F IRST A N D SECO ND .

443 . Cus tom ,a ccus tom ,

cos tum e , cus tody . ecs ta sy, ca us tic , exotic,a cous tic

,exciting ,

exceeding, a cceding , exuding, Ca zenovia , cozening ;gos siping , ga sping ; ta citly, ta stily , ta sting ; despa tch ,

dispa tch,de

ceiving , dism a l,dis tich

,deciding , dis solve , dis lodge , disrobe , de

cency, designing, disowning ,duskish ; cha s tity, Ches a pea ke ; P a cific ,

pa cifying , pa stim e , a posta sy, poisoning ; bism uth ,besotting ,

bes etting , a bsolve; A bs a lom , a bsentee , bes eeching ,

bes ieging ,ba sking ;

fa s tening, physicking, fizgig ; vicinity, vicina ge ; unstea dy , inciting,

ins a nity ; m a sonic , m isjudge , Muscovy , m a s king ; husking, Hosking.

worms orTHR EE STEMS, WITII ess-om en; BETWEEN THE sucoun A N D L A Sl‘.

§ 444 Ca pa city, keeps a ke , coa xing , ca ucus ing ; ga m esom e , a gonizing ; tena city, tocsin, ta xing ; depos it, deposing ,

deba s ing ,deficit

,

diffusing, doom sda y, da m son, da m a sk , deducing, dyna s ty, density

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

146 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

m isses , m osses , Moses , m usses , m uses , a m uses , nieces , noses . nooses ,success , sexes , senses , census , suffices , suppos es , spa ces , spices . Ca p

size . colossus , ta xes , Texa s , devis es , devices , a pothes is , Anchis es , empha s is , em pha s ize.

EXER CISE x .— p 22

WO R DS O F O N E STEM, WITH THE IN ITIA L ST-LO O P .

450 . [122, 125] Sta ck, sta ke , stick, sta lk , stock , stoke , stuck,stocky , s tucco , sta g, sta te , stout , s ta tue , sta id, s teed, stea d , stowed,s tud, s tood, s teady, s titch , s ta ge, s tep, s teep , stop, s toop , sta b, s tub,s tubby, s tithy, sta fi’, stiff, s tuff, s ta ve, s tove, Steve, s ting, s tung,s tea m , s tem .

WO R DS O F O N E STEM, WITH F IN A L ST-LO O P .

45 1. Ca s t, ca sed, kissed, cos t , coa s t, a ccos t, a ccused , ga s sed, ga zed,gues t, ghost, gust, a gha st , a ugus t, A ugus t, tea s ed, test, tossed, toa s t,dosed , dozed, dus t, educed , a dduced. cha sed, chest , choused, jes t ,gis t , just, joist, joust, pa st , pa ced, posed , pes t, pa us ed , pos t, poised,a ppea sed, opposed, ba sed , bea s t, bes t , boa s t, bus t, buzzed , boost,a ba sed, a bused, a ssessed, a s sis t, a s sized , zes t , fa s t, fa ced, fea s t, fis t,foist, fused, efi

'

a ced, efi'

used , va st , vest, a va s t. nes t, noosed , hones t,noised, m a st, m a ssed, m is t , m issed, m os t, m ust, m ois t, m us ed ,a m a zed, a m a ssed, hissed, hous ed , hois t, yea s t, used , wa ste , wa is t,west, wist, Wust.

worm s orTwo arm s , THE L A ST WITH A F IN A L s'r-LO O P .

452. Copyist, chem is t ; egotis t, a gonized ; outpos t , utm os t , text,ta xed , outca s t ; deposed, deba sed, defa ced, difi

'

used, dives t, advised,devis ed, dem ised ,

detest, deduced, a djus t, diges t pa pis t, upm os t, pia nist ; a bduced, boxed ; es pous ed, thickes t : fenced , fixed, a ffixed,foxed ; vexed, evinced ; unopposed, una ppea s ed , unbia s ed, infest , enticed, noticed, induced, a nnounced, uncha s te , unjust , inca sed, enca sed,unca sed, a nnexed ; em bossed, a m ethys t, m inced , m ena ced, m ixed.

WOR DS OF ON E STEM, WITH IN ITIA L ESS-CIR CLE A ND F IN A L BI-L OO P .

458. Sea -coa st ; spiced , spa ced, supposed ; sa wdust, seduced ; sugges t ; sophist, sufi ced, sufl’used ; ps a lm is t, southea s t ; sneezed.

WO RDS EN DIN G WITH THE STER -LOO P .

464 . [123 , 125] Ca s tor, coa s ter, ta s ter, tester, toa s ter, duster,Chester, jester, juster pa s tor, pes ter, poster, boos ter, fa ster , foster ,va ste t , visitor, m a ster, m uster, wa s ter ; tea m s ter, deba ter, lobs ter,

P HO N O G R A PHIC W R ITIN G EXER CISES. 147

ga m es ter , bols ter , Munster, m ons ter, ta ps ter ; songster , sophis ter , sinis ter ; ta skm a s ter, postm a ster [p ea s-m as ter] , pa ym a s ter

,m inis ter .

‘VO R DS EN DIN G WITHTHE L A R G E CIR CL E O R L O O P,WITH A N ESS-CIR CL E A DDED.

§ 455 . [127] Exces ses , a ccesses , succes ses,recesses , a bscesses , p os

sesses ; ca s ts , cos ts , coa sts , a ccosts , ghos ts , gusts , tests , toa sts , ches ts .j es ts , posts , bea s ts , boa sts , busts , a s s ists , fa sts , fe a sts , fois ts , vests ,nests , m a s ts , m ists hoists , wa s tes ; ca sters , ta sters , testers , toa s ters ,dus ters , Chester

'

s , Jesters , pa stor'

s , pes ters , pos ters . vis itors,m a s ter ’

s ,

m usters .

EXER CISE XI .

§ 45 6 . [129 , I.] She, shy , is sue , s a sh [II .,III] A shby , A sha ntee

ocea nic , O cea nica ,ca sh , ga sh , gush , tush ,

da sh ,

‘ dish , Josh , pish , pusha pish , bush ,

fish , gna sh ,N a sh ,

m a sh ,m esh , m ush , ha sh ,

hush . [13 0]Tissue , pa sha , bushy, fishy . [13 1] In the following words , when the

s ign for sh is to be written upwa rd, it is ita licis ed . Sha ke , shock,shook

, sha g, sha ggy , shoddy , sheep , ship , sha bby, shea th ,shea the,

shea f,sha ve

,shea ve , shove , Sha wnee , shiny, sha m ,

sha m e, Shem ; Chi

ca go , Shocking , sha king , sh a nk, shopping , sha ping, sha ving ,shoving,

sha m ing , sha m m ing ,shea thing ; shyness .

457. [13 2] A lum , elm ,A la m o, A lm a

, a like , elk, O lney , Il linois ,Elihu, keel, kill , ga ll, goa l , gull , guile , ghoul , ta le , tell , til-l , ta ll , te ll,tool

,da le

,dea l , dill, dell, doll , O del , dole , dull , chill , j a il , j ill , j ole ,

a gile , p a l , pa le , pell , pea l , peel , pill, P a ul , pole , poll , pull , a ppa ll ,O pa l , ba le , ba il , B ea le , Bea ll , bill , B oole , bull , bile , boil, fa il , feel , fell ,fil l , fa ll , foa l , fool , file

,foil , fowl , foul , a foul , va le , va il , veil , vea l ,

vile, N ea l , a nnea l , N ile , nell , knoll , m a le

, m a il,m ea l , m a ll , m ill ,

m ole , m ile, m ule. [13 3] L a , la y, L ee, lea , la w, low ,10 0

, lieu , a le,eel , ill, a ll , is le , oil , owl , a is le , E li , a llow , a lloy , a lley ; s a il , s a le , s ea l,sell

,cell

, s ill, Sa ul , sole , soul , sol , soil , s la y , s la w, s low, s ly , s lough ,s lew, s a llow , Sya ll , si lly , Sylla , Sela h, sully ; la ss , la ce , less , lea se ,lees , la ws , loss , lose , loose , lies , lice , louse ; a ils , ells , eels , ills , a is les ,a la s

,A lice

,a lleys , a llies , a lla ys , Ellis s a ucily [sis - lee] , Sicily .

§ 45 8. [13 3—II. , IV.] L a ck, la ckey a la ck , look, like , a like,la ke

,

elk,luck

,lucky , L ucca , lea k, lea ky, lick, L uke , look , la g ,

log , logy,lug, leg , lea gue , la tch ,

leech,lodge , E lij a h , ledge , a llege , elegy ,

liege,l a p , A lp , lop , elope , lea p , lip , loop , a libi, lobby , Elba , elbow , lobe ,la sh , la th ,

la thy ,lithe

,loa th ,

L ethe,la the, loa the , a lthough , la ugh ,

a lpha , life , elf, loa f, luff, lea f, lea fy, a loof, la va , A lva , live , a live,olive

,lave , levy , love , leave , levee , L evi, live , L ivy ,

a iling , lung,O olong , la m b , lla m a , lim e , la m e , loa m , loa m y , loom ,

L ehigh , a lwa y,a lwa ys , lea -wa y . Com m ence the words la m p , lum p, lum py, lim p,lim bo, etc .

,with the downwa rd l .

148 THE COMP L ETE P IIO N’

O G R A PHE R .

459 . [13 3 , III ] Ca llow , ga lley , ga ily , gully , ta lly , ta llow , outl a y,outla w,

outlie,da ily, dolly, oddly, da ily , Da ly , dela y , dihy , duly,

Chili , chilly, July, j olly, j elly, Julie , P olly, A pollo , P a ley, upla y,pulley , ba llet, belie , by

-l a w,B a iley ,

bela y , bellow , belly , below,

billow,bully , B eula h , sha llow ,

Shiloh ,shily, Shelly , shoa ly , Shee

l a h , shilly, sha lly , O thello , follow , felly , fellow, va lley , volley,villa , N elly, Molly , Milo , Em ily, m ellow,

m ea ly , L ila h , lowly, lily ,ra lly , R olla , R a leigh , R iley, ruly , ha llow,

hollow, holly, ha lo , hilly,wa llow

,wa yla y , willow,

woolly .

§ 460 . [l 3 4] Ca leb , ca liph ,ca la sh , colic , ca l ico , collea gue , ga l

lop, G a lena , G a llic , ga lling , outlea p , tulip , outlive , ita lic , toiling,

delve , dilem m a,deluge , chilling ,

j a la p , pa ling , pulp , pelf, pilla ge,a pology, polish , P olish , P ollock, epilogue , peeling, a ppea ling ,

a p

pa lling ,piling , polling ,

pulling ,bulb

,ba iliff , Bellevue , B a a l a m , belch,

bilge , bulge , bilk, a bolish , bulk ,bulky , sha llop , Shelby ,

P hilip , fi lm ,

filth , filthy ,filch ,

vilify, vellum ,m ollify, Ma lta , m ilch ,

m ilea ge ,m ilk

,m ilky, Moloch , A m a lek

,Ma la cca , Ma la ga , lulla by , lila c , Ha l

leck, hillock , hulk .

EXER CISE XII 37

6461 . [13 5 , I ] A rm , a rm y, A ra m ,a rom a

,Eric , a rk , a rc , ergo, a rgue ,

orb , O reb , herb , A ra b , A ra by , Irish , a iring, a re , a ir, a iry, ea r, era ,Erie

,

or , ire , Ira , a wry , a rra y , err , oa r, a rrow ,Iris

,a ris e

,era s e

,a ros e , A ries ,

a rouse , a rrest .

§ 462 . Corps , our, gea r , gore , t a r, tour , tower , tire , a t

tire , ta re , tea r , tore , da re , door, a dore , cha r, cha ir , chore , ja r, a j a r ,gia our , gyre , p a r, pa re , pea r , pa ir, peer, pier , pyre , pore , purr, poor,ba r, ba re , bea r, beer, bier , bore , boa r, boor , Burr , sheer , fa ir, fa re ,fea r , veer , lia r , lower , leer, lore , s ire , sour, soa r, sore , sir, s ewer, s ta r,s tore , stir , s teer, Ca es a r .

463 . [13 5 , III.] R a m ,rea m

, rim ,rhym e , A ra m , R om e , rum ,

room , room y ,rheum .

464 . [13 6, L ] R a ck, rock , ra ke , wreck , rook ,wrea k

, ri ck , ra g ,

rogue , ra p , ra pe , rea p, rip , ripe , rob , rib , rope , robe , rub,ra sh ,

rush,rouge, wrong , wrung , ring, ra ng ,

ra c e,ra i se , rice , ris e , rose , rouse , ruse ,

ruby, rupee , ruddy.

§ 465 . [13 6, II.] Ca rry , curry, Ca rey, Cora , G ea ry , G erry, gory,ta rry, tory, terra , tyro , Da rrow , dowry, da iry, Derry , cha ry ,

cherry ,cheery, Jerry, sherry, thorough , fa iry , ferry, fury , fa rrow , furrow,

ivory , va ry , na rrow, m a rry, m a rrow, m iry , m orrow, m erry , Ma ry,

Murra y, em ery, L ea ry , L a ura , L yra , L ewry, R a rey , ra ree , A urora ,ha rrow, hurry, Ya rrow, wa ry, wea ry , wiry, sorrow

, sorry, Sa ra h ,sta rry, story, Cicero.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

15 0 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

sha ckle , shuttle, shufl‘ie, shovel ; thickly , ethica l , ethica lly, thoroughly ; fickl e

,fa ddle , fiddle , fuddle , fa ble , feeble , feebly, a ffa ble,

a ffa bly , fina l, fina lly ,

fennel , funnel ; voca l , vigil , vena l , vena lly,va inly , evenly ; uncle , a nkle

,inkle , a ngle ; knuckle , N ichol , noddle,

nibble,N iblo

, noble , ena ble , novel, a nvil , a nim a l ; m eekly, m uckle ,

m odel , m eda l , m eddle , m uddle , Mitchel , m a ple , im ply , em ploy , m uz

zle, m uffle , m a inly ; likely , lega l , lega lly ,

libel,la bel , la zily, la wful ,

lively , level , lovely , L ongley . lonely ; a ra ble,ireful , a rriva l , a urora l ,

ora cle ; rega l , wri ggle ; Ha ckley , ha ggle, higgle , hopple , huddle ;wea kly , weekly, wa ggle , wiggle , wevil .

A SIMP L E STEM F O L LO WED BY A N Ell -HO OK SIG N .

6 471. Cookery, couga r , copper, ca per , keeper , cooper, cofi'

er, ca lm er ;

giver , ga iner , gunner , gunnery , ga llery ; ta wdry , tea cher, ta per , toper,Tupper , Ta bor , tougher , ta nner , tenor ; ditcher , dodger , da pper, dipper

, Debora h ,defra y ,

diver,Dover

,dinner

,donor chowder

,cha fl

'

er;

Jeffrey ,Jethro ; pucker , pa uper , piper , pa per , pepper , popery , pusher,

puffer,pa ver

,pinery , penury ba cker, ba kery , bicker , A boukir , begga r,

begga ry ,betra y , ba ttery ,

buttery , B eecher , butcher, butchery , bad ger ,ba nner

,A bner ; sha ker , suga r, sha ver , shiver ; O sca r , a s tra y ; thievery ;

figure , fibre,foppery , fibber; vica r , vigor, voucher , voya g er , viper,

va por, va iner ; a nchor , a nger , a ngry ; knocker , N iger , negro, inj ure,inj ury , neighbor , kna very ena m or , n a iler, nea rer [rer] m ocker , m ockery, m a ker, m ea gre , m a jor , a m ber , um ber , im brue, m over , m a nner ,m a nor

, m in or , m ea ner ; la cquer , locker, liquor , lucre , lugger , ultra ,la dder

,ledger, la bor, leper , lubber , leisure , loa fer, la ugher, lever ,

liver,livery ,

O liver , luna r , la m er ; a rbor , a rm or , a rcher , a rchery ,

era sure ; roguery, rigor . richer , rea per , robber , rubber, ra zor, ringer,wringer , wronger , rhym er , roa m er , rum or, ra iler, reeler , ra rer [ree-rer]Hecker , heifer, hanger , Henry ,

ha m m er , horror [er] ; euchre , yoker ;wa lker

,wea ker , wicker , wa tery , wa ger , wa fer , wa ver , w inner.

IMP ER F ECI‘ HO O KS B ETWEEN STEMS.

§ 472 . [163] Ca udle , cuddl e , cudgel , riddle , richly, ripple , R ipley,rebel

,ra bble ; ta lker, ta ker, Tucker , outcry , tiger , tugger, da gger ,

digger , checker, chopper , chea per , j oker, j'

rg ger, j obber , ja bber ; ca usable a ccusa ble , gospel , pea ceful , pea cefully , pa s s ively , pa s sover, fea s ible ,vis ible , visibly, ris ible , regis try.

473 . [164] Bushel , fa cia l , ofii cia l , officia lly , a pishly , ra s her, ra s lrly ,

da sher , initia l , initia lly, pufiher, fissure , fisher, fishery .

6 474 . [166] Curl , curly, pea rl , pea rly , m ora l , m ora lly ,beryl , Bur

ril , ba rrel , furl , m erely, ba rely, clea rly, Merrill, m ura l , Tyrol, la urel ,gna rl , cora l . cora lly, ca rle , girl .

P HO N O G R A P HIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 15 1

EXER CISE XIV.

SP ECIA L VO CA IIZA TIO N .

475 . [156] Ca ll , coa l , cool , core , corps , cure , course, coarse , corse,cur , curse , curs t , college , coura ge , colonel , ca lom el , colony , colonize,colonist , ca lum ny , collect , correct ; ga rgle , ga rner , gurgle , gulf ; tell,till

,torpor

,term ina te ; durs t , dea r ; cheer, cheerful , cha rger , Cha rles ,

cha rm , cha rm ing, churl , church ; G eorge , germ , germ ina te , j ourney,j ourna l , j erk ; a ppea r , portra y, pa rtia l , pa rtia lly , pa rs im ony , pa rs im onious

, pa ra ble , pa ra phra s e , purple , persevere , person , engineer,pioneer ; burs t , ba rber , ba rba rous ; sha wl , shell , sha re , sure , surest ,Surety , surer , surenes s , sha rp . sha rper , sha rpest , sha rk ; a ss a il ; Thursd a y , thirst, thirsty ; there , their , theirs ; fill , full , fullest , fullness ,follow

,fulfill

,fa ls ity , fa ls enes s , fa lsifier, philosophy ,

philosophic, philosopher, felicity , figure , forge , forger , forgery , furthest ; very , veries t , every , vulga r, verb , verbose , verbos ity , verba l , a verse ; na il ,knoll , nullify, nullity , nea r; nea res t, nea rness , N elson ,

nor, enorm ous ,N orm a ndy, norm a l , north

,a n a rchy , nerve

,nervous , nurse , nour

ish ,incur ; m ere , m ore , m urm ur, m a rvel , m a rvelous , m ercury ; lurch ,

lurk,lea rner

,lull ; ora l ; rea l , ra il , relea se , rule , recourse ;

ha ll , ha il , ha le , heel , hell , hill ; ya wl , yell, Ya le ; Wile , wa il , well ,wea l, wa r, wore , wire , wea r , work.

CIR CL ES A N D L O O P S P R EF IXED TO EL A N D ER HO O K SIG N S.

6 476. [158—162] Cycle , suckle , sickle , s ickly , settle , subtle , s a ddle,s idle , s a tchel , s a gely , supple , supply , sa ble , Sothel , s a fely, civil , civilly ,sm a ll , sm ile , sm ell , school seeker

, sicker , sucker,succor, screw ,

Sea ger , s tra w,s tra y , strow,

s trew, sa tyr , setter , suitor , sa dder , cider,solder , ceda r , suture . s a ger , spra y , spree , Spry; sprew, s a pper , supper ,s ipper , sa ber , sober , Cibber, seether , soother, s a fer , cipher , suffer, s a lver

,s a vor , s a vory , s ever

,s igner , s a ner

, s inner , s ooner, s inger ; sus

pire, sister ; sta lker , Stocker , s toker , s ticker, s ta gger , s touter , s ta ter,

stutter , stitcher, s ta ger, stopper, stupor, stooper , s ta bber, Stuber,sta t e-room .

EL A N D ER HO OKS A F I‘ER THE ESS-CIR CL E N THE MIDDL E O F WO R DS.

6 477. [158] P hthis ica l, disciple , displa y,dis a ble , a dducible

,de

ceiver, destroy , ta sker , descry , dis a gree , pa ss a ble , poss ible, pea cea ble ,pea cefully , pa scha l , poisoner , fus ible , vis ibl e , vestry , vesper , m a stery ,m a s s a cre , m a sker, useful . [163] Extra , express , extrem e, pa s try , bes ieger, rostrum .

152 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

WO R DS CO N TA IN IN G THE WA Y -HO OK .

§ 478. [165 , 166] Qua ck ,qua ke , quick , quota , quip, qua sh , quoth ,

qua lm ,qua il

,quell

,quill

,queer

,qua rry, query ; quiz, ques t , twis t,

ques tor, queris t ; qua lm ish ,quench , quickly ; quibble , qua ckery ,

qua ker , qua rrel , qua ver , quiver , quicker, quiddle ; Quixote , quixotic.Squa b, s

qua bby, squa ll , squa lly , squa re , squire , squa sh , squa w ,squea k ,

squea l, squib

,squa bble , squa lor, squeeze ; beques t , inques t, request.

require,inquire

,esquire.

WO R DS COMMEN CIN G WITH THE lN -HO O K .

479 . [168 , 169] Unscrew,inscribe , unscrupulous , uns trung , ia

sepa ra ble , insupera ble , ins a tia ble , unsocia ble , uncivi l, uns a fely , nucerem onious , unseem ly, ensla ve , insoluble , unsa la ble .

EXER CISE XV .

WO R DS EN DIN G WITH THE EF -HO O K .

g 480 . [170 , 172] Cough ,ca lf, ca ve , cove , cuff, G ough , tough ,

dofi'

,dea f

,duff

, Qha fi'

,cha fe

,chief

,Jeff , Jove , pa ve , puff, buff, beef,

rife,a rrive

,ra ve , rough , rove , reef, roof riffra fi

'

; skiff , scuff, set-off,surf, serf ; cliff, clove , clea ve , bluff ; cra ve , gra ve , gruff, grieve ,greeve , groove , drive , drove , prove , bra ve , brief, reli eve , relief, s trife,strove ; s ta rve .

WO R DS O F O N E STEM, EN DIN G WITH THE PIN -HO O K .

481 . [176 , 178] Ca n [noun] , con ,kine

,coin

,ca ne

,ken

,cone , keen ,

kin , a kin ,coon ; gone , gown , ga in , a ga in , gun ; t a n , ton , tine , town,

a tta in ,ten

,tone , a tone , tun ,

tune ; Da n, da wn , don , down , dine,deign , den , Dea ne, done , Dea n ,

Eden,din ; chine , cha in, chin ; John ,

join,Ja ne

, gin ,June ; p a n , pa wn , upon

,pine , opine , pa in , p en , p un,

open,oppugn ; ba n, ba ne , Ben . ebon ,

bone , bun , bea n , been , boon ;Shine , a shen . shone , Shown , shun , ocea n , sheen , shin ; a s s ign tha nethin , Etha n ; tha n ,

thine , then fa n,fa wn, often, fine ,

feign , fen . fun ,

va n , Va ugha n , A von ,vine , oven , even non . a non . nine . noun , known

none , noon m a n,m ine

,m a in , m en , a m en , m oa n ,

om en,m oon ;

A llen , la wn , line , loin, la ne , Ellen, loa n , a lone , loon iron , A a ron , a r

ra igu urn . ea rn ra n,Rhine , ra in ,

wren , roa n , run hen ,hone

,Hun

ya wn , yon ; wa n, wine , wa ne , wen , one, won , wea n , win .

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE L A ST EN DIN G WITH THE EN -HO OK .

6 482. Cocoon, kitchen , ca pon , ca bin, coffin , ca non , Ca na a n , ca

nine , a cum en, colon, Cologne , Kora n , Ca hoon ; ga m m on ; ta ken ,to

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

154 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE F IR ST COM MEN CIN G WITH A CIIK(IE,A N D THE

L A ST EN DIN G WITH THE EN -HO O K .

§ 485 Spoken , spa vin , subjoin , sunken , sunshine , s em itone , sm itten , Solom on , sulta n , s loven ,

sylva n , sla cken ,s ilken s ilicon ,

s erm on,surgeon .

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS,WITHMEDIA L CIR CL E A N D F IN A L EN -HO OK .

§ 486 . Keystone , oxygen ; G a scon , A ugustine ; Tusca n ; des tine,disda in

,disj oin ,

discern ; Jocelyn ,jessa m ine , Josephine ; pis ton ; Bos

ton , a bsta in ,buskin ; festoon ,

fus tia n ; Vesuvia n ; N a za rene ; m us lin ,

A m a zonia n ; L isbon ; ursuline ; R uskin ; Ha skin ; Wes ton .

worm s WR I'I'I‘EN WITH KEL on KER SIG N S EN DIN G WITH THE EN -freex.

§ 487. Cla n , clown , clea n ; glen , glea n ; outline ; pla n ,pla in ;

blown ; flown. Crown , A kron ,cra ne

,crone ; gra in , grown , green ,

grin ; tra in ; dra wn , drown , dra in ,drone ; chum ; pra wn , a pron

,

prune bra n, bra wn , brine , brown , bra in ; shrine throne frown .

WO R DS WR ITTEN WITH SKEL O R SKER SIG N S EN DIN G WITH THE“EN -HO O K .

488. Spleen screen , s tra in , s trewn , strewn , Cedron,s ojourn

, Spra in ,

southern , s a ffron , sovereign. Cistern [sis] .

WO R DS WR ITTEN WITH A KEL O R KER SIG N,F O L LO WED BY A N EN -HO OK STEM.

§ 489 . Cloven ,cra ven ; glutton , gla dden , griffin ; triton ,

trodden,

tra pa n , trepa n ,Tribune ; dra gon ,

dra geon , Dryden ,dra ym an ; cha ir

m a n G erm a n , jurym a n plowm a n , pla toon , plebeia n , perta in , oppertune ; bla cken ,

broken,broga n ,

B righton ,brighten ,

B rita in , Briton ,

A berdeen , Bra hm in ,Breym a n , Brem en ; fla gon , A frica n ; overdone ,

overrun ; N orm a n,N orton ; Morm on ; Herm a n ; welkin .

WO R DS WR ITTEN WITH A SIMP L E STEM, F O L L OWED BY A KEL O R KER SIG N

EN DIN G WITH THE EN -HO OK .

490 . Kedron , goblin ; outgrown ,ta vern, decline , Dublin ,

doubloon ,

dethrone,cha pla in , cha fi

'

ern ; j a velin ; cha grin ; em brown ; unblown ,

enthrone , enshrine , incline , unclea n ,uncrown recline .

EXER CISE XVII.

worms EN DIN G e n STEM-S IG N S IN STEA D orHO O KS .

§ 491. [179] Coffee , defy, cha fi'

y, puffy , deify, edify , bevy ,typ ify,

turfy, gra vy Ooenee, coney, ca noe G uinea , G uia na . gua no ; ta wny,Ta ney ,

tiny ; Dina h , deny, downy, Da na ; China , Cheeney ; E gina ,G enoa , Jennie , jenny, Jona h , Juno ; P a wnee , penny , p ony, puny,

P HO N O G R A P’

HIC W R ITIN G EXER CISES. 15 5

P inney ; bonny , ebony bony , B inney ; sh iny ; a ss ignee ; za ny ; F a nny.

fenny , funny , finny , viny, a venue , veiny, venue ; ninny ; m a nna,

m oney , m innow , Mooney ; L ion ,L eon

,L ena , luna ; O lney , Il linois,

Ulna , Ilion ; A rno , irony , a rena ; rhino, R a nney, ra iny, renew , R oo

ney ; Ha nna h ,

’

honey ; Yenn i ; winnow . Villa iny , m utiny , felony ,

va lim ony ,ferny , thorny. Skinny , Spiny , s im ony, s tony. Briny , cra nny,

bra wny , crony .

WO R DS or O N E STEM END IN G WITH THE SIlUN -HO O K .

6 492 . [180 , 182] Ca ution , a ction , a uction ,occa s ion ,

cushion ;Htia n

, tuition ; edition ,a ddition ; pa ss ion ,

O ption,potion ; fa s hion,

fus ion , effus ion ; eva s ion , ova tion , vis ion ; unction ; na tion ,notion ;

m otion , em otion , m ission , em iss ion ,om iss ion ela tion

,lotion

,elis ion

illusion , elus ion ,a llus ion ; era s ion ,

ora tion,eros ion ; ra tion, R us

s ia n Hessia n.

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE L A ST EN DIN G WITH THE SHUN -HO OK .

§ 493 . O ccupa tion,ca ption

,coa lition corros ion gum ption ,

ignitiontens ion , a ttention , a ttenua tion , tertia n ; educa tion . diction ,

a doption,

difi'

usion ,devotion , devis ion , dona tion, Dom itia n ,

a dm iss ion , dilation

,dilution , delus ion ,

a dora tion , ejection , a gita tion ,Egyptia n , j unc

tion , gentia n ; pota tion ,petition , O pticia n , pens ion , pollution , por

tion ; obtus ion ,a bolition ,

a bortion , a berra tion ; a scens ion , a s sociation ; fa ction , a ffection , fiction , function , P hoenicia n ; va ca tion ,

voca tion ,a voca tion ,

eviction , Venetia n ,volition , volution , va ria tion in a ction

,

ena ction,a nnexion

,nega tion ; im ita tion ,

m uta tion , m edia tion ,m a gi

cia n , a m bition ,im m ers ion , m a ns ion , m ention

,m onition

,m unition ,

a m m unition ; loca tion , election , lega tion , a llega tion , liba tion, elevation a liena tion eruption

,irruption , erection , irriga tion ,

a rroga tionrem i s sion ,

rea ction , roga tion ,rota tion ,

irrita tion ,refa shion , revis ion .

WO R DS O F THR EE STEMS, THE L A ST EN DIN G WITH THE SHUN -HO OK .

494. Ca china tion , coag ula tion , cogita tion , ca pita tion , cum ulation ; ta cticia n ,

tem pta tion ; decoction , dicta tion , detention, detonation ,

dejection , a da pta tion ,deputa tion , da m na tion , dim inution pop

a la tion ,pa rtition ,

perdition ; a bjection a bnega tion , a bom ina tion,

obtention a ssigna tion ,os s ifica tion , a spira tion ; a fi‘ecta tion, fum iga

tion ; vegeta tion ,va riega tion ; incuba tion ,

undula tion,infa tua tion

,

infection ,invita tion , na viga tion ,

inunda tion ,nom ina tion m a china

tion,m echa nicia n ,

im a gina tion , im biba tion ,m a num iss ion lim ita tion

,

locom otion elim ina tion ,elonga tion ; eructa tion ,

rum ina tion ordination ,

rejection ,repetition

,repudia tion , rea pportion , refuta tion , revo

ca tion .

15 6 THE COMPL ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE F IR ST EN DIN G WITH THE ESS-C R O L E , A ND THE

L A ST W ITH THE SHUN 'HO OK .

§ 495 . Exa ction,execution ,

excita tion oxyda tion, exuda tion , expia tion

,exception ; a ttes ta tion ; discuss i on , dissection , dispa s sion,

dissipa tion,deception , diss ens ion ,

decim a tion , dism is s ion , desola tion ,

dissolution,des ertion ; gesta tion ; a bsolution , bisection ; a s sa s s ina tion

fa scina tion ,vis ita tion ,

va cilla tion ,va sta tion ; inception , insertion , in

s inua tion ; elucida tion ,la cera tion , ulcera tion ; recita tion , reception ,

resolution ; hesita tion .

WO R DS W R ITTEN WITH KEL O R KER SIG N S EN DIN G WITH THE SHUN -HO OK .

496. Collis ion ,a ppella tion

,obla tion , a blution , a fil a tion crea tion ,

a ccretion ,a ggres sion , G recia n ,

itera tion , a ttrition,dura tion , deris ion ,

opera tion , oppression , P rus s ia n ,a ppa rition

,a bra s ion, freshen ,

fruition, version ,

a vers ion .

WO RDS O F O N E STEM WR ITTEN WITH IN ITIA L CIR CL E AN D F IN A L SHUN -HO O K .

§ 497. Section, suction ,

cita tion , s itua tion , s ufi'

us ion ,s a nction ; se

elus ion, secretion , sa tura tion , sepa ra tion ,

suppress ion suspicion .

WO R DS EN DIN G WITH THE ISIIU'

N -HO OK .

§ 498 [187] Ca us a tion , a ccess ion , a ccus a tion ,excis ion ; decision ;

position , oppos ition , possess ion , a ppos ition a bs cis s ion ; cessa tion ;phys icia n ; reces sion . P ropos ition ,

prepos ition , puls a tion , sensa tion,

a cquis ition , inquis ition , perquis ition ,disquis ition , depos ition ,

rep os i

tion,im pos ition , suppos ition ,

dispos ition , indisposition , tra ns pos ition ,

expos ition , success ion, proces s ion .

EXER CISE XVIIIWO R DS EN DIN G WITH THE TER -IIO OK .

Q 499 . [188] A ctor , ca ter , ga ther, gether , gutter, ta tter , tetter, titter , tutor , t

'other , da ughter, doubter, debtor, cha tter, pa tter, potter,pother

,pewter , ba tter , better, bitter, butter , writer , ra ther ; sca tter,

sector , spa tter , sputter , sceptre , spitter, s ta rter ; cla tter, clutter, glit

ter,idola ter, pla tter , bla dder , rela ter, rela tor ; crea tor , Trotter, cha r

ter , pra ter, pretor , ba rter , brea ther, brother ; strutter, Streeter.

ESS-CIR CLE A DDED TO F IN A L HO OKS.

§ 500 . [192] Ca lves , coughs , c a ves , gan’s , dives , pa nes , puffs , bufis ,

beeves , rives , a rrives , roves , ra ves , reeves , roofs ; shines , shuns , shins ,a ss igns . thins , tha nes , A thens , thence , fa ns , fa wns , fines , fence , of

fence , lins , vines , veins , ovens , evince , nouns,nuns , m a ns , m ines ,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

158 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

3

va ca ncy ; envenom ; m a ligning ; la conic, likening , lea vening ; reck'

oning, recoining ,reddening, rejoining, repining , ripening, refining

t oughening, ra vening ; a wa kening. Trench, tra ining ; drowning ,

dra ining, dra ina ge , dronish , drench ; pla net, pla nning , plen ty, pla ining,plunge Bla nche bla nch ,

blench , bra nch , brownish , bra ining frenzy ,frowning, furnish ; a ctiona ry, ca utiona ry , a uctioneer , ca utioning, O cca siona l , occa s iona lly, occa s ioning a dditiona l , a dditiona lly O ptiona l ;fa shioning ; vis iona ry ; na tiona l , n a tiona lly, notiona l ; em otiona l , m iss iona ry, m otioning ra tiona l, ra tiona lly provis iona l , profess iona l ,progress ion“,

irra tiona l , fra c tiona l , tra ditiona l , p reventiona l . Pro

e s s iona l , pos itiona l , propos ition a l. Ca tering , ca terer ga thering,ga therer, pa ttering , ba ttering, Sputterer ; rhetori c.

EXER CISE XIX - 210 ]WO R DS O F O N E STEM W R I‘I'I‘EN DOUBL E-LEN G TH.

Q 5 05 . [201—210] Sha tter, shutter, shooter, shudder ; A s tor, oys ter,Es ther

, Ea ster ; thea tre ; thither ; fa tter, fighter , a fter, fa ther , fodder, fetter, fea ther, fea ture , future , fi tter ; voter ; entire , a nther,nitre

, neither, nether, n a ture ; m a tter,m itre , m utter, m other ; la tter,

lighter, a lta r,loiter

,la ter , letter , lea der, lea ther, L uther ; A rthur,

order, ora tor ; ha tter , ha ter , hitter, hither ; wa ter, Wider, wa iter,wetter

,wither.

WO R DS O F TWO SEEMS , THE F IR ST WR ITTEN DOUBL E -L EN G TH.

506. E a s ter-da y , fa thered, fea thered, federa l , futurity, na tura l ,entirely, m otherly, m a teria l, la tterly , a ltering , loitering, orderly,hitherto , wa tering , withering.

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE L A ST WR ITTEN DOUB L E -LEN G TH.

507. Ca thete r ; tender, tem pter , ta rta r, tincture ; dia m eter, diluter ; cha nter ; ja nitor, gender, j ointure , juncture ; pa nther, punc‘t ure bolter, fa lter, filter, thunder innova tor, inva der m onitor,m inia ture ; la ughter, ill-na tui e ; ra fter.

WOR DS O F O N E DOUBL E-LEN GTH STEM, WITH IN ITIA L ESS-CIR CLES.

60 8. Softer, Sifter, s a unter, centre, sena tor, Sunder, sm a tter, sm oth

cr, Sum ter, scim eta r, sm oother, psa lter, soldi er, sa luter, Sa rtor, sweeter.

WO RDS OF O N E DOUBLE-LEN GTH STEM, WITH AN IN ITIA L EL O R ER HO O K .

§ 609 . Shoulder, short-er, a ssa ulter , a ssorter, a s serter ; fla tter, flutter, flitter, fritter ; verdure ; na rra tor ; m oulder

,m a rtyr; la rder ,

ha lter, holder ; Wa lter, wilder, welter .

P HO N O G R A P HIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 159

WO R DS ENDIN G WITH DOUB L E-L EN G TH STEMS,HAVIN G F IN A L HO OK ,

CIR CLE,

O R L O O P .

510 . [208] F ounder , thunder, a sunder , wonder, yonder, hinder ,slender, flounder

,inventor ; [209] m a tters

,oysters , m others , cylinders ,

a ssenters , wa nders .

EXER CISE XX .

worms or O N E SIMP L E STEM wur'I'rEN HA L F -L EN G TH.

§ 5 l l . [212—218] A ct,ca t

, ca ught , cot , ca wed, cod, lfi‘te, coit ,cowed, Ka te , Ca de, a ched , coa t , code , cut , cud, keyed , eked , kit, kid,coot , cooed, cute ; ga d , got , G od , gout, ga te , get , egged, goa t , goa d ,gut , good ; ta t , ta ught , Todd, tight, tide , toyed, tote , towed , tut,tea t , tit , toot ; da d , dot , Dodd , died, doit , doubt, da te , debt, dea d,dote , deed, did , dewed cha t , Choa te , chea t , chit , itched, chewed jot

,

a ged , j et , jut ; p a t , a p t , pot , pout, pa te , a ped , pet, pea t , pit , put ; ba t ,a bbo t, bought, bot, bite , a bout , ba te , a ba te, bet, a bet, boa t, obit, bea t,beet

,bit, boot , Bute ; sha d, shot, shod , shied

, shout, sha de , shed,shoa t , showed, shut, sheet , shoot ; iced, ous t, ea s t ; ea sed , oozed ;thought , tha wed ; fa t , a ft , fought , oft , fight , fa te , fa de , fed , feet , feed,fi t, foot , food, a foot, feud ; va t , vied, vowed , void , vote , viewed ; gna t,a un t

,n a ught , gna wed, not , knot, nod

,night, knout , neighed, net ,

end , note , node , nut , nea t , need , nit ; m a t,m a d ,

m ight, Mott , m a te,m a de

, a im ed , m et, m ote,m ode , m ud

,m ea t

,m ea d

,m it

,m id

,m oot,

m ood, m ute , m ewed la d,light, lot , loud, lout , la te , la id , a iled , led ,

loa d,old

,lect

,lit

,lea d

,lid

,lute ; a rt , a ired , erred , a rra yed ; ra t , rot,

right, rout , write , wrought, ra te , rote , wrote , rut , writ, root ha t , hot,hight, Hoyt , ha te , hut, hea t , heed, hit , hid, hoot, hood, hewed ;ya cht ; W ight, wide , wa it, weight , wa de , weighed, wet , wed , weed,wit , wood.

WO R DS O F TWO STEMS, THE SECO N D WRITTEN HA L F - L EN G TH.

5 12 . [220] Kited, ca det , ca tched, couched, ca ged, ca pped , copied ,occupied

,ca put , kept, coped, cupped, cooped, Cupid , cubit, Icha bod,

ca s hed ,Conna ught , a conite , ca lm ed. ca m ped, com et , coiled , com bed

guided, goa ded , gouged , gua ged , ga shed, gushed , ignite , ga m ut,g a m ed, gum m ed , go-a hea d ; ta cked, ta ct, a tta cked, ta gged, ta lked .

tucked,tugged, ticket, ticked, a tta ched ,

”touched, two-edged , ta pped , topped, Thibet , tepid, tipped, tippet , outbid, toothed , tithed,teethed

,tim ed , ta m ed, tea m ed, tim id ; docked , docke t , dyked ,

decked,duct

,duca t , educa te , edict, dogged , digged . ditched . dodged,

d igit, a da pt, a dopt , da bbed, da ubed, a dept, deba te , dubbed . dipped,depute

,duped

, da shed , dished, da m m ed, da m ned , a dm it , deem ed,

160 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

doom ed, delight , dila te , dea lt, dolt, a dult , dilute , dulled, doledda rt

, a dored,dirt ; cha lked, checked, choked , cha tted, chea ted,

chided,cha pped chopped

,chipped

,chim ed, cha m ped ; j a cket , j ock

eyed, j oked , eject, j a gged , j ogged , j otted , a gita te , j utted, jad edEgypt , gibbet, j obbed

, gibed, gia nt, a gent , j a m m ed ; pa cked,pa cket, p eeked ,

poked,piqued

,picked , P ict , a ppetite , pa tted,

potted,pa dded

,pa ted , petted ,

petit,pitted, pitied , putid, pa tched ,

poa ched , pitched, pa ged, upshot, pushed, epithet, pivot ; ba cked,ba lked

,ba ked

, bucked, bucket, bea ked , booked ,ba gged, bog

ged , beg t , begged, beget , bigot, ba tted, betide , bitted, bodied,ba ted, ba ited, a ba ted, a betted

,ebb- tide , bedded, boded, budded,

bea ded,bedewed

,botched , bea ched , budged, budget , a ba shed , bow

shot , bethought, ba thed , buffet , befit,ba nged, bunged , bea m ed,

boom ed,behea d ; shocked, shucked , shotted, shouted , sha dowed,

sha ded, shopped, sha ped , shipped , shea thed, sha ft, shift, sha ved ,shoved

,shea ved

,sha m m ed

, A shm ea d , sha m ed , a sha m ed a s ked , ous ted , es ta te. a s tute , eschea t , espied, ice-boa t , a ssocia te , a s sum ed ; thicket,tha tched , theft ; fa tted, fa ted , fetid, fi tted. footed ,

fa ded , fetched,fidget , fobbed, fibbed, ofli cia te

,fa nged, fa m ed

,fum ed ; a voided ,

eva ded, voted, vetoed , va pid , vitia te , vivid ena ct,unca ught , knock

ed,na ked

,uncut

,nicked

,unta ught , untied, knotted, noted

,netted,

nodded, endowed, una ided, ended, needed,indeed

,undid

,endued

,

notched, enj oyed , una pt, nipped,na bbed, nibbed

, gnas hed , initia te ,na usea te

,untha wed

,unfit

,invite , una vowed , inva de . envied , una n

noyed, inna te , unknit , unm a de,inm a te , unweighed ; ingot ; m ocked,

m a ggot, m a tted,m a ted , em ptied, m eted

,im ita te , em itted, om itted,

m ooted , m a tched,im a ged , m a pped

,m opped , m oped, m obbed , im bued,

m a shed, em a cia te,m ethought, m ethod, m outhed

,Mofi a tt, m oved,

m a im ed ; lighted, a llotted , a lighted , ela ted , la uded, elided, la ded,lea ded

,loa ded , la tched , la tchet, lodged, a lleged , la pped , la ppet , eloped,

looped,elbowed

,la thed

, l oa thed, la ughed, loft, a loft,eleva te

,left,

lea fed, lift , la ved , levied , loved, lea ved , lived , longed , linuet , a liena te, a la m ode , la m ed , lim it , lolled , lulled ; erect, a rroga te , a rgued, orbit, O rient, a rm ed, ra m m ed, rhym ed, rem ote, roa m ed, rem it , rim m ed

,

A ra ra t ; rea ct , ra cked, ra cket , rocked , rocket, ra ked , wrecked, ra gged,rugged, a ir-tight, righted, rotted, routed , ra ted, rota te , rooted, a rched,wretched , rea ched , rigid , urged, ra pped, wra pped , ra pid , repa id, rep ea t, rea ped, ripped , repute , ra bbet, robbed , ra bid, reba te , rebut,robed, rubbed , ribbed, rushed, ea rthed , wrea thed , writhed , refit, refute , rivet , reviewed, wronged, runnet , renewed , roiled ; ha cked,Ha ckett, ha wked , hooked , ha ted, hea ted, hooted , hea ded, ha tched,hitched , hedged, ba shed , hushed, bum m ed, hem m ed ; yoked ; wa lked,wa ked, a wa ked , wicket , wicked .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

162 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

fled , va unted , vented, va ulted , va lved, evolved , vilified , velvet , t ariega te, verified ; ena cted , a necdote , unca ged, enga ged, inocula te ,unpa cked, h ea p-tide

,unpitied

,unpolite

,una ppa lled, N ewport, um

ba ked , unbegot , una ba ted, una betted , unshocked ,unshea thed , unfitted ,

unfa ded , unfelt , unfold , enfold , invited, innova ted , inva ded , una voided,inviola te, inva lid , unveiled , novitia te

,unenvied

,a nointed, unen

dowed , unenj oyed , unm oved, a nim a ted, N im rod , unm a tched, um

a sked , una rm ed ; m a china te , m a gna te m a gnet , em bodied, im bedded,em ba lm ed , a m bula te , em a cia ted

,m a nda te

,m inded , em a na ted, m ended,

a m ended , m a na ged , em inent, im m inent,m im icked , m a lted, m elted,

m oulded , m ildewed ; m a rket, m a rked, m erited, m a rched, m erged ;

elected , loca ted, a lpha bet , lifeboa t , ill -fa ted , lifted, eleva ted , a llevia ted,la vished, elonga te , long-boa t

,la nded

,la unched , a liena ted , a la rm ed ;

erected, eructa te , a rroga ted, irriga ted, a rm pit,rhom boid, rem oved,

rem itted,rem edied

, a rm let , rum m a ged rea cted,rechea ted , rechecked,

reject,repea ted

,reputed

,repelled

,repea led

,report

,repa ired , reba ted,

rebutted , refitted, refuted, roughshod, ra va ged, revived, ra vished, reviled, rented , renova te , rounded, ra nged , wrenched , ra refied ; ha cknied , Huguenot, hinged, ha unted, hun ted , hinted , ha nded , Ha m let,ha libut , horrified, horded, hornet ; wa rded, a wa rded, worded .

WOR DS O F THREE STEMS, THE F IRST WRITTEN HALF -LENGTH.

9 5 15 . [220] Ca outchouc , ca tfish , a ctively ,ca t -na p , ca tnip , kidna p,

a ca dem ic, ca ta logue ; godlike , goodfellow ; tutela g e , tutela r ; deta ching, deta iling, peda gogue , pettifog, P otom a c, epidem ic , petrify , p utrefy ; bedecking, bedtim e , bootj a ck, bedim m ing,

bedla m ,butler

,

bedroom ; obdura cy ; es teem ing , a us terity, os trich ; footpa th , fetlock,fa ttening ; nightca p , notebook

,notifying , na tivi ty , nettling , indict

ing, undoubting ; m a dca p,m odicum , m idship , m odifying , m odeling,

m eddling, m iddling , Ma tilda ; litera ti , lightning ,lightening ; a rtil

lery ; reta king, ruta -ba ga ,retouching , ra tifier, ra tifying ,

ra ttling ,re

ta iling , rotunda ; hea dlong ; woodchuck , Woodbury , wedding-da y,

wedlock .

EXER CISE XXII.— [2l 2

worms O F THR EE STEMS, THE SECO N D WR ITTEN HALF -LENGTH .

§ 5 16 . [220] Ca ptive , ca pita l , ca pita lly, cupidity, coveting ,col

la ting ; igniting ; ta lka tive , ticketing ,tepidity, tim idity, tim idly,

itera tive, itera ting ; a ddicting, dictum ,da ctyl , ductile , doggedly,

a doptive , delighting, dila ting , diluting . Doolittle , dila tory, da rting,dirting ejecting , genitive , gentle , gently, jolting ,

j ilt-ing ; pocketing,picketing , pom a tum , piloting, pelting , polluting , pa la ta l , politely,pa llia tive , a ppella tive, portico, porta ge , pa rting , pira t ing , uprooting

P HON OGR AP HIC W R ITIN G EXER CISES. 163

begotten , begetting,buffeting, befitting , obvia ting , a bla tive , ba llot

ing , bolting ,belting ,

billeting, belittle , a bortive shifting ,shem itic

,

Cha n tilly ; a s socia ting, a s a foetida , a s thm a tic , oscilla ting ; O ffi cia ting ,fiftieth , fa na tic, phonetic , fum a tory , a ffi lia ting , furtive, fortuity; va nta ge , vinta ge , vitia ting ,

vividly, Va nda l , va ulting ,viola ting ; ina ctive,

ena ctive,ena cting ,

ina ptly , na usea ting, initia ting , initia tory , infa tua te

,unfa ding , unfitting , infidel , inviting , inva ding ; em a cia ting , em u~

la tive , em ul a ting ,m elting, m orta l , m orta lly , m yrtle ; elliptic , lifte

ing, eleva ting, a llevia ting , luna tic, a liena ting ; a rchetype , erecting ,

ere'ctly , a rroga ting ,eruptive

,rem otely , a rom a tic , rheum a tic

,orn a tely,

orienta l,orna ting ; rea cting, ra cketing, rectify, rea ctive , ruggedly,

ra pidity , ra pidly , refitting , refuting ; heca tom b wickedly .

WOR DS O F F OUR STEMS,TIE LAST WR ITTEN HALF-LENGTH.

5 17. [220] Coa gula ted ; ta bul a ted, ta lented , turpitude , torchlight ; decocted, deca pita te , dejected , depopula te , depicted , dem erited ,dem anded

,dem ented , dom ina nt , a dm onished , dim inished , dila pida te,

delinea ted, dera nged , deroga ted ; checkm a ted ; pickpocket , poet-la urea te

,popula ted

,uplifted

,purport ; a bnega ted , B enedict , a bom ina ted,

ba lconied, ba rbecued ; shipwrecked ; fom ented , effem ina ted, fum i

ga ted, fire-bucket va riega ted una ttem pted,intim a ted , inducted , in

dura ted , encha nted , inj ected , unpolluted , unp urified , unbeloved , nubolted

,unba rbed, unbea rded, unfa tigued, unfa thom ed , enfila ded , in

furia ted ,unfounded ,

unoffended,inviola ted, inva lida te , invented ,

una venged, na viga ted, unem ba lm ed , unem bodied, unm erited, N ew

Ma rket , unm a rked, unentom bed ,unenga ged ; m a nifold , m ilkm a id,

m a nipula te L ockport, litiga ted, elim ina ted, la m ented ; rem a nded, rem inded

,rum in a ted, rem na nt ; reported.

WOR DS O F F OUR STEMS, THE F IR ST WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH.

5 18. [220] Kidna pping ; dida ctic , dedica tory ; opodeldoc , petrifying,

pa ternity ; bed-wrench photologic : una djudged , indignitym eta llurgy .

WOR DS O F F OUR STEMS, THE THIR D WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH.

519 . [220] Cock-fighting ,cum ula tive, a ccum ula tive , a ccum ula ting,

coa gula ting ; ta bula ting ,torpidity, turbidity, turgidity ; depicting ,

dogm a tic,da guerreotype , delinea ting , dem eriting ; popula ting , epi

lep tic ; a bruptly ,ba rrica ding ,

a bnega ting ; fa ctotum ; va riega ting ;inductive , undula ting, unpolitely, injecting ; a m bula ting, m a rketing , m a rket-da y ; a lpha betic ; rejecting , a rithm etic

,repea tedly, re

putedly, reporting.

164. THE COMP L ETE PHON OG R APHER .

WOR DS WRITTEN WITH TWO HALF-LENGTH STEMS.

§ 5 20 . [220] Cotta ged , cutlet ; godhea d ; dedica te , deduct, detect,deta ched , dea dlight, dea dhea d ; a djudica te , a gita ted ; petticoa t, P a wtucket ; a bdica te , a bduct

,bedecked

,bea titude , bea u tified , bottom ed,

bedim m ed,obdura te

,bedrid ; esta ted, a s cetified , a s tound , es tim a te ,

es teem ed ; footpa d'

, a flida vit ; evident , victua led ; inta ct, una tta cked,a nteda te , a ntidote , nightsha de , notified, intim a te

,intent , intend, in

tona te,enta iled , untold , nettled ; m edica te m edita te , m edia ted , m od

ided,m idnight , m odula te , m odera te ulti m a te , la titude , lightfoot,

lightened , litera te ; era dica te , retort, reta rd , retired ; rea tta cked, retouched, ra tified ; hot-hea d , hotbed ; woodcut .

WOR DS O F THREE STEMS,THE F IR ST TWO WRITTEN HALF-LENGTH.

§ 5 21. [220] Titilla ting ; dedica ting, detecting ; a bdica ting , obdu

ra ting , obdura tely ; a stounding ; evidently ; indica tive , indica tory ,indica ting ,

individua l,intending, intently , intim a tely ; m ed ica ting ,

m itiga tive , m itiga ting, m utila ting , m odula ting , m odera ting ; ultim a tum

,ultim a tely ; reta lia ting ,

reta lia tive,reta lia tory.

WOR DS O F THREE STEMS, THE LAST TWO WRITTEN HA LF-LENG l'H.

§ 5 22. [220] Cogita ted, ca pitula te ; gela tina te ; pa cket-boa t, portent , portend ; a bjudica te oblitera te ; ina ptitude , unindebted, inunda ted , N a ntucket ; rm a rtinet ; legitim a te ; rectitude , rectified, rep udia ted .

WOR DS O F THREE STEMS, THE F IR ST A N D LAST WRITTEN HALF-LEN GTH.

§ 5 23 . [220] Kidna pped ; dedica ted, detected , dea d-lift ; petrifi ed,p utrefied ; a bdica ted , a bducted, obdura ted . bedla m ite ; estim a ted

, a s

tounded , a stonished ; indica ted , una da pted , una dopted, intended, untinged, undefiled , indelica te ; m edica ted, m itiga ted, m odula ted , m u

tila ted ; era dica ted, retorted, retarded ; reta lia ted.

EXER CISE XXIII.

worms WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH STEM wrm A N IN ITIAL ess -om ens .

524 . Sa cked , sca t, scout, Scott , ska te , sect , soa ked, sucked , scud ;Ba gged ; cited, s ighted , s a ted , sea ted , suited ; sodded , s ided , seda te ,ceded spa t, s a pped, Spout , spot , spite , spa de , sped, speed, Spit, s ipped ;sobbed ; s a tia te ; seized , s ized ; seethed , soothed ; soft , sift ; s a lved ,s a ved , civet ; s igned , s a nd, sound , snout , sonnet

, s a int , sent , scent,snowed , sunned . s inned , synod sm ite , sm ote , sm ut , sum m it

, sum m ed.seem ed ; sla t, sa lt, slight , slide , soiled

,sla te, Celt, slut, sla yed, sled,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

166 THE COMPL ETE P HON OG R APHER .

ed, sm oked, sm utted , sm a shed, sm oothed s lighted, s a lted, solitude,sla ted, s a luted, slouched , s la pped, slopped, s loped , s lept, s lipped,solved, s la m m ed circuit

, surroga te sorted, surtout, sordid, s ea rched,surged, surfeit, surveyed, serena de swept

, swa bbed , swa thed, swa shed.

WOR DS O F TWO STEMS,WITH MEDIAL ESS-CIR CL E , A N D SECOND STEMHALF' LENGTH.

§ 5 3 0 . [220] Ca sket, ca sca de , execute, a ccos ted , excited , coa sted,exceeded

,a ccept

,except

, a ccent,cozened

,ca s tled, excelled ; exa ct,

ga zetted, ga sped, exiled, exa lt, exult , ga slight , exhort, exert ; ta sked,tusked, ta s ted, tested, a ttested , tes ta te, toa s ted, ta ss eled ; dis sect,dusted , decided, despite , despot , dissipa te , dispute , dis obeyed, dis ea s ed ,disa vowed, deceived , designed, descend, disowned , decent , dism a yed ,decim a te , desola te , dissolute , des ired, desert, dis a rra yed, dis sua de ;cha s tened

,ches tnut, chiseled jested, j ostled a posta te , pa s ted , pos ted,

pa cified, poisoned, pea s a nt ; ba sked, ba sket, bisect , biscuit, besott ed,ba s ted, boa s ted , bes towed, bes tud, beseeched, bes ieged , a bsent , a bscind,obsolete , a bsurd ; a ss a ss ina te , a ssisted ; thous a nd ; fa sted , fois ted ,fea sted , fis ted

,phospha te , fa scina te , fa stened , phea s a nt ; ves ted, vis

ited,va cilla te

,viscer

,a te eviscera te ; insect, incited , uns a ted , ins tead ,

unsea ted, unsuited, insipid, insa tia te , uns ift , uns a ved, unsigned, unsound, unsen t, innocen t, ins inua te , nes tled, inser ;t Musca t , m usket,m isguide , m ista ught , m isda te , m isdeed, m essm a te

,m a cera te la s ted,

la ssitude , elicited, elucida te , lisped , les sened, listened , loosened, la cera te , ulcera te ; a rres ted, resum ed ; rescued , risked , recited, res ta te ,res ted, rus ted, receipted, receded, ra sped , respite , rosebud , received, res igned, resound, resent , .recent

,rescind

,rea soned, resolute , result ,

wrestled, resort ; husked, hois ted, ha s ted , hesita te , housem a id ;wa sted, wiza rd.

WOR DS O F TWO STEMS, THE FIRST HALF-LENGTH IVITH INITIAL ESS- CIRCLE .

Scottish , succota sh , skittish , scoutingg , ska ting, sendding Speedily , spittle ; s a tia ting ; s ifting, softly Sa ntia g o , cenota ph ,Sa nta F é, sounding , sending, soundly , s a intly ; som etim e , sym ptom ,

cem etery ; sa lting ,. s1ighting, s a luting, sulta na , slightly, ps a ltery , solita ry , sa luta ry sorting ; swea ting, sweetly .

EXER CISE XXIV 220 .

worms wnrrrEN WITH O N E HALF-LENGTH EL -IIO O K SIGN .

§ 5 3 2 . Cla d , cla wed, clot, clod , Clyde , clout, cloud , clewed ; gla d,glide , gla de , gloa t, glowed , glut , ogled, glued ; a ddled , idled ; pla t,pla id , a ppla ud , plot, plod, plight, plied , a pplied

,ploughed, pla te,

p la yed, plead ; blot, blight, bla de , bled , bloa t blood. blea t bleed ;

PHON OG R A P HIC WR ITIN G EXER CISE S. 167

a s s a ult, a s s a iled ; fla t , fla wed,flight, flout

,fla yed, fled

,floa t

, bowed,flood , fleet , flit, flute ; unla de , unloa d, inla id , inlet ; m a lt

,m a iled

m elt , om elet ; relied, rela te , ruled ; ha lt , ha iled, held, hold, heeledyelled, yield W ild

,wa iled

,wield

,wilt

WOR DS WRITTEN WITH O N E HA LF -LENGTH ER -HOOK SIGN .

5 3 3 . A crid, cried, crout, crowd, cra te , Croa t, crowed , Crete , creed,crude ; a ugured , grea t, gra te , gra de , greet , grit , greed ; trot, trod,trite , tried , trout , tra it, tra de , tret, trea d, uttered, trea t, treed ; dried,drought, a droit

,drea d ; P ra tt , opera te , pride , proud , pra te , preyed,

prude ; bra t , bra d, brought, broa d , a broa d , bright , bride , bra id, bred,breed, brit , brute , bruit , brewed ; shroud, shred , ushered , shrewd a s

sort , a ssert ; threa t, threa d, throa t ; fra ught, fra ud, fright , fried, a f

fright , offered, freight , fra yed , a fra id, fret , effort, freed , fruit ; overt ;honored, inwrought, unwrought , unrea d, inroa d, enroot, unroot ; lordha rd, hea rd, herd ya rd wa rd

,word.

WOR DS WR ITTEN WITH '

O N E HALF-LENGTH EF -HOOK SIGN.

5 3 4 . Coughed , ca ved, cuffed Ta ft doffed , dived ; cha fi'

ed , cha fed,a chieved ; puffed ; a ba ft ; ra ft,reft, reefed , rift , roofed, ra ved, roved .

C

WOR DS WRITTEN WITH O N E HALF-LENGTH EN -HOOK SIG'N .

§ 5 3 5 . Ca nt, ca nned, conned , kind, count, a ccount, coined, Kentga un t, ga ined, G hent ; ta nned, ta unt, tined, ta int, a tta int, a tta in ed,tent , a ttend, toned , a toned , tint, tinned, tuned , a ttuned ; da unt ,da wned, donned , dined , deigned, dent, don

’

t,dunned , dint, dinned

cha nt , cha ined ; ja unt , j oint , j oined, gent ; pa nt , pa wned , pond, pint ,pined, pound, point , a ppoint, pa int , pa ined, pent, penned, ap pend,O pened, pinned, oppugned ; ba nd , bond, bind, bound; a bound, bent ,bend

,boned ; sha n’t

, shined , shunned , shinned ; a s s igned , a scent ,a scend thinned ; fa nned, fa wned , font , fond, find , found, fa int, feigned

, fend, offend, fund, fiend ; va unt , a va unt , vent , event , vend ;’

noint,

a noint ; m a nned, m ind,

m ount, a m ount, m ound , m ea nt , m end,a m end , m oa ned ; la nd, lined , is la nd , lent , lend, loa ned, lea ned, lint,L ind ; a rra nt, ironed, a round , a rra igned, erra nt , erra nd, ea rned ; ra nt,ra nd, rind, round, ra ined, reigned, rent, rend , runt ; ha nd, ha unt,hind , hound , hunt, honed, hint yawned wa nt, wa nd, wind, wound,waned

,went , wend, won

’t , wea ned, wind.

WOR DS WRITTEN WITH O N E HALF-LENGTH SHUN-HOOK SIGN .

5 36 . Ca utioned, a uctioned, occa s ioned, cushioned ; pa tient ; fa shioned, efficient, a ncient m otioned.

168 THE CO MP L ETE P HO N O G R A P I—IER .

WORDS WRITTEN WITII O N E DALE-LENG TH TIER-HOOK SIGN.

§ 5 37. Ca tered, a ccoutred ; ga thered ; ta ttered , tottered, tittered,tutored ; cha ttered ; pa ttered , pottered, pewter-cd ; ba ttered, bettered ,buttered

,bothered.

EXER CISE XXV

WORDS OF TWO STEMS , THE FIRST A HALF-LENGTH EL O B ER HOOK SIGN .

5 38. Clouting ,clouding ,

crowding ,crudely ; gla dly , gliding . gra t

ify , gra tuity, grea tly , gra ting , gra ding , greeting ; ad roitly , A dria tic ;pa rta ke , pa rtook , prodigy , prudish , opera tive , proudly ; brutis h ,

brea dth,brutify ,

B ra dley, broa dly , brightly ; shrouding, shredding ,shrewdly a sserting ,

a sserting , a scerta in, a s sa ulting ; thread ing ; fla ttish , floa ting , flooding , flitting , fluting , fla tly, fleetly , flotilla , frettingvir tua l enlighten , a na lytic ; enrooting , unrooting lordly rela ting,overtly , rela tive ; ha rdly .

WORDS O F TWO STEMS, THE SECOND A HALF-LENGTH EL -HOOK SIGN .

§ 5 3 9 . [220] Ca ckled, coddled , cudgeled, couplet, coupled, cobbled , ca viled, kenneled ; goggled, gobbled ; ta ckled, tickled , ta ttled,titled , toppled , tippled, ta blet, twofold, tunneled ; da wdled , da dd led , da ppled , da bbled , deployed , doublet; doubled, deviled , Don a ld ;chocola te , chuckled, cha plet ; ej a cula te , j oggled, j uggled ; pickled,pa ddled, peddled, peopled , pieba ld , puzzled , p a nneled , penult ; sha ckled

, shiploa d , Sheffi eld, shuffled , shoveled thick- la id fiddled,fa bled ;

a ngled , uncla d, knuckled, unclewed , include , una pplied , en a bled ,nibbled, ena m eled ; m uddled, im plied, em ployed, m uzzled

, m ufiled ,

m oonlight L eopold, libeled , la beled , Elipha let, leveled ; A rnold ;wriggled , riddled . replied, rippled , replete , riba ld ha ggled, higgled ,huddled, ha tcheled, hobbled ; wa ggled , wiggled, wa ddled .

WORDS OF TWO STEMS , THE SECOND A HALF- LENGTH ER -HOOK SIGN .

§ 5 40 . [220] Co-opera te , cupboa rd , ca shiered , covert, colla red,colored ; Egbert ; a utocra t, ta pered , itinera te ; decried , decora te ,decreed

,dickered, degra de , Detroit , deterred , dota rd , depa rt, de

port , defra ud , deferred defra yed , a dvert, divert ; checkered ;j eopa rd , genera te ; pa triot , putrid, powdered , pa pered , peppered,upbra id ; begga red , begird . betra yed, obtrude , butchered , a bjured ,ba nnered ; suga red, shivered ; escort, a s tride , a spira te ; figured , favored ; eva pora te , vibra te , venera te ; a nchorite , a nchored

, a ngered"

;

incurred , ingra te , nigga rd , untried , untrod , entrent , intrude , undried,injured , unbra id , inbred , inebria te .

’

insured . unthrea d, unofi'

ered , ih

ferred , invert, unhonored, ena m ored m igra te , em igra te, im m igra te ,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

170 THE COMP L ETE PHON OG R APHER .

ing, pa nder , ponder, pointer , a ppointer , pa inter ; ba nda ge , bonda ge,binding, bounding ,

a bounding, bending, B enton , ba nter , binder,bender

,bounda ry a s senting a uthentic fiendish , pha nta sy , finding ,

founding, fa inting , fending , O ffending , funding , founta in , F ontenoy ,pha ntom , fondly , fa intly, finder, founder, fender , offender , foundryva unting ,

vending, vender ; Monta gue, m a intop , m inding ,m ount

ing , a m ounting, m ending, a m ending, m ounta in ,m ea ntim e , m ender,

Monterey ; la nding ,lending, lender, la undry ; ra nting , rounding ,

renting , rending , ra ndom ,renta l

,ra nter

,rounder

,render ; ha unting.

hun ting ,hinting , ha unter , hunter, hinter ; yonder ; winding, wend

ing , wounding .

WORDS O F TWO STEMS, THE LAST A HALF-LE NGTH EN -HOOK SIGN.

§ 546. [220] Cogent , occupa nt, ca bined , coffined , corned, current,ca reened ; ga m m oned

,a ugm ent , ga lla n t ; tokened , outbound, ta lent ,

torren t, tyra nt, turned, itera nt ; depend , deepened, dem a nd,a da m a nt,

dia m ond,dem ea ned

,da rned , ad orned ; j ocund, j a pa nned , gerund ;

pecca nt,piqua nt

,pa tent

,potent

,peda nt

,pa gea nt, pa ym ent, O pulent,

a ppella nt, P ola nd , upla nd , pa rent, a ppa rent ; beckoned, bea coned,ba ttened, buttoned, obta ined, obtend, obedient, bea u-m onde

, be

m oa ned,burnt

,burned ; a sca nt , Icela nd ; fom ent ° vehem ent

,vio

lent ; unkind , enchant , encha ined, uncha ined , unj oint, enjoined , uhopened

,unpinned

,unbind

,unbound, unbent , unbend, unshunned,

una ss igned, unfound , unfeigned, infa nt, invent, unm a nned,unea rned,

nurned , unwea ned ;'

m a ddened,im a gined , a m bient

,m om ent, em ol

lient , m a ligned ; likened, elega nt , legend, elepha nt, O lipha n t, L eva nt,lea vened, lenient, la m ent, a lim ent , elem ent, a ilm ent ; a rroga n t, O rm ond, rem ind, rem ount, R a ym ond, rem end ; recent , recoined, recount

,reckoned, rega ined, reta ined , a rdent, redound , rejoined, ur

gent , regent , ripened, rea ppoint, repent , rebound, riba nd ,refined , re

found,refund, renowned ; Ha m m ond , highla nd, Holla nd , Howla nd ;

wa kened, a wa kened, wea kened , wa rra nt.

WORDS O F THREE STEMS, THE FIRST A HALF -LENGTH EN -HOO K SIGN .

547. [220] Ca ntoning , kindlier, kindling ; gondolier ; a ttentively,tendency ; identifying ; P enta teuch , pointingly , pendency , p a ntom im e , P inda ric , pa nderer ; ba nda ging , bountiful , bountifully , a ba ndoning, ba nterer , ba ntering ; va untingly ; Montevideo, Montezum a ,

m ounta ineer ; la ndla dy.

WORDS O F THREE S'TEMS, THE SECOND A HALE -LENGTH EX-IIO OK SIGN .

§ 548. [220] Cogently, currently ; a ugm enting , ga lla nting , ga lla ntly,ga lla ntry ; A tla ntic, outla ndish ; deca nter , depending ,

dem a nding ;

PHON OG R APHIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 171

jocundity , j ocundly , giga ntic ; piqua ntly, pa tenting,potently, p e

da utie, peda ntry, opulently, pa renta l , pa renta lly ; obtending, obediently ; Icela ndic ; fom enting , fom enter , Phila nder ; vehem ently,violently , va lia ntly, Va lentine , volunteer , volunta ry ; encounter , encha nting , unbinding, unbending ,

una uthentic, infa ntine , unofl'

end

ing , infa n tile , inventive , inventing , inven tory m om entum ,m om ently,

m om enta ry ; elepha ntine , la m enting, a l im enta ry, elem en ta ry ; a rroga ntly, rem a nding,

“rem inding ; reca nting, recounting ,retentive , re »

tundi ty , redounding, rea ppointing, repea ting, rebounding, refinding,refunding ; highla nder, Holla nder.

WORDS O F THREE STEMS, THE LAST A HALF -LEN GTH FIN -HOOK SIGN.

§ 549 . [220] G ourm a nd ; tegum ent, a ttachm ent, ta ngent, ta m a rinddocum ent ; judgm ent , pigm ent , pa rdoned ; big-boned, ba il-bond, bellyba nd, Belm ont, burdened, ba reboned ; shipm ent, cha peroned ; esculent,a spira nt ; F a l kla nd, feculen t, fum iga nt ; va ga bond, vigil a nt uncur

rent,endowm ent, una dorned, enj oym ent, una ppa rent, unobta ined,

unbuttoned , unbem oa ned, unburn t, N ew Zea la nd, environed, unim

a gined , N ewHolla nd, unwea kened ; m a inta ined, om niscient , m ilita ntliga m ent, lodgm ent , L a pla nd, elopem ent , la m bent, a llurem ent a rgum ent ; R ockla nd, redolent, R hode Isla nd, a rch-fiend, regim ent , repetend, repa ym ent, repella nt, rubicund, reobta ined, re-fom ent , t e- il lum ined, reorda ined, ha rpooned.

EXER CISE XXVII.

WORDS WR ITTEN WITH HALF-LENGTH SKEL O R SKER SIG NS.

5 5 0 . Suckled, s ickled, seclude ; settled 1.8a ddled, s idled ; s upplied,split ; s a bled . Sa cred, succored , secrete, secret ; stride , stra ight,stra yed , s trode , strut ; soldered ; spra t , sprout , sprite , sepa ra te , sprea d ;s a bered, sobered ; ciphered, suffered ; s a vored , s evered ; sum m ered,sim m ered ; swa rd.

WOR DS WR ITTEN WITH HALF -LENGTH EL O R ER HOOK SIGNS WITH F IN ALESS-CIRCL E .

5 5 1. Clots , clouts , clouds ; glides , gla des , gloa ts , gluts ; pla ts ,pla ids , a ppla uds , plots , plods , pl ights , pla tes , plea ds ; blots , blights ,bla des , bloa ts , blea ts , bleeds ; a s sa ults ; fla ts , flights , flouts , floa ts ,floods , fleets , flits , flutes ; unloa ds ; m elts ; rela tes ; ha lts , holds ;

yields ; wilds , wields , wilts . Crowds , cra tes , creeds ; gra tes , grad es ,greets , grits ; trots , trods , tra its , tra des , trea ds ; droughts , drea dsO pera tes , prides , pra tes ; bra ts , bra ds , brides , bra ids , breeds , brutes

shrouds . shreds ; a ssorts , a sserts ; threa ts , threa ds , throa ts ; fra uds ,

172 THE COMP LETE PHON OG R AP HER .

frights , a fl'

rights , freights , frets , efforts , fruits ; inroa ds , unrootslords ; herds ; ya rds ; wa rds , words .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EF OR EN -HOOK SIGN WITH IN ITIALESS-CIRCLE .

§ 5 52. Scoffed, skiffed. Sca nt , sca nned , second , skinned , s ickened ;sta nd, s ta ined, stent , s toned, stunt, s tunned , s tint , sa ddened spa nned , spa wned , s a pient, spent, spend ; softened ; cem ent, sum m oned ;s la nt , s ilent, sa lient ; surround .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EF OR EN HOOK SIGN WITH FINA LESS-CIRCLE .

65 3 . Ta ft's ra fts , rifts . Ca nts , kinds , counts , a ccounts ta unts ,ta ints , a tta ints , ten ts , tends , a ttends , tints ; da unts , dents ; cha nts ;j a unts , j oints , gents ; pa nts , ponds , pints , pounds , poin ts , a ppoints ,pa ints , a ppends ; ba nds , bonds , binds , bounds , a bounds , bends ; a scents ; a s cends ; fonts , finds , founts , fa ints , feuds , ofi

'

ends , fiends ;va unts , vents , events , vends ; a noints ; m inds , m ounts , a m ountsm ounds , m ends , a m ends ; la nds , lends ; ra nts , rents ; ha nds , h a un ts ,hounds , hints wa nts

,wa nds , W inds , wounds . Wends . winds .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LE NGTH “EN -HOOK SIGN WITH IN ITIA L A N D

F INAL ESS- CIRCLE .

5 5 4 . Seconds ; s ta nds , stents , s tunts, stints ; spends ; sa va nts ;

cem ents ; sla nts ; surrounds .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF -LENGTH SHUN OR TE R . HOOK SIGN WITHA N Y INITIAL MODIFICATION.

§ 5 5 5 . Suflicient , s a nctioned . Sca ttered ; spa ttered , sputtered. Cla ttered , cluttered ; glittered ; tortured .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A HALF-LENGTH EL OR R R HOOK SIGN EN DIN G WITHTHE R F OR EN IIO O K .

5 56 . Cleft, bluffed ; cra ft , cra ved, gra ft, gra ved, grieved, a g

grieved, grooved, dra ft , derived, drift, a drift, pro ved , a pproved,

bra ved. Clea ned , crowned ; gla nd, glea ned, gra nt , gra nd, grindground, a ground , groa ned , grunt, grinned ; tra ined , Trent, trua ntdrowned , dra ined ; pla nt, pla nned, plia nt, pla int, pla ned , print,pruned ; bla nd, blonds , blind, blent, blend, blunt , bra nt , bra nd,bra ined , brunt ; shrined ; throned ; fla unt , flint, front

, a ffrontfrowned, friend.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

174 THE COMPL ETE P HO N O G R A P I—IE R .

judicia ry ; optica l , poetica l , poetica lly, pedigree , pitia ble, pitiful , p ettishly, P otipha r ; a ba ta ble , boa ta ble , bea utiful , bea utiful ly ; thoughtful , thoughtfully ; fitful , fltfully ; evita ble , vitriol ; na utica l , ina ndible

,ina udibly ,

integer , nota ble , nota bly, needful , needfully ,a ntler ;

m edica l , m edica lly , m ediocre , im ita ble , m uta ble , m eta phor , m utineer,m a idenly ; la uda ble , la uda bly ; a rtful , a rtfully , ordina ry ; a rticle

,

ra dica l,ra dica lly, ridicule , rightful , rightfully ; ha teful, ha tefully.

Ca tiline,cotillion ; P itm a n ; a bdom en ; footm a n ; m a d m a n

,Ma de

line , m eda llion ; return ,reta ken . P hotogra ph . A ca dem is t ; opti

m is t , epitom is t, ep itom ized ; footpost, fa ta lis t ; unta xed. Judicious ly,

optim ism , epitom izing ; thoughtlessly ; fa ta lism , feuda lism ; videli

cet, evidencing ; intens ity , intens ive , intens ely, endlessly , needles sly ;m ettlesom e ; a rtles sly ; heedless ly. P hotogra phy . A ctiveness ; godlines s , goodliness ; pettishness ; ofttim es ; a ntiquenes s , indecorous , indigenous , a n tipodes ; Ma ta m ora s

,m odishness , m idshi ps ; littleness ;

rottennes s . A ca dem ica l , a ca dem ica lly , kidna pper ; j udica tory ; ba ttledore

,a bdom ina l , butterfly ; sheet-a nchor ; es tim a ble , es tim a bly

a ntipoda l , enta ngle ; m etrica l , m etri ca lly , m a driga l , m odifia ble ; oratorica l , ora torica lly , era dica ble a rtificia l . Titula tion

,detection ,

dedica tion ; a bdica tion , a bduction ; estim a tion ; indica tion , intention,

intona tion ; m itiga tion , m edica tion , m edita tion, m odula tion , m oderation , ultim a tion era dica tion ,

redem ption ; retention ,reta lia tion .

MISCELLANEOUS WORDS ENDIN G WITH A HALF-LENGTH SIMP LE STEM.

§ 563 . [220] Clothed, clouted , clotted , clouded, clutched, cla pped ,clipped , yclept, clubbed, cla shed , clim a te , a cclim a te , clim bed , cla i m edglided, glutted ; plucked, pla gued , plugged. pledged, pla ud it, pla ym a te ,plum m et

,plum ed ; bla cked, blocked , blocka de , obliga te , blotted, bloa t

ed,bloodied , blotched , blea ched, obliged, blushed , beloved , bla m ed ,

bloom ed ; fledged, fla p p ed , flopped, flip p ed ,

'

fly-bite, flea -bite

,fla s hed,

fleshed,flushed , fluent , a ffluent , effluent , fla m ed ; unlocked , inlocked,

unlicked, un locked , unlighted, unloa ded , unla tched ; rela ted. Credit,a ccredit , crotchet , crouched, crept, cra bbed , cra shed , crushed, cra va t,cra m m ed , cra wled gra ted , gra dua te , grudged, griped , groped, grouped,gra bbed , grubbed , gra nite , grim ed , growled ; tra ct , a ttra ct, tricked,trudged, tra pped , tripod , trepid , tripped, a ttribute , tribute , trim m ed

,

tra iled , trilled ; dra gged, drugged , drudged , dropped , dra ped, dripped ,drooped , drubbed , dry-shod, drum m ed , drea m ed , dra wled , drilled ; a pricot, pricked, prigged , pra ted , a pproa ched , prea ched , a pprecia te , priva te.provide ; a broga te , briga de , bra ided , broa ched, brea ched , brooched,bridged, Bridget, brushed , brea thed, brevet, a bbrevia te

,broiled

shrieked , shru gged , shrouded , shrift, shrived ; a s sorted ; threa ded ,t lirobbed, thra shed, threshed , thrift, thri ved, thrum m ed

, thra lled,

P HON OGR APHIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 175

thrilled ; therea bout ; freighted, fretted, freshet, fra m ed ; over-did ,a vera ged, overj oyed , overpa id, overbid, ove

'rshot,overshoot , overla id,

overloa d ; unrigged, enriched , enra ged, enwra pped, unwra pped, nourished , enwrea thed, unwrea thed , enerva te , nerved, unrivet , enrolled,unrclled

, unrenewed. Crosscut , cla sped, cla ss ified, closeted , crisped,crucified , chris tened, crescent ; gra sped ; trusted ; plea s a nt , prosecute ,precept , preceded , proceeded, perceived , present, presum ed, prisoned ;bla s ted , bla zoned , blossom ed, brisket , brea s ted, Bris ted , bra celet ;thirsted ; fla sket , fros ted, frisket ; enlis ted , unloosened , unreceived .

Ca ta ra ct, ca briolet ; decla im ed, decla red , decrepit , degra ded, dep lored , duplica te , depreda te , depreca te , defra uded , derelict ; Juggern a ut , j eopa rded , genera ted ; upbra ided ; beclouded , begirded, begri m ed, betrothed ; fa brica te ; eva pora ted, vibra ted, venera ted ; unclouded, included , uncrowded , incorrupt , encroa ched, ingra tia te , indirect , unbra ided , unbrea ched ; em ba rked , im preca te , im plica te , imp lored, em broiled lubrica te

,ela bora ted

,libera ted ; recruited, rega rd

ed, regretted, recla im ed , reproa ched . Coincided, ca nceled , couns eled ;ga rrisoned ; Ita liciz ed, tinseled ; detes ted, diges ted, deposited, dives ted, deva s ta te ; ba ckslide , obfusca te ; fa r- s ighted, felicita te ; va ccina te,eva nescent

,Vincent ; unexcited , unta s ted, unp a cified , undecided, un

deceived, indecent , undism a yed, undes igned, una ss is ted, nonsuiteda m busca de, em a ncipa te ; life—es ta te , luxuria te ; recus a nt , ra ns a cked,reins ta te . Deponent ; pa tented, potenta te , unfinished, envenom ed °

rea ppointed,repented , rebounded . A cclim a ted, clinched, clenched,

cra unched,cringed, corrected ; gra fted , a ggrega ted, gra nted, ground

ed ; trunca te , trinket, a ttra cted, trenched, a ttributed ; preoccupied,propitia te

, a pproba ted,profited

,provided

, p erva ded ,’

prom cted , perm itted ; brickba t , a broga ted ; flirted

,flinched, fluctua te ; oversha d

owed ; unredeem ed, unrem itted, enerva ted, unlim ited . Sca pegoa t ;spolia ted, sported , sponged ; subm itted , subj uga te ; suffoca ted ; cc

m ented ; selected , s la nted ; surfeited, survived. Stocka ded s ta gna te ;s tipul a te

,stup efied s tunted, stinted , s ta unched ; s tim ula te ; s tilted ;

s ta r- light ; sta rted, sta rched.

EXER CISE XXIX .

MISCELLAN EOUS worm s WITH MEDIAL HALF-LENGTH SIMP LE STEMS.

5 64. Skeptic ; s a tura ting ; seductive ; spolia ting , Sportive , sporting, supporting , suppura ting ,

spirting ; sm elting , s im ula ting ; sordidly.

Cogita ble ; ignita ble ; a da pta ble , deba ta ble, dubita ble , idiom a tica l,a dm itta ble ; pa rticle , pira tica l , pictoria l , P ortuga l , pa thetica l , porta ble , pa rt-owner ; B a ltim ore ; esthetica l ; fa na tica l , phonetica l ; vegeta ble , verita ble, vertica l , vinta ger ; unpitiful , unpoetica l , inevita ble ,una voida ble , unthoughtful , una rtful ; em pha tica l, m ethodica l , Morti

176 THE COMP LETE PHON OG R APHER .

m er; elliptica l , lim ita ble ; rem edia ble ; reputa ble , refuta ble . redoubta ble. . Ecliptic , chrom a tic ; a ggra va ting ; a ttra cting , a ttributivedra m a tic

,directing, directly ; a pprecia ting , profiting , providing, pri

va tely ,prim itive ; obliga ting, a broga ting ,

a bbrevia ting ; thriftily ;a ffluently, fluently , flirting ; verba tim energetic . c gednes s , dirtiness geodetics , gela tinous ; politenes s . uprightnes s ; shiftless a s tuteness ; vividness , vortex , vertex ; na kednes s , unfitness ; m ort a hze ; liv

i llness , lim itless ; erectness , a erona utics ; ra ggednes s , ruggedness .Executing , ecsta tic . occipita l , a ccenting , cosm etic ; exa cting , exa ctly,executive , exerting ; dis secting , decidedly , despotic, deceptive , decently , dissenting , desola tely ,

dis solutely, desola ting , deserting puis sa ntly ;bisecting, besottedly , a bs enting , a bscinding, a bsolutely, a bsurdity ; a ss a s sina ting ; thousa ndth fa scina ting ; unsta tely , ins ipidity , ins ipidly,unsoundly , innocently , . incentive, uncerta in ,

inserting ; m isguidicg,

m a s oretic ; la cera ting ; resounding , res enting , rescinding, resulting,resolutely .

MISCELLAN E OUS WORDS COMME NCING W ITH A HALF-LENGTH EL O B. EB.

HOOK SIGN .

§ 5 65 . Critica l critica lly , credible , credibly ; glad ia tor, gra teful ,gra tefully ; Drurdica l , drea dful , drea dfully ; politica l , politica lly ;protocol

,prodiga l , prodiga lly brea d-tree , brutishly fra udful

,fright

ful,frightfully, fretful , fretfully, fruitful , fruitfully, fruit-tree ; ver

tebras ; a na lytica l , a na lytica lly, enlightener . Coldness , a ccorda nce ,crudeness ; gla dness , grea tness ; bloodless , bruta lize ; shortnes s , shrewdness ; a scerta ins fla tness

,fleetness , fruitless ; inertnes s ; hardness ,

hea rtless .

MISCELLANEOUS WORDS ENDING WITH A HA L I‘ L EN GTII EL O R ER HOOK SIGN.

5 66. cra dled , curdled, crippled , Crawford , cornered a g glom era te ,ga rgled, gurgled, G ertrude , gra ppled ; trickled , tripled , troubled,trea sured , trified , tra veled ; dra ggled, dra bbled , dribblet, dribbled ;pla ca rd , pilfered , preclude , preterit, portra yed , p rotrude , P ritcha rdperj ured, a ppropria te ; bla ckgua rd , blubbered , bragga rt , bro ideredshriveled ; Ethelbert, throttled , threshold ; fla ttered , fla vored

,fla n

neled ; evergla de , verbera te ; unlettered , unla bored , unleveled , unra v

eled , unriva led , unriddled ; m urdered, m urm ured . Sca bba rd, sca ffold

stickled , stifled , s ta bled ; sna rled ; sla ughtered . s lobbered,celebra te

,

s ilvered, slivered ; circula te , circlet , sour-crout ; swa ggered.

MISCE LLANEOUS WORDS ENDING WITH A HALF-LENGTH EN -IIO OK SIGN.

567. Exta nt, extent , extend, a ccident , occident, expa nd ,exp ound,

expend,ca sem ent , excellent ; exa m ined ; dcsca nt , discount , des tined,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

178 THE COMPL ETE PHO N O G R A P I—IER .

sha dowed,fa tted , fitted , voted , noted , m a tted , a llotted , lighted,

righted , rotted, ra ted , rooted , ha ted ,hea ted ska ted, s potted , spited,

spouted , speeded, spitted clotted,clouded

, glutted, pla tted , plighted ,plotted

, a ppla uded,plea ded ,

blotted,bloa ted

,bloodied , a s s a ulted,

fla tted , flouted , floa ted ,flitted ,

flooded,

fluted ; gra ted , greeted,gra ded, pra ted, prided, bruited, bra ided, brooded, shrouded, a sserted,threa ded , fretted , enrooted, unrooted, lorded ; secluded ; sprouted ,s epa ra ted ; ta inted , a tta inted , tinted, a ttended , da unted, den ted,pointed, a ppointed

,pa inted

,pounded , bonded, a s sented

, a scended ,

pla nted, printed, blinded , blended , blunted, bra nded .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH FINAL TED O R DED DISJ OINED .

§ 571. [225] Dotted , doubted,da ted, doted , deeded, trea ted,

drea ded.

WORDS W R I'I'I‘EN WITH FIN AL HALF-LENGTH ESS STRUCK UPWARD .

§ 572 . [226] F a shionist, fa ctionis t, vis ionis t, elocutionis t, ca nonist , opinionis t .

MEDIAL VOWELS AF TER. HAL F-LENGTH STEMS .

573 . [227] A nticipa te , a nticipa ted , a nticipa tion, intesta te , a ntecedent

,a ntispa sm odic ; a ctive , octa ve , beta ke , betook, bedeck, bedim ,

a n tique , esteem , reta ke .

WOR DS IN WHICH A TEE O R DEE STEM MUST BE USED , BEIN G F O LLOWED BY

A VOWEL.

574. [228] Quito , ca ddy ; gouty , ga udy, giddy, goody ; toto, ta ttoo, tutti , teddy, tidy , to-da y , Teddy ,

toa dy, outdo ; da ta , doughty,oddity , Doty , ditty, ditto ,

duty , da ddy, dowdy, Dido ; cha tty , Chittyjetty , jutty , Judea ,

Juda h ; pa tty ,petty, pity , P a ddy , P edee ; ba tea u,

B etty ,booty , bea uty , ba wdy, B iddy ,

bedew ; cha tea u , shoe-tie , sha dow,

shoddy, sha dy ; fa tty ,fa dy ; veto , vide ; na tty , na ughty. knotty , a unty ,

untie , unto , into, a nnuity , noddy , endow , O neida , needy , niddy, undue ;m a tty , a m ity, m otto, m ighty ,

m ea ty, m ida , m ea dow, Ma y-da y , m uddy,m oody ; L ottie , a lto, A lida , la dy , L odi ; a orta , rowdy , rea dy , R hoda ,ruddy, reedy ; Ha ttie , ha ughty,Ha yti, Ha idee , hea dy. N otice, enticebodice

,a bduce , deduce , reduce .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH A FIN AL HALF-LENGTH, THOUGH EN DING WITH A

VOWEL .

675 . [229] Ca vity , ca usa lity , ca ptivity, cas ua l ty, a ctua lity , a ctiv

ity , ca rna lity, credibility , corruptibility , a cclivity , qua ntity ,cruelty,

s igna lity, gra vity, tota lity, sta bility, ta ngibility, disa bility, dura biL

PHON OG R A PHIC W R ITIN G EXER CISES. 179b

ity, debility , divis ibility , depra vity , declivity, disloya lty , cha rity,jocula rity, pena lty , puberty , pos s ibility , pla us ibility, specia lty, p a rtia lity , plura lity ,

prodiga lity , sup erficia lity, persona lity , spiritua lity,proba bility, proxim ity , superiority [sep rerl] , proclivity , susceptibility,

bruta lity , brevity , ba rba rity , a uthority [ihraz] , fa culty , fruga lity , fata lity , fidelity ,

fa cility, futility , fra ilty , fa ulty , voca lity , vena lity , vita lity , vulga rity, severa lty , ina bility , nobility, sens ibility , individu a lity, neutra lity , infidelity , s incerity , insincerity , m ora lity , im m ora lity, m a teria lity , im m a teria lity , m orta lity , im m orta lity , m utua lity ,

m uta bility , loca lity , lega lity ,illega lity , libera lity , illibera lity, la te

ra lity , legibility , illegibility, loya lty, liberty, s terility, rega lity , rea lity [rell] , ra tion a lity , irra tiona lity , regula rity, hospita lity, util ity,uberty .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH F INAL HALF-LENGTH EL A N D ER STEMS.

576 . [285] In this exercise the letters tha t a re to be written withupstroke s tem s a re ita licized . Coiled culled

,keeled

,killed

,colla te

,

ca ra t , ca rrot ; ga lled , gulled, gullet ; toiled , tolled , tilt , tilled , t oilet ,ta rt

,tired , a ttired, ta rred, turret ; doled, dulled, dea lt , dila te , dilute ,

da rt,dirt

,a dored chilled , cha rred , cha riot j olt , j ilt, Juliet , ja rred ,

jeered ; a ppa lled, piled , pelt , pa led , polled. pea led. a ppea led, pulled ,pa llet , pa la te , P ila te , pilot , polite, pellet , a ppella te , epa ulette , pollute ,pullet

,a part , pira te , upright , uproot , port, peered, pa red, poured ;

ba ld , boiled, ba iled , bolt, ba llot, bullet, ba rd, boa rd, bea rd ; filed,

foiled , fa iled , felt, felled , fold , field , filled , fooled“

,fulled

,folia te , fillet,

a ffilia te,fired , fort, ferret ; va ult , a va ifed ,

va iled,viola te

,violet

,veered

m ould , m ulled,m a llet

,m a llea te , a m ulet

,em ula te

, m ullet, m a rt,

m a rred , m ired, m erit, m oored ; Ha llett

EXE R CISE XXX[.WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE DOUBLE-VOWEL SIG N S .

§ 577. [240] Hurra hing ,na i vete ; pa yee , wheyish , weighing , s a y

ing, pa ying , ba ying , obeying, neighing , la ying,a lla ying , a rra ying,

cla yey , la ity , ga yety , gra yish ; being , seeing , feeing , deify , deity ,deis t , keying , ZEneid , a lbeit , a greeing hygeis t Ia go , G uia na ; Hiero,opia te , a pia ry, a via ry, pa llia te , folia ge , ferria ge, va ria te , devia te , crea te ; hygiene , a iliene , m inutiae ; a rea , ca ss ia , a ca cia , a lluvia , a lia s ,

pia zza . m a nia , filia l , m a m m a lia , m a la ria , m enia l , m a nia c

,etherea l

,1a

bia l,linea l, elegia c, P a phia , P a via ,

Mia m i, E thiopia , Ia nthe , L ybia ,Elia b, L ivia , O livia , A ra bia , O phelia , A m elia ,

Delia , A delia , da hlia ,G a llia ,

P eoria , Iberia , A ssyria , Celia , jEelia n , L ydia , Ilia d , Indi a , B eli a l , B orea s , Hibernia , L iberia ; Dieppe , weightier, ea s ier , Vienna ,Henrietta , Ha rriet, A bdiel , ba rrier , ca rrier . biennia l , fa rrier , Da niel,

180 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHER .

collier , currier, courier , a udience ; bullying. ferrying , va lleying, va

rying, ta llying ,da llying , lobby ing , m a rrying, envying ; a wing , s a w

ing ,pa wing ,

tha wing ,cha wing , j a wing ,

ca wing, la wing , dra wing ;owing , doughy , going, showy, Hoey , m owing , lowing , knowing ,

showish , showing , echoing, towing, billowy ,flowy , yellowish , snowy,

snowing , growing , Bowie-knife, orthoepy , heroic ; doing, wooing,L ouis

, shoeing ,cooing , leeing ,

shrewish , rueing , L ouis a , ta ttooingB edouins ; ca rrya ll ; iota , olio , Ionia , E thiopia , ca m eo, ba gnio , Borneo, ta pioca , folio , nuncio ; idiom ,

onion,union , idiot, B a liol , ideol

ogy , Theodos ia Theodore , A lbion ,G ibeon , G ideon ; va rious , opium ;

a lluvium , om n i um,encom ium

, F a bius , tedious , dubious , Th addeus ,L ucius

,O rpheus , ra dius , erroneous , Julius , curious . [243] F a bii ,

G enii , Honeoye . [244] Eying,buying, vying ,

dying , lying ,a llying ,

s ighing, defying ,frying, drying, crying ; boyish ,

toyish , toying , a n

noying , j oying , coyish ,m oiety, enj oying ; bowing ,

vowing , a vowing,a llowing , cow-itch ; dewy , hewing , viewing , newish , chewing , gluey ,a nnuity , va cuity, a rguing .

§ 578. [245] Theology , bela yer , te-deum , B ilboa , Judea , E gea n ,peon

,

Boa z, pocsy, cha os . JEnea s , cocoa , theory , idea , weigher , wooer, N oa h ,

O wen , poem , towa ge , idea l , Joel , O sceola , m a yor, deer , a ssa yer ; diet,N a ia d , riot showery, Bowery , nigher Uria h , A ha z ia h , diem , fuel , via l ,viol, vowel , a vowa l, towel , j ewel , buyer , fewer , bower, a vower.

EXER CISE XXXII.

WORDS WRITTEN WITH‘ THE DOT AND TICK SIGNS .

579 . [247] Ha p , ha ppy, hop , hope , hea p , hip ,hoop

,Whoop

,hoopoe ;

hob,hub ; ha lf, hufi

'

, hoof ; ha ve , ha lve , hive , hove , hea ve . Hopped,hoped

,hea ped , hipped, beeped ; hubbed ha ft, huii

‘

ed , hoofed ; ha lved,hived , hea ved . Ha pless , ha ply , ha bita nce , ha bita nt, ha bita tion, ha

bitua te , ha bited , ha bitua l , ha bitua lly ,ha bitua ted

,ha ppen ,

ha ppened ,h a ppines s , ha lf-a nd-ha lf, ha lf-breed . P erha ps , A lha m bra , Ingra ha m ,

G ra ha m ,A bra ha m , uphea ve , behoef, beha ve , behoove , unhitch , nu

hinge , Jehova h , tophea vy , tom a ha wk .

680 . The dot Sign forh m a y a lso som etim es be us ed initia lly beforeother consona nts tha n thos e a lrea dy specified, when the word ha s beena bbrevia ted by om itting the s tem ha y from the com m encem ent of itsoutline , a nd it is a fterwa rd thought best to insert a n h-s ign a s in the

words ,—hea lth , hum a n , hum bug, hedged , etc . The tick-s ign forh

[248] need never be used except to dis tinguish between such words a sWhite a nd Wight, whit a nd wit, whet a nd wet, whine a nd wine

, a nd not

even then if it would be obvious from the context which word wa sintended.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

182 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R AP HER .

respective,irrespective , resis tible , irres is tible , resolute , irresolute , res

olution,irresolution

,releva nt [R l

‘l -Vnt] , irreleva nt [R fi-L -Vut] , relative , irrela tive , ra tion a l , irra tiona l , regula rity , irregula rity inna te,innerve , ennoble , em m a ntle.

EXER CISE XxxIIl .

worms CONTAINING THE P REFIXES CO N , COM,

’

ETC.

Q585 . [284] Concom ita n t, ,

concoct , concoction , conca ve , concrete,concur, concus sion ,

congra tula te , congrega te , congrega tion , Congress ,conta ct

,conta gion ,

conta in ,contem n ,

con tend,content

,conten tion ,

contes t, contra ba nd,condem n , conges tion ,confident

,conscious , com

m erce,com m ercia l [5R 9 -SH1] com pla in

,com pl ex

,cum bra nce , cogno

m en , cogna te , cogn ition ; incom pa tible , incom petent , encom pa s sed,incom plete

,uncom prom is ing ,

incom prehens ive,encum bered , incum

bra nce , incum bent , uncom bined , unconfined, unconvinced , incontes ta ble , uncontrolled ,uncontented, unconditiona l , incons ta nt , unconsci ous ,incongruous , irrecogniza ble , irreconcila ble , recognition , recognize , t ecom bine , recom m end , recom m it, recom m iss ion , recom pens e , recomp ose , reconcile , reconciled , reconcilia tion ,

recondite,recons ider, recon

s idera tion , reconstruct, reconvey , decom pos e , decom pos ition ,decom

pound , di scom fit, di scom fiture [Ds2 f F tr] , discom fort, dis com m ode

,

discom pose , disconcert , discontent, discontinue, discontinua tion , nu

reconcila ble,incognito, circum a m bien t, circum ference , circum flex

,

circum ja cent , circum locution ,circum na viga te , circum scribe , circum

spect, circum vent , circum volve .

WORDS COMMENCING WITH TIE P REFIX FO R -E .

’

586. [284] F orba de , forbea r , forbea ra nce , forbid, forever, forebode ,foreclose , forefa ther , foreground, forehea d , forejudge , foreknown , forepa rt , foreta ste , forethought, forewa rn, forfeit

, forfeiture [F l -F tr] ,forsa ke , forsooth , forwa rd.

worm s COMMENCING wi 'rirTm : p m rx ‘MA G N A

,

’

EI‘O .

587. [284] Ma gna Cha rta , m a gna nim ity , m a gna nim ous , m a gna nim ously , m a gnes ia , m a gnesia n , m a gnes ium [M zZHa -M] , m a gnetic,m a gneticia n, m a gnetis m , m a gnetize, Ma gnifica t , m a gnificence , m a gnificent, m a gnify , m agnitude .

worm s COMMENCING wrrn Tm : p nerrx SELF .

§ 688. [284] Self-a ba sem ent , s elf-a pproving, self—a s sum ed, selfplea s ing, self-pra is e , self-love , self-evident

, self-im porta nt, self-de !

pendent , self-determ ined , self-deceived, self-des truction

, self- esteem ,

PHON OG R APHIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 183

s elf-interest, self-knowledge , selfish , selfishly ; self-sa m e , self-suffi cieuts elf- com m a nd , self-confident, self-convicted , self-conceit, s elf- cons cious

worm s COMMENCING WITH THE p a nn x‘WITII .

’

5 89 . [284] Wi tha l [DHls] , withdra w, withdrawa l , withdra wn,withdra wing, withhold, withheld, Withholder, within [DHn3] , withs ta nd, withs tood.

EXER CISE XXXIV.

wos ns WRITTEN WITH THE sum x‘BLE

’

on‘B LY .

’

§ 590 . [285] Dem a nda ble , com pounda ble , pa rdona ble , fa shiona ble,unfa shiona ble , a ctiona ble, la m enta ble , a ccounta ble , una ccoun ta ble,surm oun ta ble , vincible , invincible , ira scible , defensible , indefens ible ,reprehens ible , sensible, ins ens ible , respons ible ; flexibly, s ens ibly,ins ens ibly , forcibly.

wonns WRITTEN Wrm THE surrrx B LENrs s .

’

§ 5 9L [285] A pplica bleness , a m ica bleness , despica bleness , s ervicea bleness , a greea bleness , s a la bleness , m ova bleness , a ffa blenes s , tea cha bleness , socia bleness , jus tifia bleness , plia bleness , a m ia blenes s , va riableness , rea sona bleness , sea sona bleness , ca pa bleness , culpa blenes s ,cons idera bleness , dura bleness , profita bleness , suita bleness , a ccepta bleness , a l lowa bleness , invincibleness , forcibleness , crediblenes s , terr ible~ness , sens ibleness , pla usibleness , corruptibleness .

WORDS WR ITTEN WITH THE SUF F IX ‘EVEB .

’

5 92. [285 ] Whenever , whoever, s oever, wherever, wha tever,however , whichever.

worm s WR ITTEN WITH THE surrrx run.

’

5 93 . [285] G leeful , vengeful , revengeful , wa keful , sha m eful ,bla m eful , ca reful , ireful , wrongful , wishful , wra thful , fa ithful , m irth.

ful , s lothful, m outhful , youthful tha nkful , skillful , wonderful , cheerful , powerful , la wful , sorrowful , Joyful .

worm s WR ITTEN WITH THE surrrx FULN Ess .’

5 94 . [285 ] Drea dfulness , gla dfulness , heedfulness , needfulness ,m indfulness , pea cefulness , gra cefulness , wa kefulness , dolefulnes s ,hopefulness , ca refulness , usefulness , ha tefulness , gra tefulness , spitefulness , wa stefulness , ba shfulness , fa ithfulness , pitifulness , plentifulnes s , bountifulness , dutifulnes s , Im tba nkfulness , ha rm fulnes s , m a n

fulnes s , pa infulnes s , s infulness , fea rfulness , cheerfulness , powerfulness ,

184 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHER .

doubtfulness , fretfulness , delightfulness , frightfulness , deceitfulnessfruitfulnes s , a rtfulness , hurtfulness , j oyfulness .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE SUFFIX LESSNHS.

’

5 95 . [285 ] Heedl essnes s , needlessnes s , endlessness , boundl essness,groundlessnes s , rega rdlessness , bla m eles sness , sha m elessness , ca relessness , m a tchlessness , worthles snes s , recklessness , tha nkfulnes s , ha rmlessness , fea rlessness , thoughtles sness , g uiltles sness , da untlessnes s .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE surrrx INC.

’

§ 596. [285] P etting, pouting,petting, pitting ,

putting , ba tting,biting , ba ting , betting, bea ting, cha tting, chea ting, j otting , j etting,jutting , shouting, shutting, m eeting ,

letting, trotting, tra ding , treading , trea ting ,

drea ding ,plotting, plighting, a ppla uding ,

pla ting,

plea ding . blotting, bloa ting , blea ting, bleeding, building , bra iding,boa rding , breeding, brooding. shrouding ; cha nting , j ointing a d a pting , outbidding , deba ting, a dm itting, lim iting, gibbeh

'

ng , a d opting,debiting ; spotting, spiting , spouting, spad ing, spitting, speeding,sm iting , sm utting , sliding. B ea tings , m eetings , plea dings , blea tings

WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE surrrx MEN TA IrITY .

’

§ 5 97. [285 ] F unda m enta l , liga m ents ] , orna m enta l , sa cra m enta l,

elem enta l , supplem enta l , rudim enta l, regim enta l, com plim enta l , a rgum enta l , detM enta l , m onum enta l , ins trum enta l . Ins trum enta lity.

WORDS WR ITTEN WITH THE surrrx ‘0no0 x.

’

§ 5 98. [285 ] Theology, phra seology, osteology, a rch a iology, ornithology , a nthology, m ythology, phys iology, philology, chronology,EO OIOgy , a strology, nosology, ta utology, cryptology, doxology, ichthyology.

WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE surrrxns ‘sm

'

A'

N D‘SELvrs

’

§ 599 . [285] Him self, herself, ours elf, its elf, thyself, m yself. Our

selves , them selves .

WORDS WRITTEN wrrn THE surrrx sHIP .

’

600 . [285] F riendship, ha rdship , wa rdship , s tewa rdship , lordship,kingship , clerkship , gua rdia n-hip , horsem a nship, workm a nship

,town

ship , schola rship, pa rtnership , copa rtnership, courtship , fellowship ,l a dyship .

WORDS WRITTEN WITH THE surrrx sosvsn.

’

§ 60 L [285] Wheresoever, whichsoever, whom soever

,whensoever,

wha tsoever howsoever

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

186 THE COMP L ETE PHON OG R APHER .

a rithm etic, eccles ia s tic. Write the following words with ful l outlines Va ca tion ,

voca tion ,indica tion , vindica tion , judica tion ,

invocation .

WO R DS FROM WHICH A K on G SIGN MA Y BE OMITTED.

6 607. [287] A nkle , ra nkle , cra nkle , crinkle , sprinkle , wrinkle,tinkle

,twinkle

,uncle a ngle , da ngle , fa ngle , j a ngle , tri a ngle , m a ngle,

spa ngle , s tra ngle , wra ngl e , ta ngle , enta ngle , shingle , jingle , m ingle ,tingle , bunglc . A nchor , ba nker , ca nker , ba nker, spa nker, thinkerdrinker , tinker ; finger , linger , conger, m onger .

WORDS FROM WHICH A P O R B SIGN MA Y BE

608. [287] B a ptist , ba ptism , cha pter , Scripture , sculpture, a s cription , subscription ,

inscription ,conscription , superscription .

WORDS FROM WHICH A N N -SIGN MAY BE OMITTED.

609 . [287] Ma nger , ra nger , s tra nger, cha llenger , pa s senger , m es

s enger, sca venger, ha rbinger , infringer, spunger, plunger, lounger.

WORDS FROM WHICH A N M-SIGN MA Y BE OMITTED .

§ 610 . [287] Sca m per, ha m per, pa m per, ta m per, tem per , dis temper

,thum per ; cha m ber, dism em ber , lim ber, lum ber, tem pera nce ,

tem pera m ent.

WORDS THAT MA Y BE ABBREVIATED BY OMI'I'I‘IN G FINAL SYLLABLES .611 . [288] Subs ta ntia l , credentia l , providentia l , prudentia l , dif

ferentia l , reverentia l , ess entia l , unessentia l , penitentia l , potentia l ;substa ntia lly ,

providentia lly , prudentia lly , reverentia lly , ess entia llysubsta ntia te ; detention, dis ten tion ,

invention , intervention ,repre

hension ,com prehens ion , a pprehens ion ,

declens ion , suspens ion , extens ion ; geogra phica l , orthogra phica l , cos m ogra phica l , typogra phica l,a utogra phica l , hieroglyphica l geogra phic a lly, typogra phica lly.

WORDS THAT MA Y BE ABBREVIATED BY OMI’I'I‘IN G HOOKS .612 . [289] A tta inm ent , a tonem ent , a s s ignm ent, a djournm ent , so

journm ent , spendthrift, identica l , husba ndm a n , la ndlord.

EXER CISE xxxvr—[ws- soa j

PHR A SE ‘ SIG N S FORMED BY JOINING THE CIRCLE WORD-SIGNS TO OTHER WORDS.

613 . [80 1, 818] A s ca n, a s com e , a s go , a s out, a s wha t , a s two,

a s ha d, a s ea ch , a s by,‘ a s sha ll , a s slow, a s she , a s should,a s tha t

, a s

thy , a s they , a s for, a s if, a s few ,a s of

,a s ha ve

,a s ever

, a s long , a s

a m ong, a s on ,a s nigh , a s from , a s m y, a s a ll

,a s well

, a s a re, a s her ,

P HO N O G R AP HIC WR ITIN G EXER CISES. 187

a s here , a s our a s were , a s how,a s high , a s he , a s you , a s your ,

a s when , a s we, a s would ; ha s com e , ha s ha d , ha s ea ch , ha s which ,

ha s she , ha s ever , ha s long , ha s a m ong, ha s on, ha s no, ha s m y, ha s

a ll,ha s her

,ha s here , ha s our , ha s he, ha s your. Ca n his

,a t his , a t

a s,wha t ha s , wha t is , ha d a s , ha d his , cha rge a s , cha nge his , which

is, ea ch h a s ea ch is , p a y us

,by a s

,by his , show u s , show a s , she is , she

ha s , tha t is , tha t ha s , for us , forhis , if his , ha ve us , long a s , a m ongus , on his , in a s , in his , from his , a ll his , well a s , a re a s , here is , howis , he is , who ha s , beyond us , why is , without us , when is , beyond us .

Seek us, sought us , suit us , s a id a s , sued us , such a s , such is , s a fe a s ,

s a ve us , s ing us , Sign his , s a m e a s , s eem a s . A s gra y ,a s ea ger , a s dry,

a s a ble , a s either, a s free , a s evil , a s every , a s only , a s ea rly ; try us ,

dry a s , pra y u s , through us,either is , a wful a s , offer u s , only a s , ea rly

a s . Ha s ca ught , ha s got , is put, ha s a bout, h a s bought, h a s thought ,a s oft

,his foot

,ha s a vowed

,h a s not , ha s m a de , a s loud , a s wide , a s

wet , hi s W it ; a ct a s , got us, get u s , good a s

,ta ught us , chea t us , put

u s , a bout a s , bea t his , showed u s , thought his . fought us , note his ,need us , m a de his , m et us , let us

,a rra yed a s

,write us

,Wide a s . Is

s ick , ha s s a t , ha s sought , his suit , ha s s a id, ha s sued,h a s such , ha s

sung, ha s sown ,is s een

,is soon ,

a s som e ; ca use his , ca us e us , a ccus eu s , goes a s , ea ts his , choose his , shows us

,this is , a vows his , knows

u s , a m a ze his , a m use u s , use his , wise a s a s his , ha s his , a s ha s , ha s

a s , is a s , is his , his is , his ha s .

P HRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY CHANGIN G THE SMALL CIRCLE TO A LOOP .

614 . [3 0 3 , 3 18] A s it ought , a s to wha t, a s to it, a s it ha d, a s thed a y , is it due , a s to ea ch , a s to which ,

ha s to obey , ha s to be, is to be.

a s it sha ll , ha s to show, a s it should, a s it wa s , a s to these , a s to tha t,a s to them ,

is the thing ,ha s to own, is it in ,

a s it m a y , a s to her, a s toour

, a s it were a s to how ,a s to him

,a s to you , a s to why ,

a s to when,a s it would give us the , wha t is it , Wha t is the , owed u s the , Show us

the, a llowus the , where is it ca us e the , beca us e the , a ccus e the , goes the,

a ids the , does the , does it , shows the , thinks the , thinks it, a vows the,views it, knows the , a m a ze the , use it , woos the ; a s the , ha s the , a si t

,ha s it, a s to, is the , is it , is to, a s it is , a s it ha s , ha s i t a s , is it a s .

P HRASE-SIGNS FORMED BY CHAN GING THE SMA LL CIRCLE TO A LARGE LOOP .

(g615 . [3 04 , 3 18] A s there ca n , a s there could, a s there ought, a sthere a s there sha ll , a s there should , ha s therefore , ha s thereever

, a s their view,is there a ny , a s there m a y , a s their a ll ; ca use

their,beca use there , beca use there is , guess there , goes there, wha t is

there,it is their, does there , choose their, shows their, thinks there ,

thus there,a vows their, views their, long a s their, knows there , a m a ze

188 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHE R .

there , a m use there , how is their, he is there , who ha s their , yes there ,use their ; a s their , ha s there , is there ; ca s t their, cos t their, m ostthere

, m ust there , les t there . [3 05] Ha s there not , is there not , is

such,is there seen

,is their s ide

,is there soon .

EXER CISE XXXVII .

P HR ASE-SIGNS FORMED BY A DDING THE EL -HOOK To WORDS.

616 . [3 06] Ca n a ll , could a ll , a t a l l , ought a ll , it will , ha d a ll , doa l l , did a ll , ea ch will , which will , by a ll , but will , be a ll , sha ll a ll ,show a ll

, should a ll , she will , s a w a ll , so W ill,see a ll , wa s a ll , these

will,tha nk a ll , worth a ll

,think a ll , tha t will , they will , though a l l ,

with a ll , fora ll , few will, if a ll , of a ll , ever wi ll, long will , a m ong a ll ,

on a ll,know a ll

,in a ll

,from a ll , m a y a l l , a ll will

,will a ll , or a ll ,

here will,our a ll , where wi ll , how will

,he will

,who will , beyond a ll ,

you will , why will , when will , we will .

P HRASE SIGNS FORMED BY ADDING THE ER -HOOK TO WORDS .617. [3 07] Ca n our, could our , a t or , a t our , to our, two or, which

a re, by our, but our, be our, sha ll our , show our, should our , sa w our ,so our , see our, wa s our , these a re, think our , tha t a re, tha t our, theya re , though our , with our, forour , if our , of our , ha ve our, ever a re,a long our , a m ong our, on our, on or, know our

,in our , in or, from

our , m a y our , a ll our , a ll a re, will our , here a re , where are, how a re ,

he or,

"

who a re,beyond our , yet a re, you a re, you or , why a re

,with

out our,when a re

,we a re, would our .

PHRASE -SIGNS FORMED BY ADDIN G THE WAY-HOOK m WOR DS.618. [3 08] Ca n we, ca m e we, could we, a t wha t , ought we , wha t

were , wh a t would , wha t we , it would , ha d we, do we, did we, ea chwould, which we, but we, but Would .

P HRASE-SIGNS FO RMED BY ADDING TIIE YAY-HOOK TO WORDS .

619 . [3 09] Ca n you , ca m e you , could you , ga ve you , give your,a t your , ought you , wh a t you ,

wha t yea r , to you ,ha d you , do you ,

did you , which yea r , which you , by your, but you , be your .

PHR A SE' SIG N S F ORMED BY ADDING TIE IN-HOOK TO WOR DS.620 . [3 10] In som e , in sess ion , in surm ounting, in s a iling, in sea l

ing, in sla very , in his looks , in his ca s ua l , in his usua l .

P HRASE-SIGNS F ORMED BY ADDING THE EF -HOOK To WORDS.

g621. [811] Ca n ha ve, com e of, could ha ve . out of, wha t if, to ha ve,

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

190 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R AP HER .

the,why the , without the , without it , when the, would the, would it ;

sought the , s a id to, spoke to , a ble to ; ba ck the , check the , becom e

the,lea ve it

,cling to, ring the , ta lk to .

625 . [3 15] Ca n not , could not, ought not , ha d not , do not , did

not , by not,but not, be not , sha ll not , should not

,wa s not , think

not , tha t not , them not , with net , fornot , if not , ha ve not , of not , onnot

,know not

,in not , from not , m a y not , m e not , a ll not , will not,

a re not, or not, were not , how not,him not , yet not , you not , Why

not , when not, would not ; it will not , but will not , but a re not ,

which wil l not , ca n we not , could we not .

EXER CISE XXXIX .

P HRASE -SIGNS F ORMED BY COMBINING FOREGOING P R IN crrL Es .

O 626 . [3 16] Ca n a ll of, ca n a ll O f the , could a ll of the, a t a l l their,

wha t will their, it is not , a t som e other,out of the

,out of it, fora ll

there is , of a l l their own, should a ll there is , on a l l other occa s ion s ,

a m ong a l l the,a m ong a ll the circum sta nces , under a l l the circum sta n

ces , fora ll the , of our own ,if there is a nything , did you m ea n to sa y,

ha ve you not , they ha ve not seen , ha ve you been , ha s ever been .

627. [3 20] Wha t wa s , it wa s , a t one, Where wa s , a t lea s t.

P HRASES IN WHICH THE TICK-SIGNS A R E USED .

§ 628. [32 3] I ca n, I could , I ta ke , I took , I ha d , I do , I did , I

hope , I sha ll , I should , I s a w ,I see

,I wa s , I tha nk , I think , I long , I

own , I kn ow ,I knew, I a m ,

I m a y , I a llow, I la y , I hea r , I recollect,

I would ; I ca n not , I could not , I ha d not, I do not

,I did not ; I

suppose , I sought, I sa id , I sa ved, I seem , I soon, I believe. A m a n ,

a m os t, a s a fe , a s a le ; a n a pple , a n a ppea ra nce ; a nd m y ,a nd m a y ,

a nd then ,a nd though , a nd why . When I wa s

,for I m us t, on a

m ost , should I go, when I, sha ll I, on a,from a ,

to a , did I. [3 24] Iwill , I will ha ve , I will ha ve a ll their, I will ha ve nothing , I will not ,I will not go, Iwill not s a y , I ha ve , a nd a ll I ha ve , a nd a re of no use.

[3 25] I conclude , I contend, a com plete , a nd connected, a nd com

pa re , a nd conceived , a nd consulted. [3 26] The m a n ,the m ost, the

cold , get the , m eet the, enter the , fla tter the , whether the . [3 27]A nd a s , a nd a s a , a nd a s I, a nd a s I ha ve

, a nd a s they , a nd a s the , a sa m a n ,

a s I ha ve a nd I, a nd a , a nd the . [3 29] P a ying the , pa ying a

,

shouting the , shouting a , shutting the , shutting a ,letting the, letting a .

’2

P HRASES FROM WHICH CO N SO N A N ’I‘S A N D WOR DS A R E629 . [340] In a ccorda nce with the principle la id down a t this sec

tion, the writer'

in the following phra ses m a y express ha d a nd would byha lving : It ha d , it would, ha d ha d , but ha d , they ha d, they would,

KEY TO A POR TION O F THE . R E A DIN G L E SSON S. 191

ha ve ha d , he ha d, he would, we ha d , we would. In the followingphra ses the loop of the firs t word is cha nged to a sm a ll circle : Costt hem cos t you,

pa s t them , a ss is t m e, first yea r , next yea r , la s t yea r ,la st tim e , next da y , first da y. [3 42] Mus t ha ve done . [3 43] A bsenceof m ind

,a rrest of judgm ent, los s of m oney ,

m ost of your , la s t of them ,

im porta nce of th a t. [3 44] To risk ,to resign , to do, to a ssum e

,to

look, to lea rn ,to lea ve

,to j oin

,to oblige. [3 45] O ught to ha ve , sa id

to ha ve , which a re to ha ve , they a re to h a ve . [3 46] F rom da y to

da y , from pla ce to pla ce,from week to week ,

from hour to hour,from tim e to tim e. [3 47] Aga in a nd a ga in , such a nd such , througha nd through , yea s a nd n a ys , m ore a nd m ore . [3 48] B etter a nd bet~ter, bla cker a nd bla cker

,deeper a nd deeper

,further a nd further,

grea ter a nd grea ter , longer a nd longer, quicker a nd quicker,shorter

a nd shorter, s tronger a nd s tronger, stra ighter a nd

“

stra ighter.

KEY TO A P O R TIO N O F THE R EA DIN G

L ESSO N S.

R EADIN G EXER CISE XV .

9 63 0 . [3 17] H- a s,a s ever, a s for, a s long, a s though ,

ha s been ,ha s

done,ha s often , ha s gone , ha s he , ha s never , h a s not h -is , is in ,

is ever ,is genera lly , is grea t, is good, is he, is not , his opinion ,

is influenced so

a s , a ll his , but his , which is , ever is , tha t is , a bout his , a ga ins t us ,a m ong u s , a t his , let us , m a de us , a s long a s

,a s m a ny a s , a s good a s ,

a s grea t a s . [3 02] A s h - is , is a s,ha s sa id, a s soon a s , a s is m y, is a s

grea t, is a s good a s , is a s if, is a s true , his soul , fa ce us , gives u s , givesu s his , it is a s , pla ces us . [3 0 3 ] A s to wha t, ha s it done , ha s it been ,

ha s it gone , ha s it found, Wha t is it, where is it, when is it , a s it is , isit a s . [3 04] Ha s there never , ha s there been ,

h a s there ever, wha t isthere

,pla ce their, em bra ce their, unless there , unless there is ; les t

there,m os t there , m a n ifest their , test their. [3 05] Ha s there not , a s

there is not , a s there is nothing, a s there is soon , a s it ha s been.

[3 18] A s wa s , a s it wa s , a s fa st a s , a s to tha t , a s to them , a s would , a sit would

,a s it ha ppens , a s it a ppea rs , a s la rge, a s you, a s to your, a s it

used ,ha s to be.

9 63 1 . [3 06] Wha t will , a t a ll , but a ll , for a ll,if a ll , when will ,

from a ll , in a ll , we will, so will , why will , you will , a s fora ll , a s we

will , a s you will , a s they will . [3 07] Wha t a re , a t our , which a re, by

our,but our

, sha ll our, sh0 u1d our , so a re , wa s our , these a re, theya re , when a re

, you a re, we a re, a m ong our,in our. .on or . [3 08] Ca n

we, could We, do we, ought we, it would. which we; a re we, were we.

192 THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHER .

[3 09] By your , a t your , wha t you-r,do you , did you ,

a re you , wereyou . [3 10] In som e , in sleep , in surm ounting , in soliciting . [3 11]Ca n ha ve , could ha ve , out of, wha t if, to ha ve , do ha ve , did ha ve ,which ha ve , sha ll ha ve

,should ha ve , they ha ve , m a y

‘ ha ve , wouldha ve

,ba ck of

,top of. [3 12] If a n , you a nd , her own , our own , their

own ,for one

,a t one, but one, ha ve been ,

ha ving been , other tha n,m ore tha n ,

further tha n ,older tha n ,

ra ther tha n, better tha n ,they

ha ve been, fa ster tha n , m ois ter tha n, les t their own . [3 13] Ca n there ,could there

,ought their , wha t there , to their , ha d there, did there,

by their , be there , a re there, where there , sha ll there , should there ,ha ve their

,ever there

,wa s there , though there , with their , on their ,

know their or no other , in their or a ny other, a long there , a m ongtheir orother, from there

,m a y there , or their or other , l a y their , will

there , how their, him there,who there , would their, beyond their, yet

there, you there . [3 14] Ca n it or the , could it orthe , give the , a t the

orought it orto, wha t the, to the or it would , ha d the Or it, did it ,which the orit , by the, be it, ha lf the , for the orit , if it, s a w the , wa sthe , tha t the , show it

, should the , ha ve the , ha ve its , a long the,a m ong the , on the , in the , from the

, m a y it , a ll the , will the , or the,how the

,would it or we would , ba ck of the or it, top of the or it.

[3 15] Ca n not,could not

,ought not , ha d not , do not , did not , by not ,

be not,a re not , were not , sha ll not , should not

,wa s not

,ha ve not ,

m a y not , you not , a re not,why not

, would not orwe not. [3 16] Ca na ll of

,ca n a l l of the , ca n a ll their, a t a ll of, a t a ll of the , a t a ll their,

a t a ll their own , out of, out of the , a t ourla t our own , pa rt of, pa rt

of the , were you there , should a ll their, of a ll the or it , of a ll its ,of a ll their , of our , of our own , a m ong a ll his , a m ong a l l the , a m onga ll their

,a m ong a ll others

,while there is , while it is , whil e the ,

ca n you expla in,where were you ,

under a ll the circum sta nces , on thepa rt of the

,on the s ide of the

,da y of the da te , for the sa ke of the, a s

is usua l-ly, a s soon a s it is,a s nea r a s I ca n rem em ber

,a ll the tim e ,

between you a nd , city of N ew York , Sta te of N ew York, did you gothere , did you ever,do you rem em ber, do you recollect, do you believe,did you ha ve a nything to s a y, forsevera l yea rs , gra ndda ughter, son-in

la w,fa ther-ln -la w, da ughter-in- la w

,m other- ia -la w

, ha d you s een ,ha d

there been, on the subject, on ora bout , on or before , s ince you ha ve been,should ha ve been , there m a y ha ve been ,

were you present, where doyou res ide , were you in the ha bit. [3 23 ] I hope, I believe , I spea k, Ispent, I a m not

,I ca n not, I could not

,I a m

,I m a y , I m a y not , I

a llow, I dem a nd , I fea r, I think , a n a dva nta ge , a n only, a nd such ,a nd do you , a nd thus , a nd m ust, a nd which a re. [3 24] I will s a y, 1will spea k, I ha ve never, Iwill ha ve nothing, I wil l not s a y, I will notgo, a nd a l l those, a nd will then, a nd a re you, a nd a re of no use. [3 25]

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

194: THE COMPL ETE PHON OG R APHER .

however m inute the insta nce m a y a ppea r , to pa s s by, without a determ ined

,persevering res ista nce . O ne preceden t crea tes a nother. They

soon a ccum ula te,a nd constitute l a w. Wha t yesterda y wa s fa ct, to

da y is doctrine . Exa m ples a re suppos ed to jus tify the m os t da ngerousm ea sures ; a nd , where they do not suit exa ctly, the defect is suppliedby a na logy. Be a s sured , tha t the laws which protect us in our civilrights grow out of the cons titution ,

a nd tha t they m ust fa ll or flourishwith it . —Junim .

THE HOUSE -F L Y A N D THE DO G .

I believe we ca n nowhere find a better type of a . perfectly free creature tha n in the com m on hous e-fly. N orfree only, but bra ve ; a ndirreverent to a degree which I think no hum a n republica n could bya ny philosophy ra i se him s elf to . There is no courtesy in him ; hedoes not ca re whether it is king or clown he tea s es a nd in every s tepof his swift m echa nica l m a rch

,a nd in every pa use of his resolute oh

serva tion,there is one a nd the s a m e expression of perfect egotism ,

perfect independence a nd self-confidence, a nd conviction of the world’

s

ha ving been m a de forflies . Strike a t him with your ha nd. To him

the m echa nica l fa ct a nd externa l a spect of the m a tter is , wha t to youit would be , if a n a cre of red cla y , ten feet thick, tore itself up from

‘

the ground in one m a ss ive field, hovered over you in the a irfora

second, a nd then ca m e cra shing down with a n a im ! Tha t is the externa l a spect of it ; the inner a spect to this fly

’

s m ind, is of a quitena tura l a nd unim porta nt occurrence—one of the m om enta ry conditions of his a ctive life . He steps out of the wa y of your ha nd, a nda lights on the ba ck of it. You ca n not terrify him , nor governhim , norpersua de him ,

norconvince him . He ha s his own pos itiveopinion on a ll m a tters—not a n unwis e one usua lly forhis own ends ,a nd will ask no a dvice of yours . He ha s no work to do—no tyra nnica l ins tinct to obey. The ea rth-worm ha s his digging a nd digosting ; the bee her ga thering a nd building ; the spider her cunningnetwork ; the a nt her trea sury a nd a ccounts . A ll these a re butcom pa ra tively sla ves , or people of vulga r business . But your fly,free in the a ir, free in the cha m ber—a bla ck inca rna tion

.

of ca

price—wa ndering, inves tiga ting, flitti g , flirting, fea s ting a t his will,with rich va riety of choice in fea s t, from the hea ped swee ts in thegrocer

’s window to those of the butcher’s ba ck ya rd , a nd from the

ga lled pla ce on your cab-hors e's ba ck to the brown spot in the

roa d , from which, a s the hoof disturbs him , he ris es with a n a ngryrepublican buzz—wha t freedom is like his ? F orca ptivity, a gain,

perh a ps your poor wa tch-dog is a s sorrowful a type a s you will ea sily

KEY TO A P OR TION on THE R EADIN G L ESSO N S. 195

find . Mine certa inly is . The da y is lovely , but I m us t write this , a ndca n not go out with him . He is cha ined in the ya rd, beca use I donot like dogs in room s

, a nd the ga rdener does not like dogs in gardens . He ha s no books— nothing but his own wea ry thoughts forcom pa ny , a nd a group of those free flies , whom he sna ps a t with sullenill-success . Such dim hope tha t he m a y ha ve tha t I m a y yet ta ke himout with m e, will be , hour by hour, di s a ppointed , or worse , da rkeneda t once into a lea den despa ir by a n a uthorita tive N o

” —too well understood . His fidelity only s ea ls his fa te (if he would not wa tch form e, he would be sent a wa y, a nd go hunting with som e ha ppier m a s

ter but he wa tches , a nd is wise a nd fa ithful , a nd m isera ble), a nd hishigh a nim a l intellect only gives him the wistful power of wonder, a nds orrow , a nd des ire , a nd a ffection

,which em bitter his ca ptivity . Yet

of the two, would we ra ther be wa tch-dog or fly— “John R uskin,

"

in the A rt Journa l .

CHEMISTR Y— O R G A N IC COMP OUN DS.

Wha tever'

m a y be the power producing chem ica l cha nge , it a cts inconform ity with som e fixed la ws , a nd in a ll its tra nsm uta tions a n

obedience to a m os t ha rm onious sys tem is a ppa rent . It is curious toobs erve the rem a rka ble cha ra cter of m a ny of thes e na tura l tra nsm u

ta tions of m a tter,but we m us t content ours elves with a few exa m ples

only . F or ins ta nce — Suga r , oxa lic a cid, a nd citric a cid a re very un

like ea ch other , yet they a re com pos ed of the s a m e elem ents the firs tis used a s a genera l

’

condim ent, the second is a des tructive poison , a nd

the third a gra teful a nd hea lthful a cid : suga r is rea dily convertedinto oxa lic a cid, a nd in the process of ripening fruits n a ture herselfconverts citric a cid into suga r . A ga in , s ta rch ,

“

suga r , a nd gum wouldsca rcely be rega rded a s a like , yet their only difl

'

erence is in the m odein which ca rbon ,

hydrogen ,a nd oxygen com bine . They a re com

posed of the s a m e principles in the following preportions

Ca rbon. Hydrogen.

Sta rch 12 10

Suga r 12 11

G um 12 11

Thes e isom eric groups certa inly indica te som e l a w of a ffinity whichscience ha s not yet dis covered . Sim ila r a nd even yet m ore rem a rka bl a

insta nces m ight be a dduced of the s a m e elem ents producing com

pounds very unlike ea ch other ; but the a bove ha ve been s electedfrom their well-known cha ra cters . Indeed, we m a y sta te with truththa t a l l the va rieties of the vegeta ble world— their woody fiber— their

196 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

a cid or a lka line jui ces— the va rious exuda tions O f pla nts -_their flow '

ers , fruit, a nd seeds , a nd the num erous products which , by a rt,they

a re m a de to yield forthe uses O f m a n , a re, a ll O f them ,com pounds of

these three elem ents , differing only in the proportions in which theya re com bined with nitrogen,

or in som e peculia r cha nge O f s ta te in one

or other of the elem enta ry principles . The chem is t is now ena bled bys im ple proces ses , from the refus e of m a nufa ctories , to produce frui tes s ences which a re equa l in fla vor to the na tura l production ; a ndfrom benzoic a cid, which is obta ined in grea t a bunda nce from thehouses in which cows a re kept

,the m os t delica te essences a re pro

duced , which a re given to the world a s the dis tilla tions of a . thous a ndflowers . By the im pulse given to orga nic chem is try by L iebig ,

ourknowledge of the a lm ost infinite va riety of subs ta nces , in phys ica lcha ra cter exceedingly diss im ila r, which result from the com bina tionof oxygen , hydrogen , a nd ca rbon

, in va ry ing proportions , ha s beenla rgely increa sed. A nd the science is now in tha t sta te which a lm os tca uses a regret tha t a ny new orga nic com pounds should be discovered,until som e indus trious m ind ha s underta ken the ta s k of reducing to agood genera l cla s s ifica tion the im m ense m a s s of va lua ble m a tter whichha s been a ccum ula ted, but which , fora ll pra c tica l purposes , rem ains

nea rly useless a nd uni ntelligible .—Hunt's P oetry of Science.

MAN A N D MACHIN ER Y .

F orthe Sp irit of the living crea ture wa s in the wheels—Em m i. i. 20 .

Wha tever m a y ha ve been the Significa nce of the sublim e vis ion fromwhich I ha ve extra cted those words , I do not think tha t their essentia lm ea ning is perverted when I a pply them to the subject which com esbefore us this evening . I a m not a wa re O f a ny sentence tha t expresses m ore concisely the rela tion which I would indica te betweenMa n a nd Ma chinery between those grea t a gents O f hum a n a chievem ent a nd the living intelligence which works in them a nd by them .

A nd though a Divine Spirit m oved in those fla shing splendors whichburned before the eyes of the prophet , is it not a lso a divine spirit tha tm ingles in every grea t m a nifes ta tion of hum a nity, a nd tha t m oveseven in the a ction of m a n

, the worker, toiling a m ong innum era blewheels ?P erha ps if we were ca lled upon to na m e som e one fea ture of the

present a ge which distinguishes it from a ll other a ges , a nd endows itwith a Specia l wonder a nd glory , we should ca ll it the A ge of Mach inery. We trust our a ge is unfolding som ething better tha nm a teria l trium phs . The results of pa s t thought a nd pa s t endea vor

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

198 THE COMP L ETE P HO N O G R A P HE R .

ness , m us t be a ccom plished by the a id of som e implem ent . He a lone,of a l l beings upon the fa ce of the ea rth ,

is obliged to invent, a nd is capa hle of endless invention. The necessity forthis spri ngs out, a nd isa prophecy of, his des tiny . The m om ent he wa s seen fa shioning thefirst tool

,however im perfect, tha t m om ent it wa s indica ted the differ

ence between him s elf a nd the brute , a nd the control he wa s des tinedto ga in over the world a bout him . To fulfill this des tiny , he con

fronts na ture with na ked ha nds a nd yet, there is the ea rth to plow ,

the ha rves t to rea p , the torrent to bridge , the ocea n to cross ; therea re a ll the results to a chieve which cons titute the difference betweenthe prim itive m a n a nd the civiliza tion of the nineteenth century.

The Ma chine,then— the a gent which links the gra tifica tion to the

wa nt— is born of neces sity. B ut we m ust m a ke a dis tinction betweenthose instrum ents which a re pos itively ess entia l a nd those , fonjus ta nce , which m erely a nswer the dem a nds of luxury or indolence .

A nd this brings up the question of the comp ara tive uses of Ma chinery—the forem ost pl a ce being a s signed to thos e im plem ents which a re

a bsolutely indispens a ble to m a n’

s exis tence upon the ea rth . But be

tween this a bsolute degree , a nd tha t of frivolous invention , there a recountless gra des of utility . A nd the ques tion of us efulness m us t bedecided a ccording to the sta nda rd of utility which we a pply. If ba resubs is tence is a ssum ed to be the end of m a n upon the ea rth ,

m os t ofour m odern inventions a re useles s . We ca n tra vel without a locom o

tive,a nd procure a m ea l without a cooking-ra nge . The m om en t we

rise a bove the grossest conception of hum a n exis tence , the tes t of use

fulness becom es enla rged, a nd we ca n m a ke a s a fe decis ion uponwha tever increa ses m a n

'

s com fort, a dds to his a bility , or inspires hisculture . In this wa y new things become indispensa ble . Tha t whichwa s not necess a ry d p rim e, is necessa ry now

,in a fresh sta ge of devel

op m ent , a nd in connection with circum s ta nces tha t ha ve sprung upa nd form ed a round it. Tha t which wa s not necess a ry to m a n thes a va ge , living on roots a nd ra w fish , is necess a ry to m a n the civilized,with new poss ibilities opening before him , a nd new fa culties unfoldedwithin him . The printing-press wa s not a bsolutely necess a ry to N imrod orJulius Ca esa r , but is it not a bsolutely necess a ry now? Strike it outof existence to-da y, a nd wha t would be the condition of the world tom orrow ? You would ha ve to tea r a wa y with it a ll tha t ha s grownup a round it a nd becom e a ss im ila ted to it—the textures of the world '

s

growth for three hundred yea rs . P a ul m oved the old world w ithout a telegra ph , a nd Colum bus found a new one without a stea mship. But see how essentia l these a gents a re to the present conditionof civiliza tion 1 How m a ny dera ngem ents a m ong the wheels of bus iness , a nd the pla ns of a ffection , if m erely a snow-drift blocks the

KEY TO A P O R TIO N O F THE R EA DIN G L ESSO N S. 199

ca rs , or a thunder-storm sna ps the wires O urestim a tes of neces s ity,a nd , therefore,

~of utility , m us t be form ed a ccording to present condit ions

,a nd the legitim a te dem a nd tha t rises out of them ; thes e

conditions them selves being the necessa ry developm ents of socie ty a nd

of the individua l .B ut som e of these , you m a y s a y, a re the dem a nds of luxury, of in~

dolent ea s e , of m a n s etting na ture to work a nd la ps ing in self-indulgence. To som e degree this result m a y grow out of the presents ta te O f things a s som e portion of evil will follow in the sweep of a n

im m ense good . But wha t is the precis e s entence to be pa s sed uponthis preva lent luxury ? O f course, a dm itting the evil—which is a p

p a rent'

I m a inta in tha t there is a grea t dea l of good in it tha t it isinextrica bly a s socia ted with m uch rea l refinem ent a nd '

progress . Men

a re a ccus tom ed to spea k of the s im plicity a nd purity of pa s t tim es ,a nd to com pa re , with a ' sigh ,

the good old era of the sta ge-coa ch a nd

the spinning-wheel with" thes e da ys of whizzing m a chinery, A lad dinpa la ces , a nd Ca lifornia gold. But the core of logic tha t lies withinthis rind of sentim ent forces a conclusion tha t I ca n by no m ea ns a dm it , . the conclus ion tha t the world is going ba ckwa rd. I never knewof a n epoch tha t wa s not thought by s om e then living to be the wors ttha t ever wa s , a nd which did not seem to s ta nd in hum ilia ting con

tra s t with som e blessed period gone by. But the golden a ge of Christia ni ty is in the future , not in the pa st. Thos e old a ges a re like thela ndsca pe tha t shows bes t in purple dis ta nce , a ll verda nt a nd sm ooth ,

a nd ba thed in m ellow light . But could we go ba ck a nd touch therea lity , we s hould find m a ny a swa m p of disea s e, a nd rough a nd

grim y pa ths of rock a nd m ire. Those were good O ld tim es , it m a y bethought , when ba ron a nd pea s a nt fea sted together. But the one

could not rea d , a nd m a de his m a rk with a sword-pom m el ; a nd theother wa s not held so dea r a s a fa vorite dog . P ure a nd s im ple tim eswere thos e of our gra ndfa thers , it m a y be. P os s ibly not so pure a swe m a y think, however, a nd with a s im plicity ingra ined with som ebigotry a nd a good dea l of conceit . The fa ct is , we a re ba d enough ,im perfect, not beca use we a re growing worse , but beca use we a re yet

fa rfrom the best. I think , however , with L ord B a con , tha t these a re“the old tim es . The world is older now tha n it ever wa s , a nd itconta ins the bes t life a nd fruition of the pa s t. A nd this specia l condition of luxury is a growth out of the pa s t, a nd is the necessa ry con

com ita n t of m uch tha t is good. O pening new cha nnels forindus try ,

it furnishes occupa tion for thous a nds ; while in m a ny of its pha s es itindica tes a refined culture a nd a sphere eleva ted a bove the im perative wa nts of exis tence .

‘

It is no proof of the disa dva nta ges of

m a chinery, therefore , to sa y tha t it m inis ters to som ething bes idrs

200 THE COMPL ETE P HO N O G R A P HER .

a bsolute bodily need, a nd delivers m a n from a s low a nd exh a ustingdrudgery . So fa r a s it helps us to control na ture , a nd increa ses thefa cilities of hum a n intercourse , a nd diff uses genera l com fort a nd elega nce , a nd a ffords a respite from incess a nt phys ica l toil, so fa r it is a na gent a nd a s ign of progress .

But,it m a y be s a id a ga in, tha t it is the a gent of a selfish a nd ex

cl usive power, enriching a few a nd inj uring m a ny. A nd it ca n not bedenied tha t gra ve problem s grow out of the rela tions between m a

chinery a nd the la boring cla sses . Every little while som e invention isthrus t forwa rd which ta kes a portion of la bor out of the ha nds of flesha nd tra nsfers it to ha nds of iron ; It is not enough to sa y tha t m a n

kind in genera l is benefited by these ina nim a te a gents , which do thework of the world so m uch m ore ra pidly a nd powerfully . This m a y

a nswer a s a n a rgum ent a ga ins t a m onopoly of a ny one kind of m e

cha nica l force . It m a y be a rea son forusing ca rs ins tea d of stea mboa ts

,a nd ba lloons ra ther tha n ra ilroa ds . The genera l good m us t be

a dva nced,wha tever the da m a ge to priva te in teres ts . But the pres ent

ca se brings up the ques tion whether m a chinery is a genera l good a t a llwhether the eff ect of its introduction into a lm os t every depa rtm ent ofla bor will not be felt in the des titution of m illions . A nd upon this pointI O bserve , tha t , like a l l other grea t revolutions , the im m edi a te effectm a y be such a s ha s been sugges ted. But the fina l result will be benficia l

,a nd such a result m a y be tra ced out even now. F orinstance ,

this clogging of old depa rtm ents of la bor will precipita te m en uponfresh ones , a nd upon those tha t ha ve been too m uch neglected . It

will tend to introduce wom a n to bra nches of indus try perfectly suitedto her , but which ha ve been too exclus ively O ccupied by the othersex, a nd to turn the a ttention of robus t m en to thos e grea t fields ofproductive toil which a re a s yet but little im proved. It m a y drivethem from the dependence, the crowded com petition ,

the unwholesom e life of the city, into the broa d fields a nd open a ira nd the sovereignty of the soil . A nd if this im m ense intrus ion of m a chinery hasonly this result , of equa lizing the ba la nce a ga ins t production, we sha llha ve one solution of the problem . A nd there will be a nother solution, if this pha la nx O f m echa nism sha l l lift the m a s s of m en a bovethe occa s ions of coa rse m a teria l drudgery into other a ctivities , whichdoubtless will be thrown O pen , a nd sha ll a llow m ore leisure forspiritua l culture . But in this , a nd a ll other grea t ques tions a ffectinghum a n welfa re

, I throw m ys elf ba ck , fina lly , upon the tokens of

P rovidentia l Design. The world m oves forwa rd , not ba ckwa rd ; a ndthe grea t developm ents of tim e a re forgood , not evil . By m a chinery,m a n proceeds with his dom inion over na ture . He a ss im ila tes it tohim self it becom es , so to spea k, a pa rt of him self. Every grea t in

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

202 THE COMP LETE P HO N O G R A PHER .

Q . In the la tter pa rt of 1861 did you know the E liz a bethport Ba rrelMa nufa cturing 0 0 . T

A . I did .

Q . Do you know Mr. Whitlock , the P lff.A . I do .

Q . Wha t wa s his connection with the Com pa ny ?A . He wa s the Com pa ny .

Q. In the la tter pa rt of N ovem ber, 1861, wha t negotia tions wereha d, if a ny, with reference to furnishing boxes to put ba kers

'm a te

ria ls in Z?A . I a greed with som e contra ctors forthe U. S. P a tent B a king Co.

to furnish them the num ber of boxes I could m a ke m y a rrangem ents for.

Q. The Com pa ny wa s not incorpora ted ?A . N O ; the Eliza bethport B a rrel Co. wa s not . I m ad e a n a gree

m ent with som e contra ctors for the P a tent B a king Co. to furnishthem with boxes , a nd a fter a num ber of convers a tions they fina llya greed upon a price , which wa s to be dependent upon the price theyreceived from the Un ited Sta tes G overnm ent a t tha t tim e.Q. Sta te m ore fully the prelim ina ries in reference to the contra ct.A . The firs t a greem ent wa s tha t they were to turn over the govern

m ent contra ct forthe boxes to the B a rrel Ma nufa cturing Co. F ina llyit wa s a greed tha t they should a llow one cent profit on ea ch box

,a nd

a n a llowa nce fors tra pping them , which they could do chea per tha n I.

The fina l order wa s given to m e by N . T. Spea r ; he ca m e to m y

house a nd wa nted m e to com m ence delivering them im m edia tely .

Tha t wa s a t Eliza bethport, where I wa s res iding a t the tim e . Tha tprice wa s 28% cents from the da ta he ga ve m e. He ga ve m e the orderpersona lly . I then ha d cha rge of the bus iness forWhitlock.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

3 10

7 ¢ Ia s f f ff fi° f f

°

fe

f

m a fl m x’

g fi m

‘4 y . “37 v U“

EXERCISE VI.

M4 7,I4S

‘

Qt186. I92

44 1"

LL .

EXERCISE VIII.

.L. k y k» b

“X: ¢ I87

J.

x d-

O /.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

-vfi - 7

EXE RCISE’

XI. wen Q24 6 .

MW \ (A 7

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

H Q-

fis l b'

f—‘ vca fica

(wh i t .

EXERCISE xvé298_ §3 4 0 .

Q3 O I [qa 7] L L C°s f.

L ’

e— G— h

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

2 Lnssoxs m P HO N O G R AP HY .

A ll the reference m a rks in figures , wh ether in bra ckets ornot,

unles s otherwise express ed, a re to the sections of The Com p lete

P hon-ogra pher. Where two num bers a re given with the wordto” between, both the num bers a re included.

The price of The Com plete P honogra pher is $ 2 ; a nd learners

will find it to their a dva nta ge to order it through their neares tbooks eller. B ut in ca s e tha t is inconvenient, it m ay be obta ined

by m a il, p ost-p a id, on receipt of pri ce, from the publishers , O akley

Ma son, 21Murra y Street, N ewYork.

L E S S O N I .

THE firs t thing for the learner of P honogra p hy to do, is to

thoroughly com m it to m em ory the cons ona nt-s igns in the Ta ble onpa ge 18 ; so tha twhen he s ees a p honogr a ph he m a y insta ntly knowits na m e a nd p ower, a nd when he hea rs

’

its na m e or power, he ca n

ins tantly write the proper phonogra phic s ign.

The bes t wa y to do this is to learn to give the na m es of the s ignswhen a ll of theTa ble is covered except the colum n of P honogra p hs ;a nd then to write the signs when the P honogra phs a re covered.

It is betterin the firs t les s on, however, to only m em orize the firs ts ixteen p honogra phs . The L es son then will be :Mem orize firs t s ixteen P honogra phs in Ta ble on p a ge 18.

L ea rn 19 to 23 . R ea d 25 to 3 0 . L ea rn 3 1 to 37.

Mem orize the two second-pla ce long vowels (dot a nd da sh) inVowel Sca l e on pa ge 27, ta king ca re not to confound the sounds ofthe phonogra phic vowel-s igns with the na m es of the letters of the

ordina ry a lphab etL earn 55 41 to 43 .

R ea d a ll words on p a ge 205 , lines 5 , 6, a nd 7, in which the firs ts ixteen cons ona nt-s igns a nd the two given vowels a re usedW rite the following words p honogra p hica lly, letting the con

sona nt s tem s res t on the line :A che oa k, ga y, a te (oreight), oa t, toe (or tow), a id, ode (or

owed), da y (ordey), doe (or dough), a ge, ja y, Joe, a pe, p a y, P oe,A be, bay (orhey), how (orbea u), show, a ce, s a y, so (or sew), oa th,they, though, oa f, foe.

’

L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A PHY. 3

L E S S O N II.

MEMO R IZE rem a inder of cons ona nt-s igns in Ta ble.

Write phonogra phi ca lly the following words :N a y (orneigh), no (orknow), a im ,

m a y, m ow (to cut gra s s), a il(s ee 22 a ), l a y, low, a ir(use stem Er

, a nd see oar, ra y (use

s tem R ee, a nd see 5 22 b), ha y, hoe , yea ,wa y (orweigh), woe.

R ea d rem a ining words in l ines 5 , 6, a nd 7, on p a ge 205 .

L earn 59 to 62.

W rite g429 .

R eview 3 1 to 37.

Mem orize rem a inder of vowel-s igns on p age 27.

L ea rn 3 8 to 40 . R ea d 44 to 47.

R ea d firs t fourlin es of Exercis e III.,p a ge 206.

W rite the following words p honogra phica lly, observing to p la cethe cons onant s tern in ea ch ca s e in thefirst, second , or third p os ition

61, a c cording a s the vowel-s ign of the word is of the first,second , orthird pla ce 3 6]Caw, Coe, key , coo , ga y, egg, a t, ought (a 'r a ught), a te, toe, too,

ea t,a dd , daw,

a id, doe, Dee, etch , ea ch, a ge, jaw, p a , p aw, a p e, ope,

p a y, ba h, ba y , be , a sh, shah, show,she

, shoe, s aw,a ce

,s a y, see, ea se ,

oa th, thee, fee, eve, on, no, know,a m

, a im , m a y, m e,a ll

, law,a le

,

low,eel , lee, oar, ea r, raw, row ,

rue ha y, hoe, who, yea , you,wa y, woe, woo.

R ea d the la s t two lines on p a ge 206.

In writing the following words conta ining two vowel-s ounds ,p la ce the cons ona nt s tem in the pos ition indica ted by the a ccentedvowelE cho, eighty, a do, eddy, O pie, a bbey, A nna , A nn ie , a rrow [Er],

era , E rie, a iry , arra y, a lla y, a lly, E li, es s a y, ea sy, a s s ay, E m m a,obey,

a shy, awa y.

L E S S O N III

R EAD 48 to 5 0 . L earn g54.

Mem orize the Ta ble of Diphthongs , p a ge 3 1.L earn 5 6 to 58.

R ea d, on p a ge 207, lines 13 , 14, a nd firs t five words on line 15 .Write the following wordsCow cue, guy, tie, toy, out, die, eyed, due, chew, joy, jew,

p ie, p ew, by , boy, bow, shy, s igh, ice, soy, sow, sue, eyes , thew, thy,

thou , fie, few , vie, vow, view , nigh , m y, m ow,m ew , lie, isl e, oi] ,

owl, lieu, ire, hour,rye,row, high , how ; a dieu, a vow, a nnoy, anew,

a hoy, icy, ivy , oily, a lloy, a llow.

4 L ESSO N S rN P HO N O G R A PHY .

L ea rn 63 to 69 a nd 24.

R ea d E xercis e II.

,p a ges 20 5 a nd 206, pronouncing the na m es of

the phonogra phs in ea ch com bina tion .

Write phonogra phica lly 43 0 , pa ges 139 a nd 140 .

L E S S O N IV

L E A R N 70 to 73 .

R ea d pa ge 207, om itting la s t two lines , a nd pa rts heretofore rea d.R ea d 74 to 94.

R ea d la s t two lines'

on p a ge 207.

W rite the following wordsCa p [63 , coop

,ca ke , cook, cog, ca tch , ca b, cube , com b , ca lm ,

ga wk, gog, ga ge , ga m e , ta ck, ta ke , took, touch , top , ta m e, dike , deep ,dea th

,dim e

,cha lk

,cheek

,chub

,j a ck

,j oke

,j ob

, ja m , p a ck, epoch,p eg, pipe, p a ng, pa lm ,

ba ck,buck

,book

,ba g, big, ba tch , bob , ba be ,

ba th,both

,thick

,thum b

,fop , vogue , vouch , vim ,

na ck,na g,

na m e,Ma ck

,m a ke

,m a tch

,m uch

,m outh

,m outhe

,m a im

,ha ck, ha tch ,

hum , ya m ,wa lk

,a wa ke , wa g, w ipe , web.

L E S S O N V .

L E A R N 95,98, 10 3 to 110 . R ea d 96

,97, 99 to 102.

R ea d pa ge 208 a nd fi rs t s even lines of p a ge 209 .

Write the following wordsSa ck skow,

s a ke,s a t, s ight, s ta y , suit, city ,

s a d,s ide

,s a id

,

s eed,such

,s a ge , s oa p

,s outh

,s oothe

, s a fe , s a ve , s a ng, s ing, s ign ,

snow, sun , sunny, s a m e , swa y ; ca us e , ca s e , ga ze , ties , its , da ys ,chos e , choos e , j oys , a ges , a shes , shoes

,thaws

,thus

,fa ce

,voice

,

views , nice , n iece , news , m ous e , a im s,Miss

,hous e , yes , use, w is e ;

s a cks,s a ges , spa ce , s ince .

Sca pe , s cope , s eeking, sea ting, supping, s a fety, subdue, s a va ge,s a nk , sna p , Sm ith , sm oke , swim ; coyness , Thom a s

,deduce

,docks

,

checks,pa thos

,box

,fa m ous

,notice

,ha cks

, ya m s .

Ca sk ta s ty, deceit ; excite , a ccede , ga sp , ta sk, desk , pa ss a ge ,ba sk ; ca us ing, ga zing, tea s ing, deceive , chos en,

Joseph, p a s s ive,

bes om , fus ty, vis a ge, ins ight, m a sk,h a sp , wisp ; fa cing, eva s ive ,

unsung ; pha sm a,m a ss ive

,m a ss ing, m a s on

,his s ing,W es s on ; nicely .

L E S S O N V I .

L E A R N $ 5 111 to 127.

R ea d, on p a ge 209, lines 8 to 14.

W rite the following words :Cha os [111] p ious , science ; cea se s a uce, s a ys , s a ucy ; a sk

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

6 L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A PHY .

dinner, p oker, betra y, figure, voucher, negro, m a jor, locker, archer,

robber,Henry, yoker, wa lker, winner.

Ca ndle ripple,ta lker, chopper, j obber, p ea cefully, regis try ;

bushel om cia l , officia lly.

Ca ll coa rse, ca re , tell , dea r, charm ,a p pea r, ba rber, full,

nea r,nor

,rea l, ha il, yell, wa il, wa r, w ire .

Cycle [158, settle, s a gely , supply , s a fely, seeker, stra y, spra y,s ober, suffer, s ooner, s toker, s ta ger, displa y, vestry extra ,p a s try, ros trum .

L E S S O N 1x .

L E A R N es 165 to 179.

R ea d from m iddle of line 5 , pa ge 211, to end of Exercis e VII.W rite the following wordsQua ke quick, quoth, qua il, ques t, twis t, quench , quaker,

squa b, beques t, require, es quire.Unscrew ins cribe, uns trung, uns ocia ble, unseem ly, ens la ve,ins oluble.Cough ca ve, tough , dea f, cha fe, p a ve, pufi

‘

, beef, ra ve, scofi‘

,

surf, blufi‘

, gra ve, drove, prove , s trive, s ta rve.

Ca ne gown, ta n, dine , cha in , gin ,June, p a n, bone, shun,

a s s ign thin, tha n, fa n,vein,

noun,m a n

, line , a rra ign, ra n,

hen, yon, wa ne ; ca bin, dem on ,pigeon, undone ; sca n, s ta in, Spa n ,

s often, swa in ; cla n, crown ,frown ,

spleen, strown.

Cough, cofi‘

ee ch a fi‘

,ch a fl

’

y, tine , tiny, p en, p enny, fun,

funny, m oney, briny, crony, Chin a .

L E S S O N X .

L EA R N 180 to 200 .

R ea d Exercise VIII , pa ge 212.

W rite the following wordsCa ution [180 ; a ction, edition, option, fa shion, na tion, m otion,

lotion, era s ion, ra tion ; ca ption ,a dm is s ion, m a ns ion.

Ca us a tion decis ion, pos ition, phys icia n, s ensa tion, dep os ition

, succes s ion.

A ctor ca ter, totter, pa tter, da ughter, ba tter , sca tter, pla tter,sp ider, ga ther.Ca ves coughs , p a ves , ra ves , shines , fines , fa ns , nouns , lens ,

a ctions , fashions , a ctors , ga thers .

Ca nes ga ins , towns , dines , da nce , cha ins , j oins , runs ;da nces , pounces ; danced, pounced ; puns ter.Tra nsp ose tra ns a ction

,P ennsylvania , cha ncery.

A cces s ions pos itions , p os ses sion, p hys icia ns , tra ns itions

L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A PHY . 7

A dva nce dining, punish, fa nning, a s s igning running,wa ning, yawning, feigning.

L E S S O N X I

L EA R N 201 to 211.

R ea d E xercis e IX.,pa ge 213 . In rea ding the unvoca lized s tem s

,

g ive the na m e a nd pos ition .

Write a ll the double- length curved s tem s in the three p os itions[204 , 205 , 206] a nd the following wordsSha tter [201, shutter

,shudder, oys ter E a s ter

,thea tre,

thither,fa tter, fa ther, fea ture, voter, na ture , m other, la tter, L uther,

ora tor,wa ter ,Wa iter ; E a s ter-da y, m otherly, inva der ; s ofter, sm other ;fla tter

,holder

,m a rtyr.

L ender s lender,fender

,a sunder

,flounder , m ender, tor

m entor,thunder.

Ma tters m others, s la nders , thunders , torm entors , cylinders .

W rite the follow ing repea ted s tra ight s tem s in the three p os itions

l

P ee-P ee,B ee-B ee

, Tee-Tee,Dee-Dee, Cha y-Cha y, Ja y-Ja y ,

R ee-R ee.

L E S S O N X II

L EA R N 55 212 to 218.

R ea d E xercis e X., p a ge 213 , down to a nd including three lines on

p a ge 215 .

W rite the following wordsA ct [212, ca ught, a ched , got, gout, ta ught, tight, doubt, da te,

d eed,cha t

,j a de

, p a t, a p t , p a te , pout, ba t, ba te , shout, iced [58,ea s t

,oozed

,fa t

,void

,vote

,a nt

,not

,m a de

,lot

,a rt

,ra t

,h a t

, ya cht,Wight, wa it, wa de, wood.

L E S S O N X III .

L E A R N 219 to 23 5 .

R ea d,com m encing with line 4, pa ge 215 , to end of Exercise X.

WVrite the follOVving words :Ca tched copied

,ca lm ed

, ga m ed, ta ct, ta lked, docket,ch a lked

,j a m m ed

,poked

, sh a m ed, thicket, m a im ed,lodged, a rgued ,

ra cked, ha cked , yoked, a wa ked ; cotta ge, a ctive , na tive , w a iting ;s a cked, s ided , speed, s a ved, sm ote , s a lt ; a cts gets , doubts ,bites , thoughts , lights , a rts , ra ts , ha tes , woods ; cla d , gla d, plied ,bla de

,fl ight, floa t ; cried , gra de , trea t, fright, word ; coughed ,

cha fed ; kind, count, ga ined , ta int, dent, fa int, thinned, m end, ha nd,wend ; ca utioned, fa shioned ; coa ct cooked

,locked , cra cked ;

octa gon ca ta com b ; a cted guided, fa ted, shouted ;

8 L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A P HY .

dotted da ted, wa ited ; fa shionis t elocutionis t ; giddy

tidy, duty , pity, m ea dow ; ca vity gra vity , cruelty,s ta bility ; ca rried ta llied

,torrid

,borrowed , m a rried ; gulled,

gullet toiled,toilet

,pilot

,m a rt.

L E S S O N X IV .

L E A R N 23 6 to 246.

R ea d Exercis e XL,pa ges 216 a nd 217.

W rite the following words :Hurra hing weighing, s a ying, la ity, gra yish ; s eeing, deis t ;

hygeis t ; Ia go“

; a pia ry , folia ge ; hygiene , m inutiae ; ca s s ia, a lia s

,

pia zza,P a via

,A ra bia ; Dieppe , Henrietta , a udience ; envy ing, va ry

ing ; pa wing, s a wing, tha wing ; showy, growing,snowy ; wooing,

L ouis , cooing, rueing ; ca rrya ll ; O lio , ca m eo , folio ; idiom ,un ion

,

idiot ; opium ,va rious

,F a bius

,curious ; F a bii G enii ; Hone

oye ; eying vying, s ighing, drying ; boyish ,toy ing, coyi sh ,

m oiety ; bowing, vowing, a vowing ; dewy ,view ing,

va cuity ; theology Judea , B oa z , cha os , theory , O wen ,

poem,m a yor , riot,

diem,fuel

,via l

,a vowa l , j ewel.

L E S S O N XV .

L E A R N 247 to 249, a nd 580 . R ea d 250 to 264. L ea rn265 to 270 .

R ea d E xercis e XII. ,p a ges 217a nd 218.

W rite the following wordsHope hip , whoop , hub , ha lf, ha ve , hea ve , hea ped , ha ft,

ha lved, ha ples s , ha bita tion ; perha ps , A lha m bra , A bra ha m ,beha ve .

L a uda bly a greea bly , likely, ca lm ly ,la zily , lovingly , kingly ,

s trongly, boyishly, m a dly, ba dly , n icely , j elly .

P lena ry sundry, robbery , surgery, a rchery , m ockery ,slippery, wa tery.

Crea ture lecture, culture, ra pture , fea ture, na ture , juncture,a dventure, m ois ture, texture.

L E SS O N XV I .

R E A D 271 to 274.

L ea rn 275 , 276, 282 to 284.

R ea d Exercis e XIII. , p a ges 218 a nd 219.

W rite the following wordsL ibera l illibera l, lim ita ble , inim ita ble , legibly, illegibly,

lega l, illega l, m uta ble, im m uta ble, m odest, im m odes t,n a viga ble, un

na viga ble, nerve,unnerve, repa ra ble , irrep a ra ble, ra tiona l , irra tiona L

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

10 L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A PHY .

from, well, will, her, here, our, a re, were , where, he, him , who-m ,

beyond , yet, you, why, without, when, would, a s , ha s , is , his , a n,a nd, a , the, awe, owe, eye.

L ea rn 292 to 297.

L E S S O N XIX .

L EA R N 298 to 3 06, a nd 3 18.

R ea d Exercis e XV. ,p a ge 220 , down to a nd including threep hra ses

on line 8, p a ge 221 ; us ing the key on p age 191when neces s ary.

W rite the following phra s esA s can [801, a s wha t, a s ha d, a s sha ll , a s tha t, a s ha ve, a s

long, a s well ; ha s com e , ha s h a d , ha s ever, h a s long, ha s our; ca n

his , a t a s , wha t ha s , ha d a s, which is , show us , she is , from his ,

a m ong us , such a s , s a m e a s ; a s only, a s a ble ; through us , either is ,only a s ; ha s a bout, ha s thought, ha s not, a bout a s , let us .

Is sick ha s s ought, h a s s a id, a s such, is soon ; ca use us , use

his ; a s his , ha s his , a s ha s , h a s a s , is a s , is his .

A s it ought a s it ha d , a s to which , a s it should , ha s to be,a s i t m a y ; give us the, show us the, thinks the ; a s the, ha s the, a sit, a s to , is it, a s it is , is it a s .

A s there can a s there ought, beca use there is , unles s there is ,a s there , a s there is .

Ca n a ll a t a ll,it will , ea ch will, which will , tha t will , them

a ll , if a ll, a m ong a ll, on a ll,

-

in a ll,he will.

L E S S O N XX .

L EAR N g; 3 07to 3 14.

R ea d, com m encing on pa ge 221, a t fourth phra s e, l ine 8, down towithin five phra s es of bottom of pa ge.

Write the following phra s esCan our could our

, a t or, a t our, to our, two or, sha ll ourshould our, thes e a re, in or , on or, a ll our, who are, we are.

Can we could we, ought we, but we, do we.Can you [167, were you, could you, do you, ha d you, did

you, by your.In som e in sla very, in his usua l , in surm ounting.

Ca n ha ve could ha ve, out of, wha t if, cha nge of, p a rt of,sha ll ha ve they ha ve .

A t a n by a n, of a n, in a n, you and , herown, ourown, ha vebeen, you ha ve been, other tha n,

m ore tha n,ra therthan, fa stertha n.

Ca n there a t their, sha ll there , should there, on their, a m ongtheir, m a y their, a ll other, would there.

L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R AP HY . 11

Ca n the could it,a t the

,ought to,by the,with the, tha t the,

a ll the,on the

,in the

, would it, h a d to.

L E S S O N XX I .

L E A R N 3 15 to 348.

R ea d, com m encing with la s t five phra s es on p a ge 221 to bottomof pa ge 222.

Write the following p hra s esCa n not could not

,ha d not

,do not

,did not

,sha ll not

Should not,m a y not, would not, ca n we not.

Ca n a ll of ca n a ll of the,a s s oon a s

,a s long a s , a s long a s

there is , wha t w ill there , a m ong a ll the circum s ta nces,do you m ea n

to s a y , on a ll other occa s ions,

’if there is a nything.

Wha t wa s it w a s, where wa s , a t one.

I ca n I h a d,I sha ll

,I a m

,I know , I do not ; a m a n

,a s a fe

,

a nd m y, a nd then ; when I wa s , for I m us t,sha ll I ; Iwill 1

will ha ve, I ha ve , I w ill not s a y ; I conclude I contend,a nd

connected ; the m a n the m os t, get the, m eet the,whether the ;

a nd a s a nd a s I ha ve,a nd I ; p a ying the pa ying a .

Mus t ha ve you a nd I,it ha d it would, ha d h a d , cos t

them ,next yea r, next da y ; m us t h a ve done los s of m oneyla s t O f them ; to res ign to do , to a ss um e ; ought to ha vewhich a re to h a ve ; from da y to da y from hour to

hour; a ga in a nd a ga in better a nd better deep er a nddeep er , shortera nd shorter.

C O N C L UD IN G R E M A R K S .

THE lea rner ha s now p a s s ed over a ll the rules of P honogra phy.

He ha s yet to com m it to m em ory the lis t of words a t 277,the re

m a inderof theword- s igns ,g281 , a nd the contra ctions , 291 a nd 3 5 0 .

This work m a y be divided into sm a ll da ily ta sks of s a y a p a ge or acolum n, a nd thus be m a de com pa ra tively light. The lea rn er shouldnow go on w ith the rea ding les s ons a t p a ge 223 , us ing the key a t

p a ge 193 a s little a s pos s ible . A t this point, if the a s s is ta nce of a

tea cher ca n be ha d to correct a few exercis es , it will be found a

va lua ble a id. F or tha t p urp os e the lea rner m a y cut a s lip from a

newsp a per , write it on a lterna te lines in phonogra phy a s well a s heca n

,a nd s end it to the tea cher. The less ons should not be too long

—not over a pa ge of fools ca p in length . The tea cher’s correctionsShould be on the bla nk line below the outlines corrected ; a nd

references to the s ections of the C. P . conta ining the viola ted rulesshould a ls o be given. If a tea cher ca n not be ha d

,a good subs ti

12 L ESSO N S IN P HO N O G R A P HY .

tute is to be found in the following pla n : W rite a pa ge of the keyand then com pa re it with the engra ved outlines . W rite a nd re

write ea ch pa ge until no m is ta kes a re m a de , a nd then proceed tothe next. N o a ttem pt to write fa s t should be m a d e until thelea rner ca n write correctly . When he ha s rea d a ll the E xercis es inthe C. P .

,good rea ding m a tter m a y be obta in ed inMUN SO N’S P HO N O

G R A PHICMA G A ZIN E,which is printed entirely in p honogra p hy.

KEY TO A P O R TIO N O F THE R EA DIN G EXE R CISES

O F THE COMP L ETE PHO N O G R A PHER .

[P a ge 205 , lines 5 , 6, a nd (5) A che, oa k, a id , a te, egg, a ge, no(orknow), A be, ga y, doe (or dough), go, ja y , da y , Joe, la y, row , ra y ,

low ,c a r

, (6) ode (orowed), ba y , etch , bea u (orhow), m a y, edge , a p e ,a ce, up , Show , p a y , s a y, m ow,

a yes , oa th , a il (or a le), so (ors ew),they, though , a im , (7) h a y , foe, yea , P oe,wa y , woe, oa t, toe, ebb, Coe,Zoe, ka y , low ,

hoe.

[Exercise III. , pa ge (1) P a , ba h , m a,ca w ,

m a y , p a y, da y ,ra y , key , m e

,lea

,she

,a m

,a ught, (2) odd, or, a che , oa k, a id , eve ,

ea se , eke, ooze , p aw, toe , eight (or a te), ea ch , s a y , a sh , l a w,show

,

s o, up , a ce, (3 ) la y, ebb , eel, oa t, ill, oa f, Sha w ,

a p e, p a y , coo, gna w ,

row, though , be , they , ea t, it, a t, (4) to , too (or two), cha w ,fee

, s a w ,

raw,foe

,h a y, you , who, we, ja w,

wa y , woo, ye, yea .

(5 ) E cho , eighty, eddy , a do, E s a u, es s a y , ea sy ,a s s a y , A nna , A nnie ,

a ny ,Em m a,A m y , a rrow,

obey , O pie , (6) a shy, a lley, E ll a , a lla y , E rie ,a wa y , a bbey, a h a !(7) Ca lm , p a lm ,

ba lm, p a r, far, la ugh , p a tch , ba ck, ba ke , beck,

(8) p eg ,beg, dea th , ca ge , ledge , la the , coa ch , lodge, ledge , la tch , neck,

ba lk, pea ch , pitch , p a ck, (9) pea k , peck, king , fob , fib, fop , fip , bog,bug , big, da m , dum b , dim , (10) m um

,m uck

,book

,ca ke

,kick

,cook

,

la ke . lick , lock, luck, (11) ta r, tore, tea r, cha lk, check, cheek, ja m ,

jem , ba tch , beech , took , tick , ca p , cup , m a p , (12) m ob,ta m e

,tom b

,

ba ng, dodge , tooth , teeth, ring, rung, wa lk, wa ke, week, wing.

(13 ) Copy , a ching, awa ke, oa kum ,ta bby , a utum n

,a tom

,touchy ,

a tta ck, a ttic, a da ge , a iding, cha lky , (14) chubby , etching, j ockey ,

ja ggy, p a lm y, a p a thy , pitchy , epic, ba lm y ,ba lky, boggy, buggy ,

a ba ck, foggy, (15) evoke, m um m y, m ucky, enem y , envy ,na vy,

inky.

O A K L E Y 85 M A S O N , P U B L ISHE R S ,

21 MUR R A Y STR EET, N Ew YO R K .

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

2 N EW CL A SSIF ICA TIO N O F P HO N O G R A P HY

EXAMP L E S N tr, L F ltr,5 Mntr, G t, A .

Klt.

Krt Kwt, F ft,

P nt,

P Shnt, 5 P trd , P lnt, P rnt, etc.

R UL E F O R VO CA L IZIN G .

A vowel- s ign p la ced before a s tem is rea d before the s tem ,a nd

cons equently before a ny of its hooks a nd m odifica tions . A vowels ign pla ced after a s tem

, is rea d a fter the s tem a nd a ny initia lhook

,a nd before a ny fina l hook, a nd cons equently before a ny m odi

fica tion.

EXAMP L E S Ia id, a che,J] odor, IQ ova l,

"_D a ctor

, w under,

A m eant; be . a shave. a p lay , w e. Le deaf . 7

cm .

k: m m , 4 5 m otion, 1 ea ter

, p rove, f'

letter, m onom er,

m ender, da te, get, t\ p ra te, g blend

,approved, etc.

IV.— CIR CL ES A N D L O O P S.

A lthough the Circles a nd L oops a re genera lly j oined to a s tem,

they a re IN DEP EN DE N T SIG N S, a nd a re not to be cons idered a s

form ing a ny p a rt of the s tem s to which they a re joined . Thus , in

j_ the circle m a y be s a id to belong either to the D or to the K ;

a nd in Y (the outline for honestly) the Ioop m a y, w ith equa l propriety, be s a id tobelong to the N orto the L . Hence the followingrulesR UL E I. When a circle orloop is joined initi a lly to a s tem

,its

power ta kes effect before a nything else- th a t is , before the powerof the stem ,

a nd of a ll its hooks a nd m odifica tions , a nd of a ll its

vowel-Signs .EXA MP L E S SP

,SK, sP l , Q sF l , g , sMr

,

e_SE W ,

sP r, s sP r, stP r

,sL tr, sKt

, m s t ,sP nd

,

-rsea t, X sa ble,

s a ber, 3‘

session, p sa lter, s lender

,

p settled , sobered

,etc.

R UL E II. When a circle or loop is j oined fina lly to a s tem, its

p owerta kes effect aftereverything els e—th a t is , a fter the p owerofthe s tem

,a nd of a ll its hooks a nd m odifica ti ons , a nd of a ll its

vowel-s igns .

EXA MP L E S ' Ks , k, VS, _0 Kss , to E s s , _9 E s t, _a Ks tr

,

CTws ,_o.Kfs , _g) Kshns , K5 F ehns , T E trs, u, Vns , P ns

,

c] Dnss , _s O nst, P nstr, A Mtrs ,

fl MutIS, _D Kts ,

Mds t, 1, B rits , _o Knts , B lnds,

“o Brnds

,.L. . tea s ,

f ix ;

L EN G THEN IN G P R IN CIP L E O F PHO N O G R A PHY . 3

course, burst

, CV

twice,_9 ca ves

, b fa shions , b m a tters ,

”

47 ?

cylinders , dip na me, “a blends ,

‘S bra nds,etc.

N O TE —The In-hook, a s in t ,

unstrung, A ens la ve,is rea d

before the circle, beca us e it is written before it, a nd is a n indep endent a bbrevia tion or subs titute for a p receding consona nt s tem

(N ) ; a nd the Ishun-hook,a s in -be p hysicia n, is rea d af tera circle

orIoop , beca us e it is wri tten a fter it,a nd is a n independent a bbre

via tion orsubstitute forsucceding consona nt-s tem s (SH a nd N ).

R EA SO N S F O R A L L OWIN G THE P OWER O F THEL EN G THEN IN G P R IN CIP L E TO TA KE EF F ECT A F

TER,

' IN STEA D O F B EF O R E F IN A L HO O KS.

*

EXA MP L E S torm entor, slender

, msum m on their.

I. It h arm onizes with the a na logous p rinciple of a llowing the

p ower of theHa lving P rincip le to ta ke cfi'

ect a fter the p ower offina l hooks ; a nd , while it does not m a teri a lly cha nge the pra cticeof writing P honogra phy ,

it renders the N ew Cla s s ifica tion a nd

Arra ngem ent of P honogra p hy p oss ible.

II. It s im p lifi es the outlines of m a ny m ore words tha n does theold p la n .

W O R DS THA T A R E WR ITTEN A CCO R DIN G TO THE N EW P L A N .

L engthen to a dd -tera nd -der in the followingwords finder, founder

,fa inter, fender, va unter,venter,vender, thunder, a s s enter , a s under ,

O’Sha nter, m ea nder, m a under

,m entor

,m ender

,m inter

,L a nder

,

is l a nder, lender , wa nder , winder, wonder , winter, yonder, h a nder,hinder , hinder, ha unter, hunter , hinter , s la nder , s ola nder, s lender,sella nder

,cylinder, flounder, flinder, there- under

,fom enter

,in

ventor, p om a nder,la vender, rem a inder

, p a lender, inl a nder, s a lam a nder

,torm entor

, germ a nder.

W O R DS THA T A R E WR ITTE N A CCO R DIN G TO THE O L D P L A N .

Vetera n,ea s tern

,s la ttern

,h a wthorn ,

la ntern , suba ltern ,nort_hern ,

s outhern ,m odera tion ,

a ltera tion , a ll itera tion ,invetera ti on

,obli tera

tion,a dultera tion

,fi ltra tion

,m odern

,concentra tion.

III. The im provem ent to the outlines of thewords tha t a re written a ccording to the new p la n ,

is grea ter tha n the im p rovem ent tothe outlines of those words tha t a re written a ccording to the oldp la n . [See illustra tions to hea ding IL ]IV. The outlines given by the new pla n m a y a ll be voca lized

,

A dop ted byMr. I. P itm a n in his Eleventh Edition of P honogra phy.

4 L EN G THE N IN G P R IN CIP L E O F P HO N O G R A P HY .

while thos e resulting from the use of the old pla n frequently ca n

not receive a ll their vcwel~s igns ; a s in m odera tion ,a ltera tion ,

etc .

Hence the new pla n is the m ore na tura l one, a nd the outlines th a tit gives , even in unvoca lized P honogra phy , will be m ore legible.

V. It gre a tly extends the a pplica tion of the phra s eogra phic p rincip le of indica ting their, there, they a re

,a nd other

,by L engthening.

P HR A SE S WR ITTE N A CCO R DIN G TO THE N EW P L A N .

L engthen to a dd their, there, a nd otherin the following : lea n—their,

m ea n- their, wea n-their

,fa n- their

,tha n-their

,th a n-there-is

,then

their,then-there-is

,even-there

,feign-their

,a s s ign-their, la in-there

,

va in-their,w ithin-their

, W in- their, com m is s ion-their, won

- their,

ea rn-their,loa n—their

,shun- their

,shown- there , Shine-there, known

their,dem ea n-there

,bem oa n-their

,wom a n -there

,wom en-there

,

roughen-their,fa llen-there

,m a lign-their

, s la in- there, sum m on-their

,

concern-their, stolen-their, s ta tion- their

,exa m ine-their , s pecim en

there, s trengthen- their

,lengthen-their

,enliven-their, purloin- their

,

rep levin- their,lea rn-their

, m ourn - th eir, wa rn-their, shown-there ,freshen-their

,fa shion -their

,a dm iss ion- there

,s a nction-there

,m en

tion- their, sha ll- a noth er, show- a nother, should - a nother, usua lly

a nother,wa s - a nother

,think a nother , th a t- a nother , w ith-a nother,

from - a nother,for- a nother, if- a nother , ha ve- a nother, of- a nother ,

a m ong- a nother, on

- a nother,ih - a nother

,from —a nother

,how-a nother

,

beyond- a nother, yet- a nother , Why-a nother, when-a no ther,would

a nother,thes e-a nd-other, tha t-a nd- other

,them - a nd-other.

P HR A SE S W R ITTE N A CCO R DIN G TO THE O L D P L A N .

F urther-tha n ,fa rther- th a n

,fla tter-tha n

,h a rder- th a n

,la ter-tha n

,

louder-tha n,m ightier-tha n ,

older-th a n,shorter- tha n

, sweeter- tha n,

wilder- tha n , whiter-tha n , wider-th a n, lighter- tha n , a fter-one, further-one, a nother-one, the-other-one, whether-one, h a ve—there-been ,

a ll- their-own ,or—their-own

,feel- their-own ,

for-a ll- their-own , for

their—own ,from -their-own

,ha ve- their-own , if- their—own, in-their

own,over- their-own , Sha ll-their-own , wa s—their-own ,

a m ong- theirown ,

sha ll-therefore , should-therefore, so

-therefore, wa s -therefore ,

think-therefore,th a t-therefore

,if-therefore

,m a y

-therefore.

The grea tes t los s from a dop ting the new p la n is tha t of not beinga ble to write own a fter lengthened curves with the n-hook. Still ,there is this to be s a id : own is a com p a ra tively infrequent word ,a nd when it does occur , it m a y be written a lm os t a s e a s ily withthe s tem N a s with the hook ; while thr(in there, their, they a re

,

a nd other) is of very frequent occurrence, a nd its stem DHris m uchm ore difficult, a nd occupies cons idera bly m ore tim e in writing,th a n the s tem N . So, when therefore is joined a fter lengthenedcurves in phra ses , ins tea d O f us ing the f-hook forf ore, the s tem F

orF rm ust be em p loyed, a nd is a lm os t a s servicea ble.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

6 PHON O G R A P EIC A UTHO R SHIP .

wa s suggested in the P honogra pher, in 185 1 ; a nd the July

num ber fortha t yea r wa s printed in a ccorda nce with the sugges tion .

VI. The use of a la rge fina l hook on the n hook side of s tra igh tstem s for tr

,dr

,or flI/I'

,wa s fi rs t sugges ted by Mr. Wilbour in or

a bout the yea r 1859.

VII. The idea of constructing the double vowel s ca les of TheCom plete P honogra pher, a nd the pla n upon which they a re ba s ed,were fi rst suggested by Mr. J. A . Ma cL a uchla n ; but the s ignsa dopted for their repres enta tion were s elected by the a uthor ; a ndtheir a rra ngem ent wa s a ls o the result of his la bors .

VIII. The sys tem O f Stenotypy us ed in The Com plete P honogra pher is the a uthor’s . It is

,however, s im ila r, in s om e of its de

ta ils,to thos e of Mr. S. P . A ndrews a nd Mr. H. M. P a rkhurs t.

IX. In s electing the new word-s igns , the a uthor a cted in con

junction with Mess rs . Ch a rles E . Wilbour, J. A . Ma cL a uchla n,E .

F . Underhill, A ndrew Devine, a nd others .

X. The suffi xes for-bleness, f a tness , a nd Jessness , were firs t sug

gested by the a uthor.XI. The use of the la rge loop forthe cons ona nt s ounds sthr (a s

in beca use-there,it-is-there

,etc ), a s well a s forstr, wa s firs t s ugges ted

by Mr. Ma cL a uchl a n . The use of deta ched loop s forha s -it,is -it

,

ha s- there,is -there

,etc.

, wa s introduced by the a uthor.XII. The use of the L E N G THE N IN G P rinciple to a dd tr ordr

,a s

well a s th/r, wa s fi rst suggested by Mr. I. P itm a n ea rly in 185 6.

XIII. F orthe genera l use of the HA L VIN G P rinciple to a dd the,we a re indebted to Mr. Wilbour; a lthough the sugges tion of a

p a rtia l a pplica tion of the principle da tes ba ck a s fara s 1842 .

XIV. The indica tion of of (a nd not of of the) by p roxim ity, wa sfirs t a dopted by the a uthor.XV. The representa tion of to by writing the following word in

the fourth p os ition ,i . c. , below the line, wa s p ropos ed in the “A m er

ica n R eporter,” Ma y , 1848.

N O TE —Those who wish to becom e m ore thoroughly inform edon this subject, especia lly in rega rd to the ea rly his tory of P honogra phy, will find it fully a nd truthfully s et forth , with num erousp honogra phic illustra tions , in the

“Defenda nt’s Testim ony, in the

Ca se of A . J. G raha m vs . B enn P itm a n, in Equity.

"

THE IMP R O VED P HO N O G R A PHY . 7

HOW THE PHO N O G R AP HY O F THE COMP L ETEPHO N O G R A P HER DIF F ER S F R OM THE O LD.

The following a re the Cha nges a nd Im p rovem ents introducedInto P honogra p hy by The Com plete P honogra pher :

SIG N F O R H.

I. The use of the Sign A forh.

N O TE —It is a p rincip le of P hon ogra p hy tha t sim p k sounds be

writtenwith stmp k signs , a nd com p ound or double sounds, with com

p ound signs . The old s igns forh a nd mm were us ed in viola ti on of

this principle. The new Sign forh is sup eriorto the O ld Sign,not

only beca us e it is in ha rm ony with the above p rinciple, biIt beca us eit is s im pler, m ore e a s ily written ,

a nd j oins with grea ter fa cilityto other s tem s . H is not, however, to be cons idered a s the m a te in

s ound of M beca us e it is p a ired wi th it, a ny m ore tha nW, a s the

m a te of R , orY of L .

L -HO O KS.

II. The use of a la rge initia l hook on the inner s ide of a ny curve ,a nd a sm a ll initia l—hook on the circle-side of a ny stra ight stem ,

a s a n l-hook ; thus , Q_F l, 9 Z1, c, N C], A .Kl

,R I.

N OTE .—To this rul e there a re no exceptions , while in the old

P honogra p hy there were eight s tem s (L , L ,R

, N G , S, Z,W , a nd H)to which the Lhook could not be a tta ched a t a ll ; a nd five (SH,

ZH,M

, N ,a nd R ) to which it m ight be j oined , but in a n excep

tiona l,res tricted

,or specia l m a nner only.

R -HO O K.

III. The us e of a sm a ll initi a l -hook on the inner side of a nycurve

,a nd a sm a ll initia l-hook on the s ide op posite the circle

s ide of a ny s tra ight stem ,a s a n r—hook ; thus , K F r, Sr, U N r,

v N G r, f“

L r, c _ Kr, R r.

N O TE . There a re a lso no exceptions to this rule ; a nd'

yet in the

O ld P honogra p hy there were ten s tem s (S, Z, L ,L

,R

,R

,N G , W ,

Y , a nd H) to which the r-hook could not be a tta ched a t a ll ; a ndeight (F ,

V, TH,

DH, SH,

ZH,M

, a nd N ) to which it m ight bej oined, but in a n excep tiona l, res tri cted, or specia l m a nner only.

W A N D Y HO OKS.

IV. The us e of a la rge initia l book on a ny stra ight stem , on the

l-hook s ide a s a w-hook,a nd on the r-hook s ide a s a y—hook ; thus ,

c_ KW.c. Ky. etc

8 THE IMP R O VED P HO N O G R A PHY .

N O TE —This is a fa r better a s s ignm ent of thes e books , both inp rinciple a nd p ra ctice , tha n to use the form er forhr, a nd the l a tterforrl.

HO O K F O R TR,DR

,THR

,O R DHIR .

V. The use of a la rge fina l-hook on the n-hook s ide of a ny s tra ightstem ,

forfina l tr, ctr, the ,or dhr; thus , _3 Ktr, JTdhr, etc.

N O TE —This is a better a ss ignm ent of this hook tha n to use it,a s does Mr. P itm a n

,fora n a dditiona l shun-hook (a la rge fina l hook

on either s ide O f a s tra ight stem being us ed by h im forshun), thusunnecess a rily wa s ting very va lua ble s tenogra phic m a teria l. It is

a ls o a m uch better a s s ignm ent O f the book tha n to a p propria te itto represent the fina l sylla ble live— forthe following rea s ons : F irs t,it is m uch m ore us eful pra ctica lly . A ccording toW a lker’s R hyming Dictiona ry , there a re in the English la ngua ge three hundreda nd fifty

- two words ending in (r,dr

,or thr

,in which this hook

m a y be em ployed with a dva nta ge. A s“a ll thes e words , with a

few trifling exceptions , a re either nouns or verbs , the a ctua l number O f the form er in which the hook m a y be em ployed is tri pledby the a ddition of plura ls a nd poss ess ives ; a nd the num ber of

the la tter quin tupled by the a ddition in ea ch ca s e of the thirdp ers on s ingula r of the present tens e, the p res ent pa rticiple , thep a st tens e , a nd the perfect p a rticiple ; m a king a tota l of s om ewhere betw een ten a nd twelve

'

hundred words . O n_the otherha nd

,of words ending in tim e, there a re only one hundred a nd ninety

five,nea rly a ll of which a re a dj ectives which do not in a ny wa y

furnish a ddition a l form s forthe hook. A dd to this four words ending in

-tivi ty, twelve in -tiveness , a nd thirty- eight in - tirely, a nd we

only ha ve a tota l of two hundred a nd forty-n in e. A ga in , if we

com pa re these two cla s s es of words a s to the frequency of theiroccurrence in Speech , the a dva nta ge will be found grea tly in fa vorof the tr

,dr

,etc .

,us e of this hook. A nd , s econd , beca us e it s ecures

a na logy of repres enta tion corresponding to the a na logy of words,

a s between the form s forthe a ctor a nd the a ction, a s in the words

a ctor, a ction ; crea tor , crea tion ; dedica tor, dedica tion ; Vindica tor,vindica tion ; prognos tic a tor, prognostica tion ; propag a tor, prop aga tion ins tiga tor, ins tiga tion ; na viga tor, na viga tion ; interroga tor,interroga tion ; specula tor , specula tion ; ca lcula tor, ca lcula tion ; regula tor, regula tion ; s epa ra tor, s epa ra tion ; m odera tor , m odera tion ;O pera tor, opera tion ; decora tor, decora tion ; a dm inis tra tor, a dm inIs tra tion ; dicta tor, dicta tion ; a gita tor, a gita tion ; im ita tor, im itation ; objector, objection ; s elector, selection ; reflector, reflection :

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join

10 THE IMP R O VED P HO N O G R A PHY.

in p ra ctice, beca us e it ena bles us to dispens e with the O ld troubles om e, a nd illegible tick word-s igns . F orinsta nce, it m a kes on fa llin the firs t pos ition, a nd m in the th ird ; therefore both m a y be

writtenwith the stem N —it a ls o pla ces a t in the firs t pos ition,a nd

to in the third ; thus ena bling us to write both with the stem T.

N EW WO R D-SIG N S.

X. The rej ection of m a ny of the old word- s igns , including theticks forof, or, on, to, but, a nd should , a nd the briefw a nd 31 s igns forwe

,with

,were

,wha t, would , ye, year, yet, beyond, a nd you ; a nd the

substi tution of s im ple s tem s igns , th a t w ill a dm i t of being fullyhooked a nd m odified to a dd the words a ll,will, a re, owr, or, we, you,own

,a n

,their

,there, it, to, the, etc. ; a nd to which the circles a nd

loops m a y be a tta ched to a dd the words a s , ha s , is, his , a s , a lt-he'

s,

ate-a s,eta -to

,ts-tt

,ha s -there

,its-there

,etc.

- thus grea tly ex tending theuse of P hra seogra phy.

R E JECTIO N O F THE CO R R E SP O N DIN G STYL E .

XI. The rej ection O f the Corresponding Style of P honogra phy,a nd the trea tm ent of the sys tem a s one unbroken whole, inwhichthere is nothing to be lea rned a t one s ta ge of the learner

’s p rogres s ,

which hewill be required to unlea rn a t a nother.

CO N CL USIO N .

The result of a ll these cha nges is the production of a . harm on ious system ,

ea sy Of a cquis ition, beca us e s im ple ; a nd ea s ily rem em

bered a nd a pplied,beca us e free from exceptions. The a uthor is wella wa re tha t oneof the grea tes t im pedim ents to the genera l introduction of P honogra phy heretofore , ha s been the a doption, from tim e to

tim e, of cha nges a nd m odifi ca tions of the sys tem . Still, on the

other hand, he believes tha t the only rem edy forthis evil, a nd prevention forits recurrence in the future, is a . com p lete a nd a bsolutereturn, a nd rigid a dherence , to the s im p le a nd bea utiful funda m en

ta l principles of P honogra phy. This he ha s a im ed to do in a ll hisp ublica tions ; a nd the univers a l exp ress ion of wa rm a pprova l ofhis la bors , on the pa rt of the unprejudiced press a nd p ublic, a ndthe thought th a t he ha s done s om ething to bring the benefits ofthis noble A rt with in rea ch ‘

O f the m a sses , a re nowhis a bunda ntrewa rd.

O P IN IO N S O F PHO N O G R A PHER S.

a ro tem bsrl 'l 1Ms . J. a . Morm on,

R

f’ 861" 867

Dea rSin—A fter a n exa m ina tion of your new Cla s s ifica tion and A rra ngem ent of the Consona nt-Signs of P honogra phy," a nd new R ule forVoca liza tion, Ia m s a tisfied tha t no grea ter im p rov- ent ha s been introduced in P honogra phy inrela tion to its ha rm ony a nd cons is tency, s ince the m u m s system wa s rem odeledin or a bout the yea r 1844. Without introducing a ny m a teria l cha nge in the pra cticeofwriting P honogra phy,—~the only cha nge being an im p rovem ent,—it subetitutes sim p le

’

rules requiring no excep tions , fora s eries of rules , m a ny of thema rbitra ry, a nd som e of them a p p a rently incons istent. It will certa inly a fi

’

ord

grea tly increa s ed fa cil ity in lea rning the a rt” of P honogra phy.Yours truly,

HE N R Y M. P A R KHUR ST.

N ew YO RK, October19, 1867.Ja mes E . Mori son ,

Dea rMA L—A llow m e to exp res s m y very grea t com m enda tion of yourN ew Cla s s ifica tion, etc., of P honogra phy.

” It s eem s to m e to do a wa y com

p letely with the old stum bling-blocks of a rbitra ry a nd incons istent rules , whichthe lea rner ha d to encounter, a nd which the tea cher could not s a tisfa ctorily expla in. F or its brevity, s im p licity, a nd genera l p erfection, I consider it one of

the m ost va lua ble im p rovem ents which ha s yet been m a de.

JA S. L . CR O SBY.

N EW YO RK, October17, 1867.Ms . J. E . Ma nson,

I ha ve exa m ined your N ew Cla s s ifica tion and A rra ngem ent of the Consona nt-Signs of P honogra p hy. The a na lys is is correct, a nd the presenta tion islucid a nd concise. In m y op inion itwill be found a va lua ble amunct in learningthe art of phonogra phic shortha nd.

EDWA R D F . UN DERHIL L .

37P A R K R ow, October18, 1867.Dra m Morm on,

A l though Iha ve long known tha t the chief object a nd effect of your phonogra phic la bors ha vebeen to sys tem a tize a nd sim p lify, yet Iwa s ha rdly p rep a red tosee a ny considera ble result in tha t direct ion s o briefly and unp retentiouslya tta ined a s it is in your N ew Cla s s ifica tion a nd A rra ngem ent,—s ha ppy littlepiece of work which, in m y judgm ent, does m ore to a bolish a nom a lies , a ndtherefore to m ake the P honogra phic A rt logica l, s im p le, a nd ea sy to a cquire, tha nany other tha t ha s been done in m y tim e.

Sincerely yours ,AN DR EW DEVIN E.

12 OP IN ION S or PHO N O G R A PHE R S.

w '

N EW YO R K , OctoberMTI’

Qld troubJ a nus E . MUN SO N , "98 on f

Dea rSin—I ha ve looked over your Cla s s ifica tion a nd A rra ngem ent of the M .

Consona nt-Signs of P honogra phy a nd R ule forVoca liza tion with grea t p lea sure .

Wha t you ha ve done in this work a nd p reviously, in s im p lifying a nd p erfectingP honogra phy, seem s to m e of infinite im porta nce. Heretofore it ha s been too

intrica te a nd too m uch burdened with excep tions to be of wide-s p rea d va lue ;but I think yourp ers evering la bors ha ve m a de it p os s ible forit to ta ke its p la cea m ong school studies a nd becom e of pra ctica l a nd genera l use in da ily a d

'

a irs . If

this sha ll p rove to be the result of your im provem ents , you ha ve rendered a s ervice to the a ge which ought to ta ke no m ea n ra nk bes ide other m ore la uded , p erha p s , a nd high

-sounding a chievem ents a nd reform s .

Very truly yours ,G EO . WAH MA N .

It ha s been the m isfortune of TheA rt of P honogra phy tha t it wa s origina llyla den with too m a ny excep tions to the s im p le a nd bea utiful scientific p rincip lesup on which it wa s founded a nd tha t during the subs equent p eriod of its develop m ent it ha s drifted consta ntly s till fa rther a wa y from its p rim itive s im p licity,a nd becom e s till m ore op p res s ively loa ded with excep tions , by s tra ining a fterdeta iled a nd unim p orta nt s p ecia l a dva nta ges . The la bors a nd p ublica tion s ofMr.

Muns on ha ve been esp ecia lly directed to the purp ose of retrieving this delightfula nd va lua ble a rt from this overgrowth of sup erficia l com p lexity. His p res entN ew Cla s s ifica tion a nd A rra ngem ent” of the P rincip les of P honogra p hy a fi'

ect

ing the Sim p le, Hooked, a nd Modified Stem s , orConsona n t Signs , a nd his R uleofVoca liza tion , s eem to m e a n a dm ira ble condens a tion of s ta tem ent a nd a rea llyva lua ble contribution to them ore orderly p res enta tion, a nd the ea s ier a cqui s itionof the a rt.

STEPHEN P EAR L A N DR EWS.

B a ooxnru , October23 , 1867.

SKA N E A TEL E S, N . Y. , October11, 1867.

F R IE N D MUN SO N ,

I a m well p lea s edwith your N ew Cla s s ifica tion of P honogra phicCons ona ntSigns , with their m odifica tions ; not a s a cha nge in the sys tem , which it is not,but a s a n elucida tion of succes s in your efl‘

orts to free shortha nd from the em

ha rra s s ing a nom a lies of the p a st, a nd which succes s a lone renders this cla s s ification a nd com p rehens ive rule forvoca liza tion p os s ible. To the doubter of yourp revious im provem ents it is worth ten da ys

‘ tim e in exa m ining a nd com p a ringsystem s ; a nd to the student com m encing the study of P honogra p hy, it will beWorth “

ten les sons ,” a nd " three m onths ‘ a p p l ica tion" under the old cla s s ifica

tion, rules. a nd excep tions . Very truly yours ,CHA UN CEY B . THO R N E.

https://www.forgottenbooks.com/join